Home

USER`S MANUAL

1. 3 Calculation Settings Memory 3 4 CH 1 2 Function Off ON Formula Settings es CHO2 Delete Insert SQRT SIN LOG COS EXP TAN ABS ASIN DIF ACOS DDIF ATAN INT MEAN DINT Number of Means 0 ENTER select EXEC register Press the ENTER key to display the Insert De lete pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select Delete then press the ENTER key to register your choice Press the EXECUTE key to delete the speci fied element If the resulting formula is satisfactory press the EXECUTE key again to register it To edit the formula perform the steps described in the following Part C 0e 0 06000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 Memory 3 4 Calculation Settings CH 1 Function Off Formula Settings Insert Delete SQRT SIN 10 LOG COS ABS ASIN DIF ACOS DDIF INT MEAN DINT Number of Means 0 ENTER select EXEC register Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the position of the element numeral channel num ber function or symbol to be newly inserted then press the ENTER key to display the In sert Delete window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Insert or Delete posit
2. 22 4 22 3 Using the REMOTE FUNCHONS a aa E Aaaa nennen 22 5 APPENDIX 5 1 A 1 Basic Specifications sasise eaaa iio a nennen nnne A 2 A2 FUNCHONS A A 3 1 FUMCUONS M A 4 AA Measurement Mode Furictioris iiiciie cotidie conari conexa ee a enk desea A 5 A5 cereis eun 6 A 5 1 V Voltage Input Type aa Red aera 6 A 5 2 M Multi Input Type Amp seeeeeeenennm A 7 A 5 3 LO Logic Type Amp end iic einer Alii sae A 8 AO NISINORYDOVICES Tu LEE A 9 Bloppy DISK DIVE i i oerte et Rep een roue eese bees ius A 9 A 6 2 MO Magneto Optic Disk Drive Factory Installed Unit A 9 A 6 3 Hard Disk Factory Installed A 9 Ar I cinncce cU A 10 A41 RS 2326 Interface RE Hd ERR EOS EXE DERE X EX uta A 10 7 2 GBB IMC ACG EORR DL TI T A 10 A 7 3 SCSI Interface Unit Factory Installed Unit A 10 A 8 DC Adapter Unit Factory Installed Unit sssss
3. Enter register NOTE jr To consecutively input another character on the same row or using the same key first use an arrow key to move to the next input position 8 Press the ENTER key to register your charac ter string 19 5 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 19 2 Using the Arrow Keys and Jog Shuttle Dial for Alphanumeric Input This section describes the procedure for alphanumeric input using the arrow keys and the jog shuttle dial using one example each for numeric input and alphabetic input 19 2 1 Numeric Example Inputting SPAN Values In the following example the arrow keys and jog shuttle dial are used to change the Lower limit and Upper limit SPAN values for Channel 1 from 0 5000 to 0 5000 to the new values of 1 0000 to 1 0000 This example also assumes that the following Step has already been completed Press the INPUT key to open the AMP Settings window Sample Setting Procedure Part 1 1 Atthe AMP Settings window use the arrow keys Bue DB to move the cursor to the Lower SPAN Upper position then press the ENTER key to display 1 Off 0 5000 0 5000 V 2 Off Upper 5000 3 Off Lower 0 5000 0 5000 Unit V Enter select Exec register Part 2 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the BS DENS UPPER position then press the ENTER key to open its pull down menu Use the arrow keys
4. enne nennen nennen 8 5 84 Enabling DIRECT LOgGiNg 2 corre rct ee quid tea oe Fea et eda REV EL ck Ido doe 8 7 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME tnnt eter nitent reser eae 9 1 9 1 Overview of DIRECT SAVE 9 2 9 2 Enabling DIRECT Y T SAVE Operations rennen 9 4 9 3 Enabling DIRECT X Y SAVE Operations sesssssssseseseeeeeeeenmenennnenen nennen nnne 9 7 9 4 Enabling DIRECT LOGGING SAVE Operations sse 9 10 CAPTURING DATA IN A MEMORY DEVICE ener 10 1 10 1 Overview of MEMORY SAVE Operations sss eene 10 2 10 2 Enabling MEMORY Y T SAVE 10 3 10 3 Enabling MEMORY X Y SAVE Operations sse eene enne nnns nnns 10 6 USING THE SCALING FUNCTIONS erit papa rona aat ehe nactus 11 1 11 1 Scaling the Upper and Lower Limits of the Signal Input sseeene 11 2 11 2 Offsetting the Input VAIUSS ea ox 11 7 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS seen 12 1 12 1 Setting Procedures for Capturing 12 2 12 1 1 Saving Data to the Recorder s Internal Memory
5. MODE MONITOR TRIGGER MEM OUT START STOP oy 1 Press the main control panel s MODE EVENT key to display cursor A NOTE Wy When the MODE EVENT key is pressed cursor Ais initially displayed To display cursor B press the SELECT key 2 Turn the jog shuttle dial to scroll the waveform data according to the movement of the cursor NOTE 7 Turn the inner jog dial to move the cursor slowly Turn the outer shuttle dial to move the cursor rapidly 20 5 Using the Cursor Readout Function This function lets you read the time and voltage level at the cursor defined position or within the cursor defined range of memory data being displayed on the screen The procedure below assumes that data has already been captured in memory and displayed again Setting Procedure MODE EVENT PRINTER COPY LIST J FEED LOCAL REMOTE 0 MODE MONITOR TRIGGER MEM OUT O START STOP 20 6 1 When the main control panel s MODE EVENT key is pressed to display a waveform cursor values indicating the cursor s current position are displayed on the Monitor window Turn the jog shuttle dial to move the cursor to the position you wish to read out 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS 20 6 Expanding Compressing the Cursor Defined Range of the Wave form Display to the Scr
6. ssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeenen enne 5 2 5 2 Enabling SimplifiediDirect Recording seisten iaa ye egeo e Xia ees 5 8 CONTENTS 6 10 11 12 FLOW OF SETTING OPEBATIONS 5 reinen teo edt Rena 6 1 6 1 Flow of Setting Operations csiis ninenin 6 2 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS tried pepu brin aaa CH ua igttur adiu 7 1 7 1 Opening the AMP SETTINGS nnns 7 2 7 2 Selecting the Input Coupling MEAS Type 7 2 73 Setting the Measurement RANGE rtr toe deu us exa aede ua ka nma 7 3 7 4 Selecting the FILTER 7 3 7 5 Setting the Measurement SPAN rennen nennen tendens 7 4 7 6 X Setting the Logic Amp s Conditions ssssssssssesesseeeeeeeene eene nennen nnne nnne 7 6 77 Setting the VERNIER Function 2 RE de E 7 7 RECORDING IN REALTIME telnet ooi OR tait iib urere es 8 1 8 1 Overview of DIRECT Recording sssssssssssseseeseeeeneennene enne nnn nnns enne nnne nnns 8 2 8 2 Enabling DIRECT Y T Recording iiic nati ced i ieee ald 8 3 8 3 Enabling DIRECT X Y Recording
7. A OR TERREA i Mis 011086 iii TO ENSURE SAFE AND CORRECT USE 1 1 1 5 sse tete iv Conventions Used in This ManUal ric cineri oci ener tc t sere iene uacua iv Description of Safety Symbols ssssssssssssssesesesese esee nennen nnne iv riw ERR V MDC sie vii 1 GENERAL DESCBIPTIQN 1 1 1 1 II 1 2 kte ata EE 1 2 13 Unpacking Your Hecorder a a 1 3 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 1 sees 2 1 2 1 The Fon Panel e ERE 2 2 2 1 1 he Display Monito tura coe N 2 3 2 1 2 The Amp Control Panel sse nennen nennen nenne nnne nnns 2 4 2 1 3 The Numeric Keypad and CHART SPEED Section 2 6 2 1 4 The Main Control Panel sssssssssssesseeeeeeeneeen nennen nnne nennen nnns enters 2 7 2 1 5 The Conditions Panel ario eor nre eret Ee ated Matas 2 9 22 The Top i r 2 10 23 The Lett i e 2 11 2 4 The Right Patel eerte ae eriperet esu ires AE
8. 1 6 FLOW OF SETTING OPERATIONS 6 1 Flow of Setting Operations This chapter describes the general flow of setting operations The general flow of recorder operations is provided below 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS Specify the settings related to the input MEAS measurement RANGE FILTER mode and SPAN functions See Chapter 7 for more information 8 RECORDINGIN REALTIME Additional functions Record the input signals on chart paper This recorder s functions can be in realtime customized to better suit the target application See Chapter 8 for more information 11 USING THE SCALING FUNCTIONS 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME e Setting Procedures for Capturing Data i i Setting Procedures for Replaying Data Save the input signals in a memory device Searching for Memory Data and record them on chart paper both in Outputting Data Being Replayed onto realtime Chart Paper Expanding or Compressing the Display See Chapter 9 for more information of Data Being Replayed Performing Calculation Operation Area Statistical Caluculation 10 CAPTURING DATA IN A MEMORY DEVICE 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Capture the input signals in a memory device 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 15 SETTING THE WAVEFORM JUDGEMENT FUNCTIONS See Chapter 10 for more information 16 PERFORMING DISK OPERATIONS Saving Loading Your Settings
9. Specifies the range of signal input to be measured The available settings vary with the type of amp installed and the INPUT setting Available Settings V amp 50mV 100mV 200mV 500mV 1V 2V 5V 10V 20V 50V 100V 200V 500V AUTO Available Settings M amp Input setting is AC or DC 20mV 50mV 100mV 200mV 500mV 1V 2V 5V 10V 20V 50V 100V 200V 500V AUTO Input setting is TEMP TC K TC J TC T TC R TC E TC B NOTE h When the AUTO setting is selected the measurement range is automatically selected to suit the signal input The selected range is determined by the input voltage level at the time the AUTO setting is selected FILTER Selects the filter status Available Settings Off Line 5Hz 10Hz 30Hz 50Hz 500Hz 5kHz NOTE Use the Line filter setting to cut off noise 50 60 Hz from the power line when such noise is affecting the signal input The 5Hz to 5kHz settings each correspond to a lowpass filter which cuts off signals of a frequency higher than the frequency specified by the FILTER setting The setting of each lowpass filter is 3 dB typical MISC s Additional settings may be required according to the type of amp installed Specify the additional settings as necessary SCALING Displays the current setting of the SCALE function on the ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS window NOTE The SCALE parameter in the AMP
10. page 4 27 Tree Structure of STOP CONDITION Parameters STOP CONDITION L SOURCE OFF INTERNAL L TYPE I NORMAL L COMBINATION LEVEL OR MODE I OFF L LOWER LEVEL UPPER LL L LOWER LEVEL UPPER Condition A I Win in LOWER LEVEL UPPER Win Out LOWER LEVEL UPPER L Trigger Counter Count FILTER LEVEL AND r Condition A Trigger Counter Count FILTER EDGE OR Condition A L EDGE AND Condition A L SLOPE CH LOWER dV LEVEL UPPER dT DIRECTION MODE MANUAL I EXTERNAL n E 1 1 TIME Select this function using the Source parameter After the Start Condition is met and triggers the start of measurement measurement stops after the time interval specified by this function 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 4 3 Possible Combinations of Source Settings The table below describes the operation resulting from different combinations of Source settings for the Start Condition and Stop Condition Source of Source of Start Condition Stop Condition Operation Off Off After measurement is started by pressing the START key by pressing the START key Internal After measurement is started by pressing the START key it is stopped when the specified Stop Condition is met Manual After measurement is started by pressing the START key it is stopped by pressing the TRIGGER key External After measurement is start
11. 10 2 10 CAPTURING DATA IN A MEMORY DEVICE 10 2 Enabling MEMORY Y T SAVE Operations To set up your recorder for MEMORY Y T SAVE operations perform the steps described in this section The procedure described only includes the steps directly related to enabling MEMORY Y T SAVE operations For other settings see the pertinent section in Chapter 11 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS through Chapter 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR NOTE Before proceeding to the following settings be sure to first complete the settings described in Chapter 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS Setting Procedure Part 1 Select the measurement mode 1 Press the main control panel s MODE key to switch the mea Memory Settings window surement mode to RECORDER Capture Destination setting 1 Memory Part 2 Settings at the Memory Settings window 2 Disk 2 Press the MEMORY key to open the Memory Settings window 3 Setthe Capture Destination parameter 4 Setthe Sampling Interval parameter 5 Set other parameters related to data capture When the Capture Destination setting is Memory Set the Block Size parameter Set the Memory Expansion parameter Set the Memory Chain parameter Set the Capture Block parameter When the Capture Destination setting is Disk hes Set the File Name parameter Set the No of Channels parameter Set the Event parameter Logic setting NOTE 7
12. 3 12 3 5 3 Connecting the Logic Cable to a Logic Amp 3 13 3 6 Connecting the Recorder to a Power 3 14 3 6 1 Connecting to an AC Power Supply issnin ias aeiiaaie aa 3 14 3 6 2 Connecting to a DC Power Supply 3 15 viii CONTENTS S 74 Joading Clhiart Paper dtt t dues Abt reas pen ae es teehee 3 18 34L1 Loading ROolliPap6er eiii epa rit uS rtis 3 18 3 7 2 Mounting the Internal Z Fold 3 20 3 7 3 Loading Z Fold Paper in the Long Length Z Fold 3 22 3 8 Attaching the Writing eatin 3 26 3 9 Changing the Display Language ssssseeeneeeeennenennenennenen nennen nnnm nnns nnne nnns 3 27 3 10 Momentary Interruption of the AC Power 3 27 3 11 Protecting the Thermal Printhead 3 27 3 12 Notes on Temperature Measurement esssssssssssseeseeeee enne nnne 3 27 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 1 4 1 Structure of the Menus sessssssssssssss
13. 11 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Number of CH position then press the ENTER Capture Destination Disk key to display its pull down menu Sampling Interval 1ms 1kHz 12 Use the arrow keys to select the target channel for data capture then press the ENTER key to File Name B N DEFAULLDAT VW register your setting Number of CH Event of NOTE W Logic Off Memory Settings Memory 1 4 For information about the Number of CH pa rameter see Subsection 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window 2 3 4 13 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Event position then press the ENTER key to Capture Destination Disk display its pull down menu Sampling Interval 1ms 1kHz 14 Use the arrow keys to select On then press the ENTER key to register your setting Memory Settings Memory 1 4 File Name B DEFAULT DAT v e Number of CH 1 NOTE 7 Event Off 5 Logic Off For information about the Event parameter see Subsection 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window Part 6 lt lt Perform the steps below only if a logic amp is installed and the Logic setting in the AMP Set tings window is Enable gt gt 15 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Logic position then press the ENTER key to Capture Destination Disk display its pull down menu Sampling Interval 1ms 1kHz 16 Use the arrow keys to select On then press the ENTER key to register
14. play its pull down menu Parity itla cd Stop Bit s 4 Use the arrow keys to select the desired number z Parity of stop bits then press the ENTER key to register meou Flow Control your setting Timeout 5 If you are finished changing all of your RS 232C ENTER select EXEC register A aa er en ean 17 3 4 Selecting the Parity Mode The Parity parameter determines the parity mode used during data transfer via the RS 232C interface For more information see Subsection 4 7 3 The Option Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the Option Set tings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Change Remote I F RS 232C Settings on the right of RS 232C Settings then RS 232C Settings y press the ENTER key to display the RS 232C Set Speed tings submenu Length Speed 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Par Stop Bit a n ity position then press the ENTER key to display Parity engt MS its pull down menu Flow Co stop AS 4 Use the arrow keys to select the desired mode Timeout Parity then press the ENTER key to register your setting POW Control 5 If you are finished changing all of your RS 232C Timeout settings press the EXECUTE key to register them Option Settings System 2 4 odd 17 4 17 SETTING THE INTERFACE FUNCTIONS 17 3 5 Selecting the Handshaking Flow Control Mode The Flow Control parameter setting determines the han
15. 10 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Lower Level Upper position under Start Con dition or Stop Condition then press the ENTER key to display its window 11 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial to specify the desired level then press the ENTER key to register your setting NOTE hy For details on how to input numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANU MERIC CHARACTERS lt lt When the Mode setting is Window In or Window Out gt gt 1 T H 50 2 set Value Ef Limits 0 100 Press Enter to register Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Type Normal Combination Level AND CH Mode Lower Level Upper 1 Winln 1 1096 2 Off 10 Upper Lower Enter select Exec register 13 6 10 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Lower Level Upper position under Start Con dition or Stop Condition then press the EN TER key to display its window 11 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Upper position then press the ENTER key to display its window 12 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to gether with the jog shuttle dial to specify the desired Upper level then press the ENTER key to register your setting NOTE hy For details on how to input numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANU MERIC CHARACTERS 13 Repeat Steps 11 and 12 to also specify the Lower level parame
16. Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Settings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Marker position then press the ENTER key to CH ID display its pull down menu Marker Use the arrow keys to select Timing or Event then press the ENTER key to register your set Scale Print ting Record Settings Record 1 3 Part 2 lt lt If you selected Timing in Step 3 you must also set the Interval parameter gt gt 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Interval position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Marker Timing 5 Use the arrow keys to select the desired marker Interval interval then press the ENTER key to register Record Settings Record 1 3 Scale Print 1s your setting 1min 10min 1h 10h 14 5 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 1 8 Printing a Scale on Chart Paper To enable the printing of a scale on chart paper after measurement is completed perform the steps below For more information about the Scale Print parameter see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Settings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Interval 10s Scale Print position then press the ENTER key Scale Print Off to display its pull down menu Off Use the arrow keys to sele
17. For details on how to set format related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 10 7 10 CAPTURING DATA IN A MEMORY DEVICE 10 8 Part 6 Start measurement 18 Press the CLOSE key to close the currently opened window 19 Press the START key 20 Press the TRIGGER key if the Start Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual Part 7 Stop measurement 21 Press the TRIGGER key if the Stop Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual 22 Press the STOP key Part 8 Set the Replay Conditions for the Captured Data 23 Press the MEMORY key to open the Data Replay Settings win dow 24 Set the Replay Source parameter 25 Set the Capture Block or File Name parameter When the Replay Source setting is Memory Set the Capture Block parameter When the Replay Source seiting is Disk Set the File Name parameter 26 Set the Replay CH parameter 27 Set the Output Ratio parameter Part 9 Replay the Captured Data 28 Press the main control panel s MEM OUT key NOTE 7 To concurrently record the replay data onto chart paper press the EXECUTE key to open the EXECUTE menu and set a Printer Output operation For instructions see Section 12 6 Outputting Data Being Replayed onto Chart Paper When captured data is replayed the operating mode auto matically switches to Replay mode In Replay mode the recorder s
18. Logic amp Plug in type 16 channels unit dedicated slot PC Interface I F Slot 1 RS 232C I F Slot 2 Plug in type GP IB or SCSI 3 Remote interface TTL remote control Start Stop Trigger in out EXT Feed M C Alarm EXT Event EXT Sampling clock AC Line fail Memory capacity Built in disk drive 256 kwords ch memory expandable up to 512 kW ch 3 5 FDD Standard 3 5 MOD User specifiable To replace the FDD 3 5 HDD User specifiable In addition to the FDD or MOD Display screen 10 4 TFT color display 640 x 480 dots Recording method Thermal dot array 8 dots mm Chart paper Roll paper PR231A Long length Z fold paper PZ231A Internal Z fold paper PZ100 210mm width x 40m length black trace 210mm width x 100m length black trace 210mm width x 20m length black trace Recorded width Isolation voltage 205 mm 1 640 dots 1 min at 2300 VAC between the AC power supply and frame Isolation resistance 100 M ohms or more at 500VDC between the AC power supply and frame Backup functions Settings EEPROM Clock Secondary lithium battery Operating range 0 to 40 C 30 to 80 RH 5 to 35 C for printing Power rating Operating noise level 100 to 120 200 to 240 VAC automatically selected 50 60 Hz Standby status Within 60 dBA During recording Within 65 dBA Power consumption approx 360 VA maximu
19. 13 4 Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Time Gate Relative Time Time Setting W Function Memory Action Repeat Start Condition Source Internal Type Normal Combination CH Mode Lower Level Level OR Level AND Edge OR Edge AND Part 4 Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Normal Combination Edge OR Win In Win Out 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Combination position under Start Condition or Stop Condition then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select Level OR or Edge OR then press the ENTER key to register your setting NOTE For more information about the Level OR and Edge OR parameters see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Mode position under Start Condition or Stop Condition then press the Enter key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select H Y L Win In or Win Out then press the ENTER key to regis ter your setting NOTE jr For more information about the H Y L Window In and Window Out parameters see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window 13 5 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Part 5 lt lt When the Mode setting is H or Y L gt gt Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Type Normal Combination Edge OR CH Mode Lower Level Upper
20. 2 0000 42 0000 V v T Off 40 0 1300 0 C 1 40 0 1300 0 CcC lv 8 Off 500 0 500 0 mV 500 0 500 0 mV v EU i eene de Selects the On Off status of the SCALE function LOWER EU UPPER UNIT Specifies the span of the measurement range that will be scaled for a channel in SCALE On status When this parameter is selected a submenu for numeric input appears to let you specify the LOWER and UPPER limits of scaling Displays the setting for measured values Engineering Unit Set ngs Input 2 2 CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit 1 Off 500 0 5000 mV 500 0 5000 mV Displays the setting for EU output values The SCALE SETTINGS window cannot be used to set the SPAN and UNIT settings of a channel for which the FUNCTION setting in the CALCULATION SETTINGS window is On To set the SPAN and UNIT settings for such a channel use the LOWER CALC SPAN UPPER and UNIT parameters in the Memory menu s CALCULATION SETTINGS window 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS Engineering Unit Setting Setting Method 4 point setting 1 1 2 Meas Value EU Value Exp Super Rese Remar meme 1 Upper 1 0000 1 0000 E 0 r 4 Lower _ 1 0000 1 _ 1 0000 E 0 Unit V ao 5 Select Unit Length 5 Span Donotlink 6 8 ENTER select EXEC register 1 Setting Method Sele
21. 2 12 25 The exsnpcce c 2 13 PEU MEU TAA DOT 2 13 225 2 WME Mi Type Amps ipei 2 14 2 5 9 The LOGIC Amp cce erem ente esu mes terio ugue enden aub exar en 2 15 3 PREPARATIONS egeta en ee eee nn er 3 1 3 1 The Working EMVIROMMONT EE 3 2 3 1 4 Choosingan Installation Site 3 2 3 1 2 Positioning the Recorder for Use eene 3 2 3 2 Notes on the Liquid Crystal Display 3 3 3 9 Installing Of REMOVING an AMPs itecto inte xo peu dente ceed bodes cen YER eU tet 3 4 3 9 1 Installing an Analog Amp eiie tenete eco es AEA a 3 4 3 3 2 Installing a Logic Amp sseeeeeeeennnnennnm emere nnne 3 6 3 4 Installing or Removing the SCSI or GP IB Interface Board 3 7 3 4 1 Installing the SCSI or GP IB Interface Board 3 7 3 5 Connecting the Signal Input Cables enne nnns 3 11 3 5 1 Connection to the V Voltage Amp ssssssssseseneeeeenneenn nennen nnne 3 11 3 5 2 Connection to the M Voltage amp Temperature Amp
22. 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 6 2 The Judgement Settings Direct Window This subsection describes the Judgement Settings Direct window an example of which is shown below The parameters in this window cannot be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is X Y or when the measurement mode is LOGGING Judgement Settings Direct Judge 1 2 Function Off Reference No Good CH Lower Range Upper Unit CH1 250 0 250 0 mV v Function Selects the On Off status of the Waveform Judgement function Available Settings Off Disables the Waveform Judgement function On Enables the Waveform Judgement function Reference Selects the reference criteria for waveform judgement The judged result is output as a signal from the REMOTE connector s JUDGE Output terminal Available Settings Settings Input waveform Judged result REMOTE output Good When all of the input waveforms are A pulse is output inside the reference range When at least one or all of the input wave forms are outside of the reference range When all of the input waveforms are inside the reference area When at least one or all of the input wave A pulse is output forms are outside of the reference area 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS CH Selects the target CH No for conducting waveform judgement LOWER RANGE UPPER UNIT These parameters can only be set when the Mode setting is Direct
23. Copying Deleting a File or Folder Formatting a Disk Listing the Recorder s Existing Drives 17 SETTING THE INTERFACE FUNCTIONS 18 USING THE BASIC FUNCTIONS For more details see the chapter concerned 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS CHAPTER SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the procedural flow for setting amp related settings a MM UM 7 1 Opening the AMP SETTINGS Window 7 2 Selecting the Input Coupling MEAS Type 7 3 Setting the Measurement RANGE 7 4 Selecting the FILTER Mode 7 5 Setting the Measurement SPAN 7 6 Setting the Logic Amp s Conditions 7 7 Setting the VERNIER Function 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS 7 1 Opening the AMP SETTINGS Window To open the AMP SETTINGS window perform the step below For more information about this window see Subsection 4 2 2 The AMP SETTINGS Window Setting Procedure Press the INPUT key to open the AMP SETTINGS window Check that a window similar to the ex CH AMP Input Range Filter Misc ample shown on the left appears DC 500mV Off DC 1V Line GND 2V 500Hz CAL 5V 10Hz DC Off DC 1V Line GND 2V 500Hz CAL 5V 10Hz AMP Settings Input 1 2 1 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 CH Scaling Lower SPAN Upper Unit Off 2500 250 0 Off 0 500 0 500 Off 1 0000 1 0000 On 40 000 20 000 Off 2500 4250 0 Off 0 500 0 500 Off 1 0000 1 0000 On 40 000 20 0
24. Displays the original unit prior to scaling Available SPAN Settings Maximum SPAN Minimum SPAN mV V mV V Lower to Upper SPAN Lower to Upper SPAN 1 1000 Upper SPAN minus Lower SPAN 2 2000 5 500 11 000 22 000 to 22 000 22 000 55 000 to 55 000 55 00 110 00 to 110 00 110 00 220 00 to 220 00 550 00 to 550 00 220 00 550 0 to 550 0 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS Maximum SPAN Minimum SPAN Lower to Upper SPAN Upper SPAN minus Lower SPAN to 1300 0 to 1100 0 to 400 0 to 1600 0 to 800 0 to 1700 0 NOTE h The span can be physically set to anywhere between 270 0 C to 2000 C regardless of the tempera ture range that has been set However the actual span that can be used for each range is shown in the above table NOTE The AMP SETTINGS window cannot display the SPAN settings of a channel for which the FUNC TION setting in the CALCULATION SETTINGS window is On To set the SPAN settings for such a channel use the LOWER CALC SPAN UPPER parameters in the Memory menu s CALCULATION SETTINGS window The UNIT parameter in the AMP SETTINGS window cannot be used to change the UNIT setting LOGIC This parameter which can only be set when the channels are equipped with a logic amp selects the On Off status for using the logic amp Available Settings Off
25. HDD Available 1456640 bytes Folder File Name Copy To Drive C HDD Available 1456640 bytes Folder N File Name DEFAULT Press Enter to select Exec to start copy operation 1 Pressthe SYSTEM key to open the SYSTEM SET TINGS window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the FILE COPY position under DISK OPERATION then press the ENTER key to open the FILE COPY win dow SOURCE Settings 3 Under COPY FROM select the drive containing the folder or file to be copied as described in Sec tion 21 2 Designating an Existing Drive 4 Under COPY FROM select the name of the folder or file to be copied To select a folder see Section 21 3 Designating an Existing Folder To select a file see Section 21 6 Designating an Existing File DESTINATION Settings 5 Under COPY TO select the destination drive as described in Section 21 2 Designating an Existing Drive 6 Under COPY TO select the name of the destina tion folder or file To overwrite an existing folder see Section 21 3 Designating an Existing Folder To copy to a new folder see Section 21 5 Creat ing a New Folder To overwrite an existing file see Section 21 6 Designating an Existing File To copy to a new file see Section 21 7 Creating a New File NOTE When an existing folder or file is selected as the destination of the COPY operat
26. Multiplication Double integration Division Moving mean Logarithm Sine Cosine Tangent Exponential mean Arc sine Absolute value Arc cosine Differentiation Arc tangent Double differentiation pi MEAN Moving Mean Because the MEAN function permits averaging of data corresponding to a specified number of points noise can be eliminated from data containing interference The number of points to be averaged can be set from 1 to 128 DIF Differentiation and DDIF Double Differentiation Differentiation and double differentiation operations use Lagrange s five order inter polation formula With a five order interpolation formula the data of one point is obtained from the values of five points before or after that point Calculation is performed however for the first point by using its five subsequent points and for the final point by using its five preceding points INT Integration and DINT Double Integration Integration and double integration operations use a trapezoidal formula With a trapezoidal formula the average of the target point and its previous point is multiplied by Delta t to obtain the area after which all the data preceding the target point are added SIN Sine and COS Cosine The result of a SIN or COS operation is displayed within the range of 1 and 1 The angle is calculated in the counter clockwise direction for positive values or
27. ssssseeeeeeen 12 2 12 1 2 Automatically Backing Up Data Captured in the Recorder s Internal Memory to Disk 12 5 124 3 Saving Data t a DISK inst ciere a tulerat recu onan atten 12 6 12 1 4 Performing Statistical Calculation on Data Captured in Internal Memory 12 9 12 2 Setting Procedures for Replaying Data nennen nnne 12 11 12 2 1 Replaying Captured enne nennen 12 11 12 2 2 Replaying the Data of All Channels or Only the Specified Channel 12 13 12 2 8 Expanding Compressing the Time Axis for Replaying Captured Data 12 14 12 2 4 Saving Data Captured in the Recorder s Internal Memory to Disk 12 15 12 3 Searching for Memiory Data ioco eter ede oeste ruere sth er save sei rua reb er uoce Ene rote oet ug 12 16 12 3 1 Searching for a Position of the Specified Voltage 12 16 12 3 2 Searching for an Event Marker ne aa iadan a 12 18 13 14 CONTENTS 12 4 Oultputting Data Being Replayed onto Chart 12 19 12 5 Expanding or Compressing the Display of Data Being Replayed 12 20 12 6 Performing a Calculation Operation on a Cursor Defined Range of Captured Data 12
28. 01 HHH 2 Display area for x axis values 1 Display area for Y axis values Displays the following types of information Displayed information When the MODE key setting is A or B the voltage level at the cursor position is displayed When the MODE key setting is A amp B the voltage levels at the respective positions of both cursors are displayed When the MODE key setting is A B the voltage difference between both cursor posi tions Cursor A minus Cursor B is displayed 2 Display area for X axis values Displays the following types of information Displayed information When the MODE key setting is A or B the time at the cursor position is displayed When the MODE key setting is A amp B the times at the respective positions of both cursors are displayed When the MODE key setting is A B the At value between both cursor positions cur sor A minus cursor B is displayed 20 4 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS 20 3 2 When the Display Mode Setting is X Y REPLAY XY Plot Color X Axis MAY 07 99 1 CH1 CH2 152955 2 On CH2 CH3 3 On m CH3 CH4 4 On E CH4 CH5 5 On E CH5 CH6 6 On CH6 CH7 7 On CH7 CH8 8 On L1 CH8 CH9 1 Display area for y axis values 2 Display area for x axis values 1 Display area for y axis values
29. 2 Off Span Settings value then press the ENTER key to register 3 Upper 42500 4250 0 your setting 2500 Input using the numeric keypad Set Value 6 Input a whole number to the left of the decimal Limits 250 0 250 0 point first input a plus or minus sign then add a decimal to the right of the decimal point if so AMP Settings Input 1 2 Press Enter to register required NOTE W For details on inputting alphanumerics see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 6 Press the EXECUTE key to register both your UPPER SPAN and LOWER SPAN settings 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS 7 6 Setting the Logic Amp s Conditions This section provides instructions on setting the amp conditions for the logic amp For more information about each parameter see Subsection 4 4 2 The AMP Settings Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the INPUT key to display the AMP set tings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Logic position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Threshold Y Use the arrow keys to select Enable then press the ENTER key to register your setting AMP Settings Input 1 2 8 On 0 000 20 000 kgficm2 Y Logic Disable Part 2 AMP Settings Input 1 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Threshold position then press the ENTER key to display its pull dow
30. Data Replay Settings Memory 2 4 Replay Source Memory Replay Block 1 4 5 7 13 44 16 17 19 23 24 25 26 27 29 34 35 36 39 38 45 46 47 48 49 57 58 59 104 105 106 107 109 110 ne 117 118 119 120 124 125 126 Data Save Conditions Sampling Interval 1ms 2kHz No Of Data 2000 Data 25 Mode Arithmetic 1Times Replay CH All CHs Output Ratio X 1 8 Data Save Selects the source for loading measured data Available Settings MEMORY Loads captured data from the recorder s internal memory Disk REPLAY BLOCK FILE NAME Selects the replay source when the replay data is located within a disk either in an internal memory device a hard disk floppy disk or MO disk or in an external memory device connected via the SCSI interface unit Only if the hard disk drive is installed the hard disk drive is a factory installed option that is ordered at the time of the recorder s purchase This parameter which can only be set when the REPLAY SOURCE setting is MEMORY selects the Block No that contains the data to be loaded Any block that is displayed in solid green can be selected After a block is selected by this parameter it becomes red
31. Do not use the recorder in a location subject to exces sive mechanical vibration or electrical noise Such location may impair the recorder s performance Avoid fluids Qu Wel To insert or disconnect the power cord or a signal input cable grasp the power cord s plug or the signal input cable s connector Pulling the cord cable itself damages the cord cable resulting in a fire hazard or electrical shock Use prohibited Oo No pulling O If fluid or foreign matters enters inside the recorder turn off the Power switch and disconnect the power cord from the electrical socket Use in such status may cause a fire hazard due to electrical shock or current leakage Contact your sales representative or nearest Graphtec vendor to request repair Do not input voltage that exceeds the permissible input voltage range that is specified on the recorder s label Do not exceed the specified voltage input range Do not attempt to lubricate the recorder s mechanisms Such action may cause the recorder to break down Unplug the power cord from the socket Use prohibited No lubrication Never clean the recorder using a volatile solvent such as thinner or benzine Such action may impair the recorder s performance Clean off any soiled areas using a soft dry cloth AN No volatile solvents vii CONTENTS CONTENTS INTRODUCTION Pew eer sree ri ener peer merit
32. file or a binary BMP file 21 2 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS 21 2 Designating an Existing Drive This section explains how to designate an existing drive Sample Setting In this example the hard disk at drive C is designated as the destination drive for a Save current settings operation at the System Settings window The hard disk can only be specified if the hard disk unit is installed NOTE W The same procedure is used for designating a drive whether you wish to save data load data or perform another file related operation f the existing folders or files cannot all be displayed in a one page pull down menu press the V key to scroll through the available folders or files vertically To display the time of data capture press the gt key to scroll the list horizontally Setting Procedure Step 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Drive parameter then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Drive Available Folder File Name Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the C HDD position then press the ENTER key to register your setting The hard disk in drive C has now been selected as Available the target drive Folder File Name 21 3 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS 21 3 Designating an Existing Folder This section explains how to designate an existing folder Sample Setting In this example the GRAPHTEC folder in the hard disk at drive C is designated as
33. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Lecce 7 Waveform settings window display area 6 Position display area Measurement mode display area Indicates the currently selected measurement mode Chart speed display area Indicates the currently selected chart speed Date time display area Indicates the current date and time Simplified message display area Indicates the recorder s current status Example When the recorder is awaiting trigger signal input Trigger armed is displayed Display monitor Displays the value of each channel s signal input when the MONI TOR key is pressed Also displays the setting of any amp control panel key pressed while changing a setting at the amp control panel To redisplay the input values press the MONITOR key again Position display area Indicates the input values of each channel as positions Waveform settings window display area Displays the measured signals as waveforms Also displays windows for setting functions when a menu key at the Conditions panel is pressed 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 2 1 2 The Amp Control Panel This subsection describes the functions of the front panel s amp control panel 1 Channel no 2 MEAS key 3 RANGE keys 4 POSITION keys 5 FILT key POSITION X y D NY ayy Aur NN 018716724732 wies WV P ww L
34. 2 Mount the SCSI or GP IB interface board into the slot while ensuring that the board slides along the recorder s mounting rails Mounting rails 3 Secure the interface board in place using the setscrews that were removed from the cover in Step 1 If you are installing the GP IB interface board its installation is now complete For the SCSI interface board proceed to Step 4 AN CAUTION Whenever a GP IB interface board is not installed be sure to cover the slot by its cover If the SCSI interface board is installed instead of the GP IB interface board however see the NOTE on the preceding page 4 Set the DIP switch on the SCSI interface board The required settings vary with the type of memory device to be connected such as a hard disk drive Zip drive or magneto optic disk drive so see the table on the following page AN CAUTION interface 3 PREPARATIONS Be sure to turn off both the recorder and the external device before connecting the latter to the SCSI Whenever no external device is connected to the SCSI interface board be sure to the set the board s terminator as follows Bit 1 On Bit 2 On Any other combination of DIP switch settings may impair the recorder s operation The above settings are also the factory preset defaults for the SCSI interface board s DIP switch Device to be connected Hard disk drive 68 pin con
35. 3 Secure the amp in place by tightening the countersunk head setscrews M3L6 provided with the amp LN CAUTION Tighten the amp setscrews to a torque of 5 kgfcm These screws may break if tightened excessively 4 Repeat Steps 1 through 3 above for the required number of channels Unless the cover is attached to protect each empty amp slot the recorder may not be able to meet its specifications AN CAUTION Even if more than eight amps are installed on an eight channel model the ninth and higher amps will not operate Be sure to install amps only for Channels 1 through 8 Be sure to attach a cover to cover the analog amp slot of any channel that will not be used 3 PREPARATIONS 3 3 2 Installing a Logic Amp 1 Remove the M3L4 setscrews that secure the logic amp slot s cover and then remove the cover 2 Insert the logic amp in the slot by sliding the amp s guide board along the slots mounting rails LN CAUTION Always use the amp mounting removal knob to remove or mount an amp 3 Secure the amp in place by tightening the setscrews 3 PREPARATIONS 3 4 Installing or Removing the SCSI or GP IB Interface Board This section describes how to install the SCSI interface board which must be ordered at the time of purchase or the GP IB interface board Since only one slot is available for installing either the SCSI or GP IB interface board both boards cannot be concurrently installed To remo
36. Annotation System annotation System User Comment System amp User Comment OFF Channel annotation Meas Cond User Comment Meas amp User Data OFF No of characters 10 to 63 specifiable printing interval 10 to 100 cm in 10 cm steps Logging function Measured data display Display speed Measured data of any channel can be displayed as digital values using a screen split into 2 4 8 or 16 parts 1 second to 3 600 seconds in 1 s steps Measurement interval 1 second to 3 600 seconds in 1 s steps Recording formats Factory Installed unit Start of measurement the day month year and measure ment cycle are printed During measurement the time hh mm ss and channel specific measured data are printed End of measurement Minimum maximum and mean values within the specified area are printed for each channel APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS A 5 Plug in Amplifiers A 5 1 V Voltage Input Type Amp Item V Voltage Input Type Amp Number of channels Input configuration 2 channels unit Floating ground with unbalanced load input each channel is independent Input resistance 1 MO 1 Input coupling AC DC GND CAL 1 2 F S OFF Measurement range 50 100 200 500 mV F S 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 V F S Filter Precision Line 1 5 Hz 3dB at 6 dB oct Low pass 5 10 30 50 500 Hz 5 kHz 3 dB at 6 dB oct 0 25
37. As described below the permissible range of the V1 V2 setting is restricted by the relationship be tween the chart speed s numeric value decimal point position and unit When the Unit setting is mm s the numeric value can be set From 1 00 to 9 95 in 0 05 mm s steps or From 10 0 to 50 0 in 0 5 mm steps When the Unit setting is mm min or mm h the numeric value can be set From 1 00 to 9 95 in 0 05 mm min or 0 05 mmp h steps From 10 0 to 99 5 in 0 5 mm min or 0 5 mm h steps or From 100 to 200 in 5 mm min or 5 mm h steps CHAD This parameter prints identifying channel numbers alongside analog waveforms being re corded on the chart paper It can only be set when the Display Mode setting is Y T Available Settings Off Disables Channel ID printing On Enables Channel ID printing MARKER This parameter selects whether or not to print timing markers or event markers It can only be set when the Display Mode setting is Y T and the Function setting is Direct Available Settings Off Disables the printing of markers timing or event markers TIMING Enables the printing of timing markers When TIMING is selected a submenu appears for specifying the marker INTERVAL EVENT Enables the printing of event markers INTERVAL This parameter which can only be set when the MARKER setting is TIMING specifies the interval for printing timing markers Available Settings 1s
38. C O START Hm 8 START key oka SELECT cs CURSOR O DIRECTION TRIGGER RC 9 STOP key LOCAL 15 CURSOR DIRECTION key 10 MEM OUT key 11 TRIGGER key 14 LOCAL key 12 FEED key 13 LIST key 1 Jog shuttle dial Turning this dial lets you scroll or move the cursor within the display of waveform data captured in memory or move the cursor within a menu Turn the inner jog dial to move slowly or turn the outer shuttle dial to move quickly 2 MODE EVENT key Enables event recording when pressed during measurement or displays a cursor when pressed while memorized data is being displayed Four types of cursors can be displayed A B A B or A amp B Each time the MODE EVENT key is pressed the cursor type changes A lamp on the left of the MODE EVENT key lights to indicate the currently selected cursor type NOTE W The capture of event recording by pressing the MODE EVENT key is only possible when the Capture Destination setting for a Direct Y T SAVE or Memory Y T SAVE operation is Disk itis not possible during a Direct Y T recording operation The captured events can be searched during the replay of captured data For more information about cursors see Chapter 20 PERFORM ING CURSOR OPERATIONS 3 SELECT key W
39. Part 6 Start measurement 18 Press the CLOSE key to close the currently opened window 19 Press the PRINTER key if you wish to record onto chart pa per 20 Press the START key 21 Press the TRIGGER key if the Start Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual Part 7 Stop measurement 22 Press the TRIGGER key if the Stop Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual 23 Press the STOP key Part 8 Set the Replay Conditions for the Captured Data 24 Press the MEMORY key to open the Data Replay Settings window 25 Set the Replay Source parameter 26 Set the Capture Block or File Name parameter When the Replay Source seiting is Memory Set the Capture Block parameter When the Replay Source seiting is Disk Set the File Name parameter 27 Set the Replay CH parameter 28 Set the Output Ratio parameter Part 9 Replay the Captured Data 29 Press the main control panel s MEM OUT key NOTE Jr To concurrently record the replay data onto chart paper press the EXECUTE key to open the EXECUTE menu and set a Printer Output operation For instructions see Section 12 6 Outputting Data Being Replayed onto Chart Paper During the replay of captured data the recorder s operating mode switches automatically to Replay mode In Replay mode you cannot change any of the recorder s settings To change a setting press the main control panel s MODE EVE
40. THERMAL ARRAY CORDER WRIOOO SERIES MANUAL NO WR1000 UM 152 USER S MANUAL GRAPHTEC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION INT INTRODUCTION TO ENSURE SAFE AND CORRECT USE INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing a WR1000 Series Thermal Arraycorder The WR1000 Series is a high performance measuring device which places emphasis on recorder functions It incorporates high speed chart feeding functions and a large waveform display panel within a compact and lightweight body Please read this manual thoroughly before attempting to use your new product to ensure that you use it cor rectly and to its full potential TRERMAL ARRAY CORDER WIRTOOO nance POSTON eae citer NN cus NN Www Nw ea AWA eo V bor nance sosmov OCA wA CHITRA uos AN A BE scs Aw a NN Nn THES AN SU NN aS RANGE POSITION WORN VPN NN HESS ANN NP NNN aS ww enw TV 0 CTET AGAN WW NW PREAMP GROUP e one Differences between products with CE Marking and products without CE Marking Models which comply with CE Marking standards have a CE Marking label displayed on both the recorder itself and on the packaging carton INTRODUCTION Notes on Use Be sure to read all of the following not
41. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Combination position then press the ENTER Data Search key to display its pull down menu Search Method Level Use the arrow keys to select the desired set Combination SIS ting then press the ENTER key to register your CH Mode Lower Levi Ropi setting H 5096 AND Readout Settings Memory 4 4 1 2 L 4 5096 3 winout 100 10096 W 4 winout 1096 4 6096 W Part 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the MODE position for a selected channel then press the ENTER key to display its pull down Combination menu CH Mode Lower Level Upper Use the arrow keys to select the desired set 1 50 ting then press the ENTER key to register your 5076 setting Readout Settings Memory 4 4 100 100 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the other channels 10 60 w Winln WinOut 12 16 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Part 3 Readout Settings Memory 4 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Lower Level Upper position then press the ENTER key to display its window Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial to enter the LR desired level then press the ENTER key to reg Set Value ister your setting Limits 100 100 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each of the other channels with a Mode setting of H L Winln or WinOut CH Mode Lowe Level Upper P
42. nal memory device connected via the SCSI interface unit Only if the 3 5 hard disk drive is installed Only if the MO drive is installed 3 Only if the SCSI interface unit is installed NOTE When the Function setting is Memory the destination of data capture conforms to the memory device selected by the Capture Destination setting in the Memory Settings window ACTION This parameter selects whether the specified operation will be triggered only once or re peatedly Available Settings SINGLE The specified operation is triggered once and then the trigger is disarmed REPEAT Until the STOP key is pressed the specified operation is repeatedly per formed whenever its trigger condition is satisfied 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS START CONDITION The START CONDITION parameters specify the trigger condition that must be met in order to initiate measurement Various trigger conditions can be set by specifying the START CONDITION parameters The explanation of START CONDITION parameters is based on numeric se quence indicated in the diagram below Tree Structure of START CONDITION Parameters START CONDITION L SOURCE OFF INTERNAL L NORMAL L COMBINATION _LEVEL OR I Med ree I Xe ue Ee Lore T H LOWER LEVEL UPPER Ut La ROWER IE VEIMUPPER 5 Condition A I Win in IOWER LEVEI UPPER Io EE 5 Win Out L LOWER LEVEL
43. 1 1 Overview 1 2 Features 1 3 Unpacking Your Recorder 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 1 Overview The WR1000 Thermal Arraycorder is a compact lightweight recorder that comes with a large screen color display panel and can be equipped with a large capacity hard disk The WR1000 employs a large screen color LCD Liquid Crystal Display for its display panel and a thermal printhead in its printer unit enabling high speed display and high speed recording Moreover installation of the large capacity hard disk permits direct storage of a large volume of measured data 1 2 Features Input e The adoption of plug in type amp units lets you choose amps to suit a variety of objects for measurement e The recorder is equipped with dedicated keys that enable amp related settings to be specified in a manner similar to an analog recorder Display e Due to a built in 10 4 inch TFT color liquid crystal display you can confirm the waveforms of measured data and each channel s settings at a glance Recording e Recording on chart paper which achieves a maximum chart speed of 200 mm second demonstrates its full power during realtime waveform recording of high speed events e Use of the long length Z fold unit allows use of Z fold paper of 100 meter length which is particularly advantageous when recording over a long period e The recording zone for each channel can be separately set enabling revision of the recording format to suit individual
44. 100 Example When the Range setting is 5V 5V equals 100 and 5V equals 100 When the Mode setting is Win In or Win Out Specify two Trigger Levels in the range of 100 to 100 in 1 steps where the current Range setting s lower limit is 100 and its upper limit is 100 Specify the upper and lower limits so that the difference between them is at least 596 Example When the Range setting is 5V 5V equals 100 and 5V equals 100926 The Logic setting only if a logic amp is installed X Excludes the logic amp s channels as trigger channels L Activates the trigger at Low level signal input H Activates the trigger at High level signal input NOTE i The permissible range of the logic amp s L and H values varies with the Threshold setting in the AMP Settings window 6 TRIGGER COUNTER Can only be set when the measurement mode is RECORDER the Function setting is Memory and the Combination setting is Level OR or Level AND When the recorder is in trigger armed status this function can be set to make the recorder ignore trigger signal input during a fixed interval This function is provided with a choice of two parameters Count and Filt Count Measurement is started when the trigger condition has been satisfied the speci fied number of times Available Settings 1 to 255 times Sample Trigger Condition em Based on the Level OR or Level AND setting 70 Trigger l
45. 12 5 mmx16 1 Zone in each recording zone 10 mmx 16 Zone Zone1 to Zone16 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS In RECORDER Mode When the Record Settings Window s Display Mode Setting is X Y Format Settings Record 2 2 Grid Fine Compensation Mode Line XY Plot Color X Axis Y Axis CH 1 CH2 CH 1 CH1 CH CH2 CH4 CH2 CH 5 CH2 CH 6 CH2 CH 7 CH2 CH 8 CH2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GRID Selects the grid pattern for use when displaying and recording waveforms The available grid patterns for selection vary with the Display Mode setting at the Record Settings window Available Settings When the Display Mode setting is X Y Fine Coarse COMPENSATION MODE This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Dis play Mode setting is X Y selects the method for drawing waveforms Available Settings Line Draws waveforms using lines Dot Draws waveforms using dots P connue This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is X Y displays the combination number corresponding to the correlating pair of X and Y axes PLOT This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is X Y selects the On Off status of the display and recording of X Y correlation Available Settings Off Disables display and recording of X Y correlation On Enables display and recording of X Y
46. 16 Set the X Axis parameter 17 Set the Y Axis parameter NOTE 0 Also perform other format related settings as required For information about format related functions see Subsec tion 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window For details on how to set format related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME Part 6 Start measurement 18 Press the CLOSE key to close the currently opened window 19 Press the PRINTER key if you wish to record onto chart pa per 20 Press the START key 21 Press the TRIGGER key if the Start Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual Part 7 Stop measurement 22 Press the TRIGGER key if the Stop Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual 23 Press the STOP key Part 8 Set the Replay Conditions for the Captured Data 24 Press the MEMORY key to open the Data Replay Settings win dow 25 Set the Replay Source parameter 26 Set the Capture Block or File Name parameter When the Replay Source setting is Memory Set the Capture Block parameter When the Replay Source seiting is Disk Set the File Name parameter 27 Set the Replay CH parameter 28 Set the Output Ratio parameter Part 9 Replay the Captured Data 29 Press the main control panel s MEM OUT key NOTE To concurrently record the replay data onto chart paper press the EXECU
47. 3600 to display its pull down menu 3 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together Press Enter to register with the jog shuttle dial to input the desired value then press the ENTER key to register your setting 14 3 2 Printing a List of the Current Settings When the List Print function is enabled the recorder prints a list of its current settings onto chart paper after it has finished measurement For more information about the List Print operation see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Set Record Settings Record 1 3 tings window Logging Interval 10 second 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the List Destination Printer Print position then press the ENTER key to dis play its pull down menu List Print 3 Use the arrow keys to select On then press the Off ENTER key to register your setting On 14 3 3 Changing the Number of Displayed Zones To change the number of zones displayed on the screen set the Format parameter as described below The Format parameter can only be set for LOGGING mode For more information about the Format parameter see Subsection 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Set tings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the For mat position then press the ENTER
48. 4 5 3 The FORMAT SETTINGS 4 50 4 5 4 The ANNOTATION SETTINGS Window 4 56 46 TheJUDGE MORnU 2 a E e a E EAE A ters ih kein aeu es 4 58 4 6 1 The JUDGE Menu s Tree Structure sssesssssssesseseeeeeee nnne 4 58 4 6 2 Judgement Settings Direct Window ssseseseeeeeneeenen 4 59 4 6 3 The Judgement Settings Memory Window 4 60 47 The Systemi 4 62 4 7 1 The System Menu s Tree Structure 4 62 47 2 The SYSTEM SETTINGS Window 4 63 4 7 3 The OPTION SETTINGS 4 67 47 4 The CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS Window sss 4 70 47 5 The TESTS WindOW i i near Fu pe oe tne ane 4 71 4 8 The EXECUTE MENU 4 73 4 8 4 Tree Structure of the EXECUTE 4 73 4 8 2 EXECUTE Menu 4 74 SIMPLIFIED RECORDING IN REALTIME eene 5 1 5 1 Overall Flow of the Setting Procedure
49. DESTINATION parameter to display its pull down window 4 Use the arrow keys to select the desired output destination then press the ENTER key to register your choice When the OUTPUT setting is PRINTER 5 Press the EXECUTE key to print a hard copy of the screen display When the OUTPUT setting is BMP FILE 5 Use the arrow keys to move to the FILE NAME position then press the ENTER key to display the BITMAP SAVE DESTINATION submenu 6 Select the destination drive as described in Sec tion 21 2 Designating an Existing Drive 7 Ifyou wish to output the screen image to a file within a folder first select the destination folder If not proceed to Step 8 To output to a file within an existing folder see Section 21 3 Designating an Existing Folder To create a new folder for saving the file see Sec tion 21 5 Creating a New Folder 8 As the destination file for outputting the screen image select an existing file name or create a new file To overwrite an existing file see Section 21 6 Des ignating an Existing File To create a new file see Section 21 7 Creating a New File 9 Press the ENTER key 10 Press the EXECUTE key to output a copy of the screen image to the selected file NOTE This recorder cannot replay data that has been saved as a BMP format file 18 7 18 USING THE BASIC FUNCTIONS 18 8 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS CHAPTER 19
50. Displays the following type of information Displayed Information When the MODE key setting is A or B the y axis voltage level at the cursor position is displayed e When the MODE key setting is A amp B the y axis voltage levels at the respective posi tions of both cursors are displayed e When the MODE key setting is A B the y axis voltage difference between both cur sor positions Cursor A minus Cursor B is displayed 2 Display area for x axis values Displays the following type of information Displayed Information When the MODE key setting is A or B the x axis voltage level at the cursor position is displayed When the MODE key setting is A amp B the x axis voltage levels at the respective posi tions of both cursors are displayed When the MODE key setting is A B the x axis voltage difference between both cur sor positions Cursor A minus Cursor B is displayed 20 5 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS 20 4 Using the Cursor Controlled Scroll Function To scroll the captured waveform data being displayed on the screen perform the steps below This scrolling function can only be used when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T The procedure below assumes that waveform data has already been captured and is being replayed Setting Procedure MODE EVENT O A amp B REMOTE mE o O PRINTER C COPY LIST J FEED
51. Enter register values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHA NUMERIC CHARACTERS Exec to register To move the cursor to the selected position press the EXECUTE key 7 20 14 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS 20 11 4 Moving the Cursor to a Selected Time within Replay Data To move the displayed cursor to a specified time within replay data perform the steps below If two waveform cursors are being displayed this function affects only the currently selected cursor This function can only be used when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T For more information about the Move to Selected Position function see Section 4 8 The EXECUTE Menu The following procedure assumes waveform data is being replayed and that a cursor has already been displayed Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the EXECUTE key to open the EXECUTE Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Move to Selected Position under Cursor Position then Positi press the ENTER key to display its window Y Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Move to Selected Position Method position then press the ENTER key to Method display its pull down menu Move to Use the arrow keys to select Time then press the ENTER key to register your setting Information Start Point End Point NOTE p Press Enter to select Exec to register The Time setting refers to the dates and
52. It specifies one channel as the target channel of the slope trigger The available channel numbers vary with the recorder s chan nel configuration 9 LOWER dV LEVEL UPPER This parameter can only be set when the measurement mode is RE CORDER the Function setting is Memory and the Type setting is Slope It specifies the Lower and Upper limits of the slope trigger in a range of 100 to 100 in 196 steps where the current Range setting s lower limit is 100 and its upper limit is 100 Specify the upper and lower limits so that the difference between them is at least 596 Example When the Range setting is 5V 5V equals 100 and 5V equals 10096 10 dT This parameter can only be set when the measurement mode is RECORDER the Func tion setting is Memory and the Type setting is Slope It specifies the time during which the signal input passes from the Lower level to the Upper level or vice versa The actual time is the product of the Sampling Interval and dT settings Available Settings 1 to 255 11 DIRECTION This parameter can only be set when the measurement mode is RECORDER the Func tion setting is Memory and the Type setting is Slope It specifies the direction of the slope trigger Available Settings 4 Selects the rise time for passing from the Lower level past the Upper level as the slope trigger Selects the fall time for passing from the Upper level past the lower level as the
53. Logic setting Also set other memory related parameters as required For information about memory related functions see Sub section 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window Trigger Settings window Function Memory Source setting of Start Stop conditions 1 Off Manual External 2 Internal For details on how to set memory related parameters see Chapter 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Type setting 1 Normal 2 Slope 1 Combination setting 10 3 10 CAPTURING DATA IN A MEMORY DEVICE Mode setting Lower Level Upper Record Settings window Display Mode Y T Function Memory Output Mode setting Format Settings window Record Format setting Zone settings Start measurement Stop measurement Data Replay Settings window 2 Replay Source setting 1 Memory 2 Disk Capture Block setting File Name setting Replay CH setting Output Ratio setting MEM OUT key Part 3 Settings at the Trigger Settings window 6 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Settings window 7 Set the Function parameter to Memory 8 Set the Source parameter for the Start Condition and Stop Condition 9 Set the Type parameter 10 If you set the Source parameter to Internal in Step 8 also set the trigger conditions When the Type setting is Normal Set the Combination parameter Set the Mode and Lower Level Upper parameters When the
54. NOTE Jr When the Function setting in the Record Settings window is Memory List Printing can only be per formed if the Output Mode setting is All Data or One Frame The RECORD SETTINGS Window in LOGGING Mode Record Settings Record 1 3 Logging Interval 1 second Destination Printer List Print Off LOGGING INTERVAL Specifies the interval of sampling data in LOGGING mode Available Settings In a range of 1 second to 3 600 seconds 1 hour in 1 second units 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS DESTINATION Selects the output destination of the measured data Available Settings PRINTER Displays the measured data on the screen or plots it onto chart paper INTERFACE Outputs the measured data as ASCII data via the interface selected by the Remote I F setting in the SYSTEM key s Option Settings win dow NOTE p It is not possible to simultaneously plot the measured data onto chart paper and output it via the inter face LIST PRINT List Printing can only be performed if the DESTINATION setting is PRINTER Prints a list of the recorder s currently selected settings after recording is completed Available Settings Off Disables the List Printing function On Enables the List Printing function 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 5 3 The FORMAT SETTINGS Window This subsection describes the FORMAT SETTINGS window The parameters displayed in this window vary according to whether the Record Se
55. The Trigger Settings Window For details on how to set trigger related parameters see Chapter 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Part 2 Settings at the Trigger Settings window p an O ra Recording Settings window Display Mode Y T Function Direct Chart Speed setting Part 3 Settings at the Record Settings window 7 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Settings window Format Settings window 8 Set the Display Mode parameter to Y T 9 Set the Function parameter to Direct 10 Specify the Chart Speed setting nis NOTE 0 Also set other recording related parameters as required For information about the recording related functions see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Start measurement Stop measurement For details on how to set recording related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 8 RECORDING IN REALTIME Part 4 Settings at the Format Settings window 11 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Settings window 12 Set the Record Format parameter 13 Assign the Channel Nos to Zones NOTE 7 Also perform other format related settings as required For information about format related functions see Sub section 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window For details on how to set format related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS Part 5 Start measurement 14 Press the CLOSE key to close the
56. When the Type setting is Normal Set the Combination parameter Set the Mode and Lower Level Upper parameters When the Type setting is Slope Set the CH parameter Set the Lower dV Level Upper parameters Set the dT parameter Set the Direction parameter Set the Mode parameter NOTE 7 Also set other trigger related parameters as required For information about trigger related functions see Subsec tion 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window For details on how to set trigger related parameters see Chapter 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Part 4 Settings at the Record Settings window 11 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Settings window 12 Set the Display Mode parameter to X Y 13 Set the Function parameter to Memory NOTE 0 Also set other recording related parameters as required For information about the recording related functions see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window For details on how to set recording related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS Part 5 Settings at the Format Settings window 15 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Settings window 16 Set the PLOT On Off parameter 17 Set the X Axis parameter 18 Set the Y Axis parameter NOTE 7 Also perform other format related settings as required For information about format related functions see Subsec tion 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window
57. dT Sampling Interval setting x 1 to 255 Pretrigger 0 to 100 in 1 steps Logic trigger Pattern H High L Low X Don t care Judgement mode When the pattern is matched APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS A 4 Measurement Mode Functions Function Recorder function Waveform display WR1000 8 WR1000 16 Display format Y T X Y Y T display mode X Y display mode Display direction horizontal scrolling Zones Y T 1 2 4 8 16 16 for 16 ch models only Number of channels displayable max 16ch X axis 8 channels Y axis 8 channels Measured data display The measurement data of 8 channels are displayed in digital format at the right of the screen For 16 ch models the display is switched between two 8 ch displays Display method Scroll mode display Signal recording amplitude Maximum 200 mm 1600 dots Recording formats Chart speeds 200 mm x 1 160 mm x 1 100 mm x 1 100 mm x 2 80 mm x 2 50 mm x 2 50 mm x 4 40 mm x 4 25 mm x 8 20 mm x 8 12 5 mm x 16 10 mm x 16 Zone Figures in refer to the 16 ch model only Any number of channels can be assigned to each zone 1 2 5b 10 20 50 100 200 mm s mm min mm h V1 V2 External Clock External Clock 0 03125 mm l Reference line recording A reference line can be printed at the desired position for each recording zone Recording accuracy Y 0 396 1dot 296 0 5 mm
58. if installed another memory device such as a hard disk or magneto optic disk Save Load Cursor Position Saves the position of the waveform cursor or loads a waveform cursor position that has been previously saved When the Display Mode Setting is X Y Cursor Readout Displays the electrical potential of the signal input at the position indicated by the waveform cursor s at the right side of the screen the X axis values and the lower part of the screen the Y axis values 20 2 20 2 The Cursor Display 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS This section explains the relationship between the cursor display with the MODE EVENT key and CURSOR DIRECTION key which are both cursor related keys When the MODE key is set to A B or A amp B the SELECT key is used to select the cursor to be moved 20 2 1 When the Display Mode Setting is Y T The table below lists the types of cursor display available when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T Cursor related keys Operation Function RSOR MODE key CURSO Y axis direction DIRECTION key X axis direction Y axis direction gt O X axis direction Waveform cursor display operation Display Waveform cursor A Numeric display Y axis value at the waveform cursor position Scrolling Operation Jog shuttle dial Display Waveform cursor B X axis value at the waveform cursor position Each chann
59. s Data Replay Settings window CHART SPEED This parameter selects the speed for feeding the chart paper It can only be set when the Display Mode setting is Y T and the Function setting is Direct Besides the pre determined chart speed settings listed below two user defined variable chart speeds can be registered as V1 and V2 The V1 and V2 settings can each be set in a range of 200 mm s to 1 mm h in 1 mm units Available Settings 1mm s 2mm s 5mm s 10mm s 20mm s 50mm s 100mm s 200mm s 1mm min 2mm min 5bmm min 10mm min 20mm min 50mm min 100mm min 200mm min 1mm h 2mm h 5mm h 10mm h 20mm h 50mm h 100mm h 200mm h V1 V2 External When the recorder is running on a DC power supply or the long length Z fold unit is installed the maximum chart speed becomes 25 mm s M1 V2 The V1 V2 setting which can only be specified when the Chart Speed setting is V1 V2 specifies a user defined chart speed that is no faster than 50 mm s 1 Chart speed V1 V2 Settings 2 12 00 Dec pt imm s ENTER select EXEC register 1 The Speed parameter specifies the chart speed s numeric value see NOTE below 2 This parameter specifies the position of the decimal point for the chart speed s nu meric value Available Settings n nn nn n nnn 3 The Unit parameter selects the unit of the chart speed value Available Settings mm s mm min mm h 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS NOTE
60. terval appears Example When the submenu s SET MODE parameter is set to START amp STOP When START amp STOP mode is selected you can set up the recorder so that after the START key is pressed it starts waiting for trigger signal input one hour later and then stops waiting two hours later 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS ABSOLUTE TIME Specifies the time wait interval as absolute starting and stopping times When this setting is selected a submenu for setting the time in terval appears Example When the submenu s SET MODE parameter is set to START amp STOP When START amp STOP mode is selected you can set up the recorder so that its starts waiting for trigger signal input at 01 00 00 on August 10 1999 and then stops waiting at 17 30 00 on August 11 1999 SET TIME Can only be set when the Time Gate setting is Relative Time or Absolute Time SET MODE Selects the mode for setting the Time Gate parameter s wait interval Available Settings START TIME Enables only the starting time When this setting is selected a submenu for setting the starting time appears The available set tings vary with the Time Gate setting When START amp STOP mode is selected you can set up the re corder so that after the START key is pressed it starts waiting for trigger signal input one hour later and then stops waiting two hours later START amp STOP Enables the starting and stopping times When this setting is selected one
61. then press the ENTER key to register your setting 11 Press the EXECUTE key to register your V1 V2 setting For more information about inputting numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 14 1 6 Printing Channel ID Nos on Waveforms To enable the printing of Channel Nos in order to identify waveforms on chart paper perform the steps below The CH ID parameter can only be set when the measurement mode is RECORDER For more information about the CH ID parameter see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Set Record Settings Record 1 3 tings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the CH V2 setting 12 5 mm s ID position then press the ENTER key to display CH ID its pull down menu Marker Off 3 Use the arrow keys to select On then press the Interval On ENTER key to register your setting 14 4 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 1 7 Printing Timing Markers or Event Markers To enable the printing of timing markers or event markers on chart paper during recording perform the steps below The Marker parameter can only be set when the Display Mode setting in the Record Settings window is Y T Moreover both timing markers and event markers cannot be printed concurrently For more information about the Marker parameter see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window
62. then press the EN Type Normal Combination Level AND TER key to display its window 11 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the 1 Winn ESMA 10 Upper position then press the ENTER key to 2 Off Upper Mil display its window Lower 10 12 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to gether with the jog shuttle dial to specify the desired Upper level then press the ENTER key to register your setting Enter select Exec register NOTE For details on how to input numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANU MERIC CHARACTERS 13 Repeat Steps 11 and 12 to also specify the Lower level parameter 14 Press the EXECUTE key to register your set ting NOTE For logic channels the trigger is activated when the input signals match those of the pat tern specified in the menu setting AND op eration 13 9 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Trigger 7 8 Logic 13 10 Settings 4 H 4 H lt lt For a logic amp gt gt Trigger 1 2 50 60 On HHHH LLLL HHHH LLLL V A B C D 1234 1234 1234 1234 Pattern LLLL HHHH LLLL X Enter select Exec register 10 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Lower Level Upper under Start Condition or Stop Condition then press the ENTER key to dis play its window 11 Use the arrow keys to move to the target logic group then press the ENTER key to display its pull down m
63. x1 10 x1 8 x1 5 x1 4 x1 2 x1 x2 x4 x5 x8 x10 Screen Width NOTE i The Screen Width setting enlarges or reduces the data so that it will all fit into the 10 div screen for viewing DATA SAVE This parameter which can only be set when the Replay Source setting is Memory lets you save data to a disk either in an internal memory device a hard disk drive floppy disk drive or MO drive or an external memory device that is connected via the SCSI interface unit For information on how to specify the destination drive letter folder name and file name see Chapter 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS Only if the 31 2 hard disk drive is installed Only if the MO drive is installed either the MO drive or floppy disk drive can be installed in the slot provided 3 Only if the SCSI interface unit is installed 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 3 4 The CALCULATION SETTINGS Window This subsection describes the Calculation Settings window an example of which is shown below The calculation functions accessible from this window can only be used when all of the following conditions are met The measurement mode is LOGGING or the measurement mode is RECORDER and the Record Settings window s Plot Mode setting is Y T The Capture Destination setting is Memory and The Memory Block setting is other than 256 512 kW x 1 The Calculation Settings window allows you to specify formulas and Span settings
64. 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the SYSTEM SETTINGS window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Y DISK INITIALIZE position under DISK OPERA TION then press the ENTER key to open the DISK INITIALIZE window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Initialize mode INITIALIZE MODE parameter and display its SCSI 10 0 Suomenu Format HDD FDISK Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to IBM DDRS FORMAT HDD FDISK then press the ENTER key System Settings System 1 4 Press Enter to select Exec to start format operation Part 2 System Settings System 1 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the SCSI ID parameter and display its submenu Use the arrow keys to select 0 zero then press Filo Delete y the ENTER key Disk Initialize M4 NE The SCSI ID for an internal hard disk is O For an external hard disk select 2 or more Press the EXECUTE key Next press the Initialize mode Drive Format ENTER key to initiate the FORMAT operation SCSI ID or press the CANCEL key to cancel it z When reformatting is completed the HDD has IBM been reformatted message appears so press the ENTER key to terminate the Format HDD operation Enter to select Exec to start format operation 16 7 16 PERFORMING DISK OPERATIONS 16 8 Formatting a Disk To format a selected disk perform the steps below For details about the SYSTEM SETTINGS window see Subsecti
65. 15 11 15 44 7822 ASM 1544 3 irai 01 01 05 asn 1548 7822 asno isa 7822 153 1544 DIRECT Lo in 8 RECORDING IN REALTIME 8 2 Enabling DIRECT Y T Recording To set up your recorder for DIRECT Y T recording perform the steps described in this section The procedure described only includes the steps directly related to enabling DIRECT Y T recording For other settings see the pertinent section in Chapter 11 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS through Chapter 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR NOTE hy Before proceeding to the following settings be sure to first complete the settings described in Chapter 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS Setting Procedure Measurement mode RECORDER Part 1 Select the measurement mode 1 Press the main control panel s MODE key to switch the mea Trigger Settings window surement mode to RECORDER Function Record Source setting for Start Stop 2 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Settings window Conditions 3 Setthe Function parameter to Record 1 Off Manual External 4 Set the Source parameter for the Start Condition and Stop ey Internal Condition o Set the Combination parameter If you set the Source parameter to Internal in Step 3 Set the Mode parameter Set the Lower Level Upper parameters NOTE 7 Also set other trigger related parameters as required For information about trigger related functions see Subsec tion 4 4 2
66. 17 5 17 4 Setting the GP IB Interface Conditions sissisodan enne nnns 17 6 17 4 1 Selecting the Recorder s Device Address 17 6 17 4 2 Selecting the Terminator Code tasisi aa dna aaa nennen nennen 17 6 17 4 3 Selecting the Time Out Interval ssessesssssseseeseeeeene enne enne nnne nnne 17 7 USING THE BASIC FUNCTIONS 1 1 seen 18 1 18 1 Locking the Panel Keys eii eee eee Eo doe eins 18 2 18 2 Returning the Settings to Their Factory Default Settings 18 2 18 3 Adjusting the Backlit Display s Brightness sssseeennneennm mm 18 2 18 4 Using the Screen Saver ssssssssssssssssssseeeeeeeneneennne nenne enne nennen nennen enne enn nnn 18 3 xii 19 20 21 CONTENTS 18 5 Starting Measurement Printing When the Power is Turned 18 3 18 6 Using the Beeper and Adjusting Its Volume eeeeneennmem nn 18 4 19 7 Enabling the Key Click raconte abu tke tek 18 5 18 8 Changing the Date and Time 18 5 18 9 Changing the Displayed Language nennen nnns enne 18 6 18 10 Using the Long Length Chart Unit sss
67. 2 NOTE i For information about the Type parameter see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window 13 7 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Part 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Combination position under Start Condition or Time Gate Relative Time Time Setting W Stop Condition then press the ENTER key to Function Memory Action Repeat display its pull down menu Start Condition Source Internal Use the arrow keys to select Level AND or Edge Type Normal Combination AND then press the ENTER key to register your Level OR setting Level AND Edge OR Ed AND NOTE For more information about the Level AND and Edge AND parameters see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Part 4 lt lt For an analog amp gt gt 8 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Mode position under Start Condition or Stop Condition for each analog amp then press the Level AND Enter key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select H Y L Win In Win Out or Off then press the ENTER key to register your setting Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 pe Normal Combination NOTE jr Win Out For more information about the H L Window In and Window Out parameters see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Win lt lt For a logic amp gt gt 8 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Mode p
68. 200 mm format This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T saves the cursor defined segment of the wave form display to a disk either in an internal disk drive a hard disk drive floppy disk or MO drive or in an external memory device connected via the SCSI interface unit Only when the 31 2 hard disk drive is installed Only when the MO drive is installed either an MO drive or floppy disk drive can be installed in the slot provided 3 Only when the SCSI interface unit is installed CURSOR POSITION This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T moves the cursor to the selected position within the data being replayed loads saves the cursor position and so on Move to Selected Position Moves the cursor to the selected position within the data being replayed using one of three methods Available Settings Position Moves the cursor to the position of the specified time from the current position Time Moves the cursor to the position of the specified time Specify a time that was captured along with the measured data during data capture 96 Moves the cursor to the position specified as a percentage of the entire data which represents 100 Move to First Data Moves the cursor to the beginning of the data being replayed Move to Last Data Moves the cursor to the end of the data be
69. 22 12 7 Performing Area Statistical Calculation on a Cursor Defined Range of Captured Data 12 27 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS sse tenente nens 13 1 13 1 Disabling the Trigger FUNGON ete idt 13 2 13 2 Activating the Trigger by the TRIGGER Key 13 2 13 3 Activating the Trigger by an Externally Supplied REMOTE Signal 13 3 13 4 Activating the Trigger by the Signal Input s Voltage Level 13 4 13 4 1 Starting Stopping Measurement When the Trigger Condition of One Channel Is Met ennemis aask nnns etre 13 4 13 4 2 Starting Stopping Measurement When the Trigger Condition of Every Channel Is Met sssssssssesesseeseneeeneeeeeeee nnne 13 7 13 5 Activating the Trigger by the Slope of the Signal Input s Rise Fall Time 13 11 13 6 Arming the Trigger Only within the Specified Time Interval 13 13 13 7 Starting Measurement Before After the Trigger Is Activated 13 15 13 8 Stopping Measurement at a Specified Time Interval After the Trigger is Activated 13 16 13 9 Starting Stopping Measurement After the Trigger Is Activated the Specified Number TINGS rS 13 17 13 1
70. 3 Next press the ENTER key to reset the settings or press the CANCEL key to cancel the reset opera tion 18 3 Adjusting the Backlit Display s Brightness The LCD Screen Adjustment function lets you adjust the brightness level of the backlit display panel For more information about the LCD Screen Adjustment function see Subsection 4 7 3 The OPTION SETTINGS Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the OPTION SET TINGS window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the LCD SCREEN ADJUSTMENT position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired bright ness level then press the ENTER key to register your setting Option Settings System 2 4 LCD Screen Adjustment Screen Saver Power On Start 18 2 18 USING THE BASIC FUNCTIONS 18 4 Using the Screen Saver The SCREEN SAVER function lets you prolong the display s product life by automatically turning off the display if no panel input is performed within a specified interval For more information about the SCREEN SAVER function see Subsection 4 7 3 The OPTION SETTINGS Window Setting Procedure 1 Pressthe SYSTEM key to open the OPTION SET TINGS window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the SCREEN SAVER position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired interval then pre
71. 30 VDC DC ACp p Permissible input voltage Between an input terminal and GND 250 VAC r m s 2 13 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 2 5 2 The MType Amp The M Multi input type amp is used for measuring voltage or temperature 1 Mounting removal knob 2 High potential input terminal 3 Low potential input terminal 1 2 High potential input terminal 3 Low potential input terminal 1 Mounting removal knob Used for mounting or removing an amp unit 2 High potential input terminals For connecting the positive potential of the input signals to be mea sured 3 Low potential input terminals For connecting the negative potential of the input signals to be mea sured Item Description Input format Channel independent unbalanced input Voltage 20 mV to 500 V full scale Temperature K J T R E B Measurement range Maximum sampling interval Frequency response DC coupling DC to 20 kHz AC coupling 10 Hz to 20 kHz 2 V to 500 V range 500 VDC DC ACp p Between and terminals 59 mV to 1 V range 100 VDC DC Permissible input voltage Between an input terminal and GND 250 VAC r m s 2 14 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 2 5 3 The Logic Amp The logic amp is used for conducting logic measurements on Mounting removal knob 2 Group A terminal 3 Grou
72. 4 1 Starting Stopping Measurement When the Trigger Condition of One Channel Is Met To specify the Level OR trigger or Edge OR trigger perform the steps below For more information about the Level OR and Edge OR parameters see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Set tings Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Settings window Time Gate Relative Time Time Setting W Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Function Memory Action Repeat Source position under Start Condition or Stop Start Condition Source Tue Nermal Cumbinat Condition then press the ENTER key to dis CH Mode Tower i play its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select Internal then press Manual the ENTER key to register your setting External Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Part 2 is only required if the Function setting is Memory Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Type position under Start Condition or Stop Time Gate Relative Time Time Setting W Condition then press the ENTER key to dis Function Memory Action Repeat play its pull down menu Start Condition Source Internal Use the arrow keys to select Normal then press Type Combination Edge AND d P Eevel Upper the ENTER key to register your setting Slope e NOTE jr For information about the Type parameter see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2
73. 40 50 80 100 200 400 500 800ms Values within parentheses can only be specified if the hard disk drive is installed 16 channels 200 400 500 800 us 8 10 20 40 50 80 100 200 400 500 800ms Values within parentheses can only be specified if the hard disk drive is installed External refers to externally synchronized sampling whereby sampling is performed according to ex ternally supplied signal input via the REMOTE connectors EXT SAMPLE terminal for details about the REMOTE connector see Chapter 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR Moreover even during externally synchronized sampling internal sampling is also conducted at 10 us intervals data is captured in 30 us intervals after each sampling interval As a result the data which can be captured to memory disk in response to the externally supplied signal input consists of that sampled 30 us earlier dO pns 10 us i10 us LEE MP Internal sampling 1 n l ne2 3 Captured data External sampling Captured n 1 Captured n 1 sets of data sets of data PROGRAM BLOCK This parameter can only be set when the CAPTURE DESTINATION setting is Memory When the Block Size setting is other than 256kW 512kW x 1 set the Program Block setting to Reserve before using one of the functions for calculation or the Waveform Judgement function which will cause the final Memory Block No to be used as the destination for saving either t
74. 8 The Display Position of Cursor Information sssssssseeeeeeeeennenennen nens 20 4 20 3 1 When the Display Mode Setting is Y T sssssssseeeeeenenneennennns 20 4 20 3 2 When the Display Mode Setting is X Y sssssssssseseeeeeeeeeeen nenne 20 5 20 4 Using the Cursor Controlled Scroll Function esssssseseeeeenneeenenn nnns 20 6 20 5 Using the Cursor Readout Function sisri tesieni seanina iaa a aiaa iaaea nnns 20 6 20 6 Expanding Compressing the Cursor Defined Range of the Waveform Display to the Screens WGK wierd ceo decedit de b ue FERRE ue ER AE CR Rn a 20 7 20 7 Printing Data within a Cursor Defined Range ssssssseeeeeeeenmenennenen nennen 20 8 20 8 Saving a Cursor Defined Range of Data to 5 20 9 20 9 Saving the Cursor Position ssssssssessssseseneeeeeeeen nennen nennen nnne 20 10 20 10 Loading a Cursor PositiOn oie ret nna reca rera etc eee te ER LEER E pn eis 20 11 20 11 Other Cursor amp nenne 20 12 20 11 1 Moving to the Beginning of Replay Data 20 12 20 11 2 Moving to the End of Replay 20 12 20 11 3 Moving to a Cursor Defined Position within Repl
75. Call Other Cursor gt Load Cursor Position wW V Save Cursor Position Position No Set Value 1 In C Limits 10 Enter register Press Enter to select Exec to load 20 10 5 Press the EXECUTE key to open the EXECUTE menu Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Save Cursor Position under Cursor Position then press the ENTER key to display its window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Posi tion No position then press the ENTER key to dis play its window Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial to enter the file number under which you wish to save the cursor position then press the ENTER key to register your setting NOTE For more information on inputting numeric val ues see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANU MERIC CHARACTERS To save the cursor position press the EXECUTE key 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS 20 10 Loading a Cursor Position This section explains how to load a cursor position that was previously saved This function can only be used when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T For more information about the Cursor defined Print function see Section 4 8 The EXECUTE Menu The following procedure assumes memory data has already been captured and is being replayed that the cursor has already been displayed and that a cursor position w
76. Connects to the cable of the DC power supply only if the DC drive adapter is installed Controls the ON OFF status of DC power supply to the recorder only if the DC drive adapter is installed Holds the fuse for the DC power supply only if the DC drive adapter is in stalled When the WR1000 is used while connected to another device connect both of their GND terminals to a common ground level Controls the ON OFF status of AC power supply to the recorder Connects the power cord s female plug to the recorder 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 2 3 The Left Panel This section describes the main unit s left side panel 1 Chart paper unit 2 FD MO drive 1 Chart paper unit Holds the chart paper Its outer surface forms the printer cover 2 FD MO drive This disk drive slot can be installed either with a floppy disk drive or a magneto optic disk drive which is a factory installed unit to be ordered at the time of purchase Both types of disk drives cannot be concurrently installed 2 11 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 2 4 The Right Panel This section describes the main unit s right side panel 1 Analog amp slots 2 Logic amp slot 3 SCSI GP IB board slot 1 An
77. Disables use of the logic amp On Enables use of the logic amp The recording and display of logic signals in RECORDER mode can be enabled when the Logic setting is ON and the Logic Zone setting of the Format Settings window is also ON The recording and display of logic signals in LOGGING mode are synchronized with the current Logic setting THRESHOLD LEVEL This parameter which can only be set when the channels are equipped with a logic amp specifies a high or low threshold level for logic signals Available Settings 1 4V TTL Regards the input of logic signals with a voltage level of about 1 4 V or higher as the High threshold level 2 5V CMOS Regards the input of logic signals with a voltage level of about 2 5 V or higher as the High threshold level 5 0V contact point Regards the input of logic signals with a voltage level of about 5 0 V or higher as the High threshold level 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 2 3 The ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS Window This subsection describes the ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS window an example of which is shown below Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit 1 Otff 500 0 500 0 mV 500 0 500 0 mv V 2 Off 1 0000 1 0000 V 0 5000 0 5000 V V 3 Off 1 0000 1 0000 V 4 0000 4 0000 rpm V 4 On 41 000 5 000 V 0 000 20 000 kgficm2 5 Off 5 000 5 000 V 5 000 5 000 Vv 6 Off 2 0000 42 0000 V
78. ENTER key to display the RS 232C Set Speed tings submenu Length 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Stop Bit Speed Timeout position then press the ENTER key to dis Parity Length 8 pit play its pull down menu Flow Co Stop Bit s 1 bit 4 Use the arrow keys to select the desired interval 279 None then press the ENTER key to register your setting Flow Control None Timeout ENTER select b If you are finished changing all of your RS 232C settings press the EXECUTE key to register them 17 5 17 SETTING THE INTERFACE FUNCTIONS 17 4 Setting the GP IB Interface Conditions This section describes how to set the various interface conditions for the GP IB interface which are specified via the GP IB Settings submenu For more information about each of the GP IB interface conditions see Subsection 4 7 3 The Option Settings Window 17 4 1 Selecting the Recorder s Device Address The Address parameter determines the device address of the recorder for data transfer via the GP IB interface For more information see Subsection 4 7 3 The Option Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the Option Set Option Settings System 2 4 tings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Change GP IB Settings Change Settings V Settings on the right of GP IB Settings then press Address the ENTER key to display the GP IB Sett
79. INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS This chapter describes how to input alphanumeric char acters using either the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial Se ee 19 1 Using the Numeric Keypad for Alphanumeric Input 19 1 1 Key Assignment of the Numeric Keypad 19 1 2 Numeric Example Inputting SPAN Values 19 1 3 Alphabetic Example Inputting a Title Character String 19 2 Using the Arrow Keys and Jog Shuttle Dial for Alphanumeric Input 19 2 1 Numeric Example Inputting SPAN Values 19 2 2 Alphabetic Example Inputting a Title Character String 19 1 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 19 1 Using the Numeric Keypad for Alphanumeric Input This section includes a table listing the alohanumerics and symbols assigned to the numeric keypad s keys as well as one sample setting procedure each for inputting numeric values and alphabetic characters 19 1 1 Key Assignment of the Numeric Keypad The table below lists which alphanumeric symbol or function is assigned to each of the numeric keypad s keys Alphabet Numeral ABCabc DEFdef GHighi JKLjkl MNOmno PQRSpars TUVtuv WXYZwxyz 9 0 Switches the input mode to NUMeric or ALPHAbetic input Symbol Mark Space character Inserts an alphanumeric at the specified position 050565650 65 65 65 65 5 OVO Deletes the alphanumeric at the specified position 19 2
80. If you set the Source parameter to Internal in Step 3 Set the Mode parameter Set the Lower Level Upper parameters N NOTE Also set other trigger related parameters as required For information about trigger related functions see Subsec tion 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window For details on how to set trigger related parameters see Chapter 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Part 2 Settings at the Trigger Settings window p an ra Record Settings window Display Mode X Y Function Direct 7 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Settings window he Set the Display Mode parameter to X Y 9 Setthe Function parameter to Direct NOTE W To perform output onto chart paper set the printer unit to On The measured data will be output onto chart paper when mea surement is completed Also set other recording related parameters as required Part 3 Settings at the Record Settings window Start measurement Stop measurement For information about the recording related functions see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window For details on how to set recording related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 8 RECORDING IN REALTIME Part 4 Settings at the Format Settings window Press the RECORD key to open the Format Settings window Select the On Off status of the PLOT parameter Set the X Axis parameter Set the Y Axis parameter NO
81. Only one external device can be connected Use only the devices recommended by Graphtec as the external device connected via the SCSI interface Use of other devices may prevent the recorder from meeting its specifications For a list of recommended devices contact your sales representative or nearest Graphtec vendor f a hard disk drive is installed as an external device be sure to reformat its hard disk using the Disk Initialize function in the System Settings window For more information about the Disk Initialize func tion see Section 16 7 Reformatting a Hard Disk 3 10 3 PREPARATIONS 3 5 Connecting the Signal Input Cables This section describes how to connect the signal input cable s to the amp unit according to the amp type 3 5 1 Connection to the V Voltage Amp Connect the signal input cables to the V voltage amp as shown in the figure below O 1 High potential side of signal input Low potential side of signal input 1 High potential side of signal input Low potential side of signal input The table below lists the maximum permissible input voltage levels of the V amp 5V to 500 V range 500 VDC DC AC p 50 mV to 2 V range 30 VDC DC AC Between an input terminal and GND 250 VAC r m s Between and terminals AN CAUTION Prior to measurement be sure to connect the recorder s GND terminal with t
82. Printer Off Beeper Function Off Beeper Volume 4 Key Click Off Date Time 1999 12 31 12 45 56 Ww Remote I F RS 232C New Line code CR LF RS 232C Settings Change Settings w Speed 19200 bps Length 8 bits Stop Bit s 1bit Parity None Flow Control None Timeout OFF LCD SCREEN ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the brightness of the LCD panel Available Settings 15 brightness levels from 1 to 15 Because a TFT color LCD is used for the display screen there is basically no need to adjust the brightness there is little discernible difference between the brightness levels Select 1 for a darker screen and 15 for a brighter screen SCREEN SAVER Turns off the display if the recorder is not operated within the specified interval thus prolonging the product life of the display Available Settings Off 1min 2min 5min 10min 30min 60min POWER ON START Initiates measurement as soon as the recorder is turned on Available Settings Disable Disables the Power On Start function Enable Enables the Power On Start function When this setting is selected the PRINTER submenu appears which is described below PRINTER Selects whether or not to also start printing as soon as the recorder is turned on This parameter can only be set when the POWER ON START setting is Enable Available Settings Off Printing does not start as soon as the recorder is turned on On Printing star
83. Pull the leading edge of the paper out of the printer cover s paper outlet so that the leading edge wraps around the rubber roller At this time check the following points Make sure the paper is not slack Remove any slack by pulling the leading edge of the paper The bobbins and the paper s side edges should be parallel If not return to Step 2 and start over again Only the outer surface of the roll paper is thermal sensitive If the roll paper is loaded in the opposite direction recording cannot be performed To inform the operator when the paper supply will soon run out the roll paper is marked with a red line for about one meter from its end In addition the remaining length of the paper is marked at one side for one meter in 10 cm intervals 5 Close the printer cover Concurrently press the right and left sides of the printer cover until it clicks into place If you record without firmly closing the printer cover printed results will be abnormal and problems such as paper jams will occur 3 19 3 PREPARATIONS 3 7 2 Mounting the Internal Z Fold Unit To load chart paper in the internal Z fold unit and then mount the internal Z fold unit in the recorder perform the steps below 1 Open the printer cover A High Temperature Right after recording the thermal head may be very hot and cause burns or other injuries if accidentally touched Before replacing the chart paper allow the thermal head to adequ
84. SETTINGS Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the OPTION SET Option Settings System 2 4 TINGS window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Key Power ON Stari Click position then press the ENTER key to dis Printer Off play its pull down menu Beeper Function 3 Use the arrow keys to select On then press the Beeper Volume ENTER key to register your setting Key Click Date Time 1 Off 12 45 56 W 18 8 Changing the Date and Time The DATE TIME function lets you adjust the current date and time For more information about the DATE TIME function see Subsection 4 7 3 The OPTION SETTINGS Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the OPTION SET Option Settings System 2 4 TINGS window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the DATE Beeper Volume 4 TIME position then press the ENTER key to Date Time Ea V display its pull down menu 3 Use the arrow keys to move to the desired param Remote Date Time eter then press the ENTER key to display a win Date dow for alphanumeric input Set Value 19 4 Enter the desired numerals using the numeric key pad or the arrow keys with the jog shuttle dial t Limits 1980 2035 5 Press the EXECUTE key to register your setting 3 for that parameter 6 Repeat Steps 3 to 5 for the other values 18 5 18 USING THE BASIC FUNCTIONS 18 9 Changing the Disp
85. SETTINGS window merely displays the status of the ENGINEER ING UNIT SETTINGS window s SCALE function which can only be changed at the ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS window 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS LOWER SPAN UPPER UNIT 6 Set the span of signals to be measured within the currently selected mea surement range The table below lists the standard SPAN values that can be specified When setting SPAN values be sure to set the Upper SPAN value so that it is greater than the Lower SPAN value When the ENTER key is pressed while this parameter is selected by the cursor the following window appears qq 2 3 Span Settings Upper aoo 250 0 y Lower 250 0 250 0 V Unit V ETA 5 r 6 Input the Upper limit SPAN value here When the Scaling setting is On this SPAN setting is also scaled Input the Lower limit SPAN value here When the Scaling setting is On this SPAN setting is also scaled Displays the original Upper SPAN value prior to scaling if the Scaling setting is On If the Scaling setting is Off the same value as 1 is displayed here Displays the original Lower SPAN value prior to scaling if the Scaling setting is On If the Scaling setting is Off the same value as 2 is displayed here Displays the unit of the selected Range If the Scaling setting is On the Unit setting specified at the Engineering Unit Settings Window is dis played
86. Section 21 3 Designating an Existing Folder or Section 21 6 Designating an Existing File Create a new file as described in Section 21 7 Creating a New File or overwrite an existing file as described in Section 21 6 Designating an Ex isting File Press the EXECUTE key to initiate the SAVE op eration To load a group of settings perform the following steps the figure below assumes that the SYSTEM SET TINGS window is already open For details about the SYSTEM SETTINGS window see Subsection 4 7 2 Setting Procedure System Settings System 1 4 Settings Save current settings W Load settings from disk M Load Settings Drive 8 909 Available 1456640 bytes Folder File Name DEFAULT CND Press Enter to select Exec to start load operation 16 2 Press the SYSTEM key to open the SYSTEM SET TINGS window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the LOAD SETTINGS FROM DISK position under SET TINGS then press the ENTER key to open the LOAD SETTINGS window Select the source drive as described in Section 21 2 Designating an Existing Drive Select the source folder as described in Section 21 3 Designating an Existing Folder Select the source file as described in Section 21 6 Designating an Existing File Press the EXECUTE key to initiate the LOAD operation 16 PERFORMING DISK OPERATIONS 16 3 Displaying Information about a File To display i
87. Select pre amp group SEL key Select input coupling status MEAS key Set measurement range RANGE keys Set measurement span POSITION keys Select filter mode FILT key Chart speed CHART SPEED section Select chart speed value CHART SPEED value key Select chart speed unit UNIT key Start stop of measurement amp recorder control Main control panel 5 SIMPLIFIED RECORDING IN REALTIME 5 2 Enabling Simplified Direct Recording This section describes the steps for enabling simplified Direct recording It is also possible to perform simplified Direct recording by returning the recorder s settings to their factory default settings In this case however the current settings and measured data will be erased from the recorder s internal memory For more information see Section 19 2 Returning the Settings to Their Factory Default Settings Preliminary Settings To enable simplified Direct realtime recording you must first select the settings listed below For detailed information about Direct recording see Chapter 8 RECORDING IN REALTIME Trigger Settings window s Function setting Direct e Trigger Settings window s Source setting Off Record Settings window s Display Mode setting Y T Record Settings window s Function setting Direct Setting Procedure Step 1 lt lt Select the measurement mode gt gt gt woe PAINTER Press the main
88. Slow blow ceramic type 12V unit 20A 24V unit 10A 1 DC power cord 2 Fuse When the Logic Input Amp Is Included If your WR1000 comes with the logic input amp the accessory listed in the table below is provided along with those listed in the first table above Probe sets RIC 10 4 sets Each set contains a logic probe RIC 07 an alligator clip cable RIC 08 and an IC clip cable RIC 09 Probe sets 1 Logic probe 2 Alligator clip cable 3 IC clip cable When the Long length Z fold Unit Is Included If your WR1000 comes with the long length Z fold unit the accessories listed in the table below are provided along with those listed in the first table above 2 Long length pipe 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION When the Internal Z fold Unit Is Included If your WR1000 comes with the internal Z fold unit the accessories listed in the table below are provided with those listed in the first table above Nme Panno ary Remarks Dedicated thermal paper PZ100 20 m Z fold pack 1 Dedicated thermal paper 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS CHAPTER DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS This chapter describes the names and functions of the WR1000 s parts SSS 2 1 The Front Panel 2 1 1 The Display Monitor 2 1 2 The Amp Control Panel 2 1 3 The Numeric Keypad and CHART SPEED Section 2 1 4 The Main Con
89. Source setting to Memory and the Capture Block setting to the final Block No and then press the MEM OUT key once more MODE EVENT PRINTER MODE 6 12 10 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 2 Setting Procedures for Replaying Data This section describes various setting procedures for replaying data Perform the settings described in the following subsections at the Data Replay Settings window 12 2 1 Replaying Captured Data The following procedure lets you replay data that has been saved to a disk either in an internal memory device a hard disk drive floppy disk drive or MO drive or in an external memory device connected via the SCSI interface unit This procedure can only be set when the target data has been captured by a Direct Save or Memory Save operation For more information about the Replay Source and Capture Block parameters see Subsection 4 3 3 The Replay Settings Window Setting Procedure to Replay Data from the Recorder s Internal Memory Part 1 Press the MEMORY key to open the Data Re Data Replay Settings pay g play Settings window Memory 2 4 Replay Source 1017 Capture Block Disk Data Replay Settings Memory 2 4 Replay Source Disk Capture Block Set Value Limits 1 128 Press Enter to register Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Replay Source position then press the ENTER key to display
90. These parameters select the Lower and Upper limits to either define the reference area or to serve as the reference line for waveform judgement Available Settings The specifiable values are within 110 of the currently selected Range setting of the selected channel 4 6 3 The Judgement Settings Memory Window This subsection describes the Judgement Settings Memory window an example of which is shown below The parameters in this window cannot be set when the measurement mode is RECORDER and the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is X Y or when the measurement mode is LOGGING Judgement Settings Memory Judge 2 2 Function On Reference No Good CH Judgement Data File CH 1 Load Judgement Data V Generated Area Data Reference CH CH 1 Range 500V EU Off No Of Data 2000 Allowable Voltage Range 2 0 Allowable Time Range 10 Generate Judgement Data gt Judgement Data Save w FUNCTION Selects the On Off status of the Waveform Judgement function Available Settings Off Disables the Waveform Judgement function On Enables the Waveform Judgement function 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS REFERENCE Selects the reference criteria for waveform judgement The judged result is output as a signal from the REMOTE connector s JUDGE Output terminal Available Settings Settings Input waveform Judged result REMOTE output Good When all of the input waveforms are A pulse is ou
91. Title Annotation Off Use the arrow keys to select the desired status except Off which disables Title Annotation Systa then press the ENTER key to register your set CH Annotation User ting System amp User Annotation Settings Record 3 3 Part 2 lt lt If you selected User or System amp User in Step 3 you must also perform the steps below gt gt Record 3 3 4 Use the arrow keys to move to the Title Anno tation input area then press the ENTER key to open the character input window Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys O together with the jog shuttle dial to input a char Character EL OL acter string that is no longer than the number of characters specified by the Length param Annotation Settings Title Annotation User eter Finally press the ENTER key to register your setting e NOTE For more information on inputting numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHA NUMERIC CHARACTERS 14 14 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 1 21 Printing a Message or Measured Values for Each Channel To enable the Channel Annotation function for printing annotation on chart paper for each channel perform the steps below For more information about the Channel Annotation parameter see Subsection 4 5 4 The Annotation Set tings Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Annota tion Settings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor t
92. VDC DC ACP P Between an input terminal and GND 250 VAC r m s Banana plug terminal two terminals APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS A 5 3 LO Logic Type Amp Item LO Logic type amp Number of channels 16 4 per terminal x 4 Input voltage range 0 to 25 V max Single ended ground Sampling speed 1 us max not affected by the types of analog amps installed Threshold levels TTL 41 4 V CMOS 2 5 V Contact point 5 V Trigger settings AND or OR trigger for 16 channels when the condition of an armed trigger is met Trigger filter Sampling interval x 1 to 255 Display recording Can be switched on off for each group A B C D of four channels Zone positioning Each four channel group A B C D can be assigned to a zone for display and recording APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS A 6 Memory Devices A 6 1 Floppy Disk Drive Item Specifications Configuration Disk drive for 2DD or 2HD floppy disks Format type MS DOS Compatible computers IBM PCs and their compatibles Disk capacity 2HD format 1 44 MBytes 2DD format 720 kBytes A 6 2 MO Magneto Optic Disk Drive Factory Installed Unit Item Specifications Configuration MO disk drive in a disk cartridge Format type Standard IBM format compatible with MS DOS Version 5 1 or later Sector size 512 bytes sector for the 128 230 or 540 Mbyte disk 2 048 bytes sector for the 640 Mbyte disk Compatible MO disks 128
93. When the Drive setting is MO Disk the Type setting can be set to Quick or Normal the disk format is automatically recognized When the Drive setting is Hard Disk the Type setting can be set to Quick or Normal Only when the MO disk is installed Recognizable IBM standard formats are 2128 Mbytes 230 Mbytes 540 Mbytes and 640 Mbytes compatible with MS DOS Version 5 1 or later Only when using a hard disk recommended by Graphtec IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corp MS DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation 2 i Volume Label This parameter which can only be set when the Initialize Mode set ting is Drive Format specifies the volume label of the disk to be for matted Specify a volume label of up to 12 characters SCSI ID This parameter which can only be set when the Initialize Mode set ting is FDISK selects the ID number of the hard disk to be reformat ted DRIVE LIST When this setting is selected a list of existing drives appears If the SCSI interface unit is installed and is used to connect an MO disk drive or Zip drive as an external device the drive number of such devices will also be listed 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 7 3 The OPTION SETTINGS Window This subsection describes the OPTION SETTINGS window an example of which is shown below Option Settings System 2 4 LCD Screen Adjustment 4 Screen Saver Off Power On Start Enable
94. and jog shuttle dial to input the Upper SPAN 1 Off 0 5000 E v setting as described in Steps 3 through 10 2 Off 3 is enter un m guid q gt key 3 Off Set Value 1 0009 e cursor to the position for the sign and then are select the symbol by either using the and A C EM V keys or turning the jog shuttle dial B 4 Use the lt gt key to move the cursor to the next digit on the right Select the space charac ter by either using the A and V keys or turn ing the jog shuttle dial 5 Use the lt or gt key to move the cursor to the next digit on the right Select the numeral 1 by either using the and V keys or turning the jog shuttle dial 6 Use the lt or key to move the cursor to the next digit on the right Select 0 by either using the and keys or turning the jog shuttle dial 19 6 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 7 Use the lt or gt key to move the cursor to the next digit on the right Select 0 by either using the and V keys or turning the jog shuttle dial Use the lt or gt key to move the cursor to the next digit on the right Select 0 by either using the and V keys or turning the jog shuttle dial Use the lt or gt key to move the cursor to the next digit on the right Select 0 by either using the A and V keys or turning the jog shuttle dial NOTE jr When inputting a numeric value you cannot change the decimal point s position or
95. appears enclosed in lt gt brackets Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Make new folder then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Make new folder New folder name Press ENTER to register A B C D E F G H 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS Using the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial input GRAPHTEC as the name of the new folder then press the ENTER key to register your folder name The folder named GRAPHTEC has now been cre ated in the hard disk at drive C as the target folder NOTE jr For detailed instructions on how to input alphanumeric characters see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARAC TERS 21 7 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS 21 6 Designating an Existing File This section explains how to designate an existing file Sample Setting In this example we will move to the GRAPHTEC folder in the hard disk at drive C This GRAPHTEC folder contains a file named WR1000 which will be designated as the destination file name for a Save current settings operation at the System Settings window The hard disk can only be specified if the hard disk unit is installed NOTE 7 The same procedure is used for designating an existing folder whether you wish to save data load data or perform another file related operation If the existing folders or files cannot all be displayed in a one page pull down menu press the V key to scrol
96. applications Capturing Data e Concurrently with recording a large volume of measured data can be saved at high speed to an internal large capacity hard disk e Even after saving a large volume of data use of the Search function lets you easily retrieve the required portion of the data e The recorder can perform online data transfer with a computer using various memory media floppy disks magneto optic disks or Zip disks 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 3 Unpacking Your Recorder After unpacking the WR1000 check its outer case for defects and check that the necessary accessories listed below in the appropriate table s are all present If you discover a surface flaw or an accessory missing contact your sales representative or nearest Graphtec vendor Standard Configuration without any add on units installed Thermal paper PR231A 40 m roll Roll paper bobbins Power cord RSC 110 REMOTE connector 16 pin connector User s Manual WR1000 UM 152 This manual 1 Thermal paper 2 Roll paper bobbins 3 Power cord E 4 REMOTE connector 5 User s Manual THERMAL CORDER WERIOO SE ES GRAPHTEC CORPORATION 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION When the DC Adapter Unit Is Included If your WR1000 comes with the DC adapter unit the accessories listed in the table below are provided along with those listed in the table above LT em em DC power cord RIC 140 10 pin round connector Fuse
97. capturing data Perform the settings described in the following subsections at the Memory Settings window 12 1 1 Saving Data to the Recorder s Internal Memory To capture data in the recorder s internal memory during a Direct Save or Memory Save operation perform the following procedure This procedure assumes that the recorder has already been set up for a Direct Save or a Memory Save opera tion as described in Chapter 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME or Chapter 10 CAPTURING DATA IN A MEMORY DEVICE Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the MEMORY key to open the Memory Settings window Capture Destination Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Sampling Interval Capture Destination position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select Memory then press the ENTER key to register your setting Memory Settings Memory 1 4 NOTE For information about the Capture Destina tion parameter see Subsection 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Memory Settings Memory 1 4 Sampling Interval position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 5 Use the arrow keys to select the desired in terval then press the ENTER key to register your setting Capture Destination Memory Sampling Interval 71118 NOTE W The available choice of Sampling Interval settings varies wi
98. comment VALUE Prints the measured values NOTE h When the CH ANNOTATION setting is AMP amp USER the print interval and the number of characters printed are respectively determined by the PRINT INTERVAL and LENGTH settings When the CH ANNOTATION setting is MEASURED VALUES the measured value at the position indicated by the V symbol where the title is usually printed The print interval of the V symbols is determined by the PRINT INTERVAL setting E m This parameter which can only be set when the CH Annotation setting is User or Amp amp User selects the target channel number for the input of the CH Annotation character string 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 6 The JUDGE Menu This section describes the menu and two windows accessed via the JUDGE key on the conditions panel 4 6 1 The JUDGE Menu s Tree Structure Parameters accessed by the J UDGE key JUDGE Menu Judgement Settings Direct Function Off On B CH Lower Range Upper Unit Reference No Good Good Judgement Settings Memory Function Off On CH Judgement Data File __ Generate Area Data Reference CH Range displayed only displayed only No of Data displayed only Allowable Voltage Range r Allowable Time Range Generate Judgement Data Judgement Data Save Reference I No Good Good
99. correlation COLOR Selects the color of each waveform to be displayed on the screen Besides a choice of 32 existing colors you can also create an original color In this case a submenu for color editing appears X AXIS This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is X Y selects the Channel No to be used as the X axis Y AXIS This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is X Y selects the Channel No to be used as the Y axis 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS The sample display below shows the FORMAT SETTINGS window when the measurement mode is LOG GING In LOGGING Mode Format Settings Record 2 3 Format 16 Divisions Zone CH Color Zone CH Color 1 CH1 BH 9 B 2 CH2 B 10 cH10 B 3 None 11 cH11 4 E 12 CH12 5 CH5 13 CH13 6 14 CH14 7 CH7 15 CH 15 8 CH8 16 Logic FORMAT Selects the format for displaying data measured in LOGGING mode Available Settings 2 DIVISIONS 4 DIVISIONS 8 DIVISIONS 16 DIVISIONS This setting is only available with the WR1000 16 ZONE Displays the Zone Nos The number of Zone Nos displayed varies with the FORMAT setting Selects the number of the channel for display in each zone The specifiable channel num bers vary with the number of amps in
100. create your own user defined UNIT setting NOTE 0 UNIT SETTINGS Window For more information about the UNIT parameter see Subsection 4 2 3 The ENGINEERING Selecting a Predetermined UNIT Setting Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit 1 Of 5000 45000 mV 500 0 5000 mV 2 Engineering Unit Setting Setting Method Offset s tting Meas Value EU Value Setting 1 0000 41 0000 Meas Value EU Value Setting 41 0000 41 0000 Unit V V Select Unit Length Choose Span Do notlink Enter select Exe cm Unit V V Select Unit Length Choose Span lin Pressure Enter Area Flow Volume Velocity Acc Freq Mass Energy Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit 1 Of 500 0 4500 0 mV 500 0 500 0 mV JM Off Engineering Unit Setting i Setting Method Offset s tting 11 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the left setting in the SELECT UNIT row then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 12 Use the arrow keys to select the desired cat egory then press the ENTER key to register your setting 13 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to CHOOSE on the right then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 14 Use the arrow keys to select a unit then press the ENTER key to register your set
101. currently selected waveform cursor For more information about the Move to First Data function see Section 4 8 The Execute Menu The following procedure assumes waveform data is being replayed and that a cursor has already been dis played Setting Procedure 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Move to First Data under Cursor Position then press the ENTER key to move the displayed cursor to the beginning position of the waveform data Cursor Position Move to Selected Position w Move to First Data M79 Move to Last Data Call other Cursor Load Cursor Position w Save Cursor Position w 20 11 2 Moving to the End of Replay Data To move the displayed cursor to the final position of the waveform data being replayed perform the steps below This Move to Last Data function can only be used when the Recording Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T When two waveform cursors are being displayed this function affects the currently selected waveform cursor For more information about the Move to Last Data function see Section 4 8 The Execute Menu The following procedure assumes waveform data is being replayed and that a cursor has already been dis played Setting Procedure Press the EXECUTE key to open the Execute 1 M 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Move to Last Data under Cursor Position then press the Cursor Position ENTER key to move the displayed cursor to the M
102. cursor to the Drive position specify the letter of the drive where the disk containing the target data is lo cated then press the ENTER key to register your setting Repeat this process to also specify the names of the folder and file containing the target data then press the EXECUTE key to register all three settings NOTE For details on how to specify the drive letter folder name and file name see Chapter 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS 6 Toreplay the data that has been saved to a disk press the main control panel s MEM OUT key If the Replay Source is Disk do not attempt any disk operations while in Replay mode The disk may be damaged if you do so 12 12 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 2 2 Replaying the Data of All Channels or Only the Specified Channel The following procedure lets you select whether to replay the data of all channels or only the specified channel by setting the Replay CH parameter The Replay CH parameter can only be set when the target data has been captured by a Direct Save or Memory Save operation For more information about the Replay CH parameter see Subsection 4 3 3 The Data Replay Settings Window Part 1 Data Replay Settings Memory 2 4 Press the MEMORY key to open the Data Replay Settings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Replay CH position then press the ENTER key Replay CH 1989 CH Selection V to display its pull down menu Ou
103. data Contains data already Contains no data This parameter which can only be set when the CAPTURE DESTINATION setting is MEMORY selects the On Off status of the AUTO SAVE function When AUTO SAVE is On the data captured in internal memory is automatically saved to a disk in a memory device such as a floppy disk drive hard disk drive or a 31 2 magneto optic disk drive Available Settings Off Disables the AUTO SAVE function On Enables the AUTO SAVE function This parameter can only be set in the following case When the Capture Destination setting is Memory and When the Auto Save setting is On This parameter specifies the file format destination folder and destination file name When the Capture Destination setting is Disk see the next page for an explanation of the File Name setting for the Auto Save operation You have a choice of two file formats BINARY or TEXT For instructions on how to specify the destination folder and destination file name see Chapter 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS The file name can be specified automatically or semi automatically When creating a semi automatic file name you can freely select its first five characters 4 17 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS FILE NAME DISK This parameter can only be specified in the following case Either a hard disk drive or MO drive is installed as an internal memory device or the SCSI interface unit is installed an
104. designated signal via the REMOTE connector in order to print event markers based on such signal input e AC Line Fail This function is only available when the DC adapter unit is installed If a power failure or other problem forces the recorder to switch from the AC power supply to the DC power supply this function outputs the designated signal via the REMOTE connector 22 5 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR 22 6 APPENDIX SPECIFICATIONS This appendix provides the WR1000 s specifications a PO ee ee A 1 Basic Specifications A 2 Memory Functions A 3 Trigger Functions A 4 Measured Mode Function A 5 Plug in Amplifiers Functions A 5 1 V Voltage Input Type Amp 5 2 M Multi Input Type Amp A 5 3 LO Logic Type Amp A 6 Memory Devices A 6 1 Floppy Disk Drive A 6 2 MO Magneto Optic Disk Drive Factory Installed Option A 6 3 Hard Disk Factory Installed Option A 7 Interface Units A 7 1 RS 232C Interface A 7 2 GB IB Interface A 7 3 SCSI Interface Unit Factory Installed Unit A 8 DC Adapter Unit Factory Installed Option APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS A APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS A 1 Basic Specifications Item WR1000 8 WR1000 16 Maximum number of channels Analog 8 channels Logic 16 channels Analog 16 channels Logic 16 channels Analog input Analog amp 4 slots amp types can be mixed Plug in type 2 channels unit 8 slots amp types can be mixed
105. gt key to move the cursor to the seventh character position Select L by either using the A and V keys or turning the jog shuttle dial Use the lt or gt key to move the cursor to the eighth character position Select T by either using the and keys or turning the jog shuttle dial NOTE 7 If you turn the jog shuttle dial without using the arrow keys to move to a different charac ter position the currently selected character will be changed 10 Press the ENTER key to register your Title An notation character string 19 9 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 19 10 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS CHAPTER ZU PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS This chapter describes how to perform various types of cursor related operations el 20 1 Overview of the Cursor Functions 20 1 1 Types of Cursor Functions 20 2 The Cursor Display 20 2 1 When the Display Mode Setting is Y T 20 2 2 When the Display Mode Setting is X Y 20 3 The Display Position of Cursor Information 20 3 1 When the Display Mode Setting is Y T 20 3 2 When the Display Mode Setting is X Y 20 4 Using the Cursor Controlled Scroll Function 20 5 Using the Cursor Readout Function 20 6 Expanding Compressing the Cursor Defined Range of the Waveform Display to the Screen s Width 20 7 Printing Data within a Cursor Defined Range 20 8 Saving a Cursor Defined Range of Data to Disk 20 9 Saving the Cursor Position 20 10 Loading a Cursor Posit
106. hard disk at drive C as the target file NOTE 7 If you wish to save data by overwriting an existing file use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the target file then press the ENTER key For detailed instructions on how to input alphanumeric characters see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARAC TERS 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS 21 8 Using the Auto Save Function When the Auto Save function is On the data captured in the recorder s internal memory is automatically saved to the designated folder and file of a disk To designate an existing folder or create a new folder as the destina tion of the Auto Save function perform the steps below Sample Setting Using Auto Save with an Existing Folder Assume that the hard disk with the drive letter of C contains a folder named GRAPHTEC In the example below the captured data in the recorder s internal memory will be automatically saved to that folder A hard disk can only be selected when a hard disk drive is installed NOTE 0 f the existing folders or files cannot all be displayed in a one page pull down menu press the V key to scroll through the available folders or files vertically To display the time of data capture press the gt key to scroll the list horizontally The file name is automatically generated If a file with the same name already exists it will be over written Setting Procedure Use the arrow keys to move the cur
107. in that status may cause burns or other injuries Before cleaning the printhead be sure to allow it to suffi ciently cool down C 2 Ifan MO Disk Gets Jammed in its Drive To remove an MO disk which is stuck in its drive or to remove it while the recorder is turned off perform the step below Removing an MO Disk To remove the MO disk insert the eject jig provided into the hole in the MO drive s front panel and then insert it further to release the disk APPENDIX D BEFORE REQUESTING SERVICE APPENDIX D BEFORE REQUESTING SERVICE This chapter describes the check procedures that should be performed before requesting service D 1 BEFORE REQUESTING SERVICE APPENDIX D BEFORE REQUESTING SERVICE D 1 BEFORE REQUESTING SERVICE In the case that this recorder is not operating normally be sure to confirm the checkpoints below before request ing service If abnormal operation persists even after you have performed the recommended remedy try restoring the recorder s settings to their default values the status in which the recorder was delivered For instructions see Section 18 2 Returning the Settings to Their Default Settings Symptom Remedy The Power switch has been turned on but nothing appears on the screen When using an AC power supply Check that the power cord is properly connected If the cord is properly connected but no screen display appears t
108. interface It can only be set after selecting Change Settings under RS 232C Settings Available Settings None Xon Xoff RS CS When the Flow Control setting is Xon Off the binary format cannot be used for transferring data This parameter selects the time out interval for data transfer via the RS 232C interface It can only be set after selecting Change Settings under RS 232C Settings Available Settings Off 200ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 20s GP IB Settings Specifies the interface conditions for the GP IB interface To change a setting select Change Settings The curr to display the GP IB Settings submenu ent GP IB interface conditions are displayed at below this line At this section you can only check the current settings but you cannot change them here CHANGE SETTINGS Used to change any of the GP IB interface s interface conditions GP IB Settings Address 0 Terminator CR LF Timeout 2s Enter select Exec register 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS Address This parameter selects the address number of the GP IB interface It can only be set after selecting Change Settings under GP IB Settings Available Settings Any whole number from 0 to 30 Terminator This parameter selects the terminator used for delimiting text during data transfer It can only be set after selecting Change Settings under GP IB Settings Available Settings EOI EOI New Line code New Line code N
109. its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select Memory then press the ENTER key to register your setting Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Capture Block position then press the ENTER key to display its window Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to gether with the jog shuttle dial to enter the Block No of the data you wish to replay then press the ENTER key to register your setting NOTE Each Memory Block No that contains data appears as a green block 6 To replay the captured data press the main control panel s MEM OUT key 12 11 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Setting Procedure to Replay Data Saved to a Disk Part 1 Data Replay Settings Replay Source Memory Data Replay Settings Replay Source File Name PAZARDA Memory 2 4 Memory 2 4 Data Save Destination Drive A FDD Available Folder EN File Name DEFAULT DAT 1455104 bytes Press Enter to select Exec to register Press the MEMORY key to open the Data Re play Settings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Replay Source position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select Disk then press the ENTER key to register your setting Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the File Name position then press the ENTER key to display the Data Save Destination Settings window Use the arrow keys to move the
110. menu and a simplified Search operation can be performed using the lt and gt arrow keys To perform a simplified Search operation complete Part 4 above and then either use the gt key to move to the Next Level Match point or the lt key to move to the Prev Level Match point Once an Event Search operation is performed from the Execute menu the target of the simplified Search operation becomes an Event In this case if you wish to perform a simplified Search operation for a target Level return to the Execute menu and perform a Level Search operation 12 18 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 4 Outputting Data Being Replayed onto Chart Paper This section describes how to output the data being replayed onto chart paper This operation can only be performed when the measurement mode is RECORDER The setting procedure assumes that data has already been captured and is being replayed For more information about the Printer Output function see Section 4 8 The Execute Menu NOTE h This operation can only be set during Replay mode after replaying captured data using the MEM OUT key To output data being replayed onto chart paper in LOGGING mode switch the main control panel s PRINTER key to On and then press the MEM OUT key Setting Procedure When the Display Mode Setting is Y T 1 Press the EXECUTE key to display the Execute menu 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Printer Output All
111. not use the WR1000 in the vicinity of other devices which are susceptible to electromagnetic interfer ence 8 Measured results may not conform to the stated specifications if the WR1000 is used in an environment which is subject to strong electromagnetic interference 9 Insofar as possible position the WR1000 input signal cables away from any other cables which are likely to be affected by electromagnetic interference INTRODUCTION TO ENSURE SAFE AND CORRECT USE To ensure safe and correct use of your thermal arraycorder read this Manual thoroughly before use After having read this Manual keep it in a handy location for quick reference as needed Do not permit small children to touch this thermal arraycorder The following describes important points for safe operation Please be sure to observe them strictly Conventions Used in This Manua To promote safe and accurate use of this thermal arraycorder as well as to prevent human injury and property damage safety precautions provided in this manual are ranked into the five categories described below Be sure you understand the difference between each of the categories DANGER This category provides information that if ignored is highly likely to cause fatal or serious injury to the operator WARNING This category provides information that if ignored is likely to cause fatal or serious injury to the operator CAUTION This category provides information
112. of data Maximum minus Minimum Value P P Displays the difference between the maximum value and minimum value peak to peak value within the cursor defined range of data RMS Value Displays the root mean square within the cursor defined range of data R M S XD n D Data No of data points Rise Time Displays the rise time of a waveform displayed within a cursor defined range of waveform data The calculation of the rise time varies with the direction of the cursors 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS When the cursors are in the time axis direction After determining the maximum and minimum values within a cursor defined range of data the target waveform is that which first passes their mid point value Assuming that the minimum and maximum values are respectively 0 and 100 the Rise Time is calculated within the range of 10 to 90 Cursor A Cursor B 1 1 Max value 9 Mid point value 1096 Min value Rise time When the cursors are in the voltage axis direction Regarding Cursors A and B as the maximum and minimum values respectively the target waveform is that which first passes their mid point value Assuming that the minimum and maximum values are respectively 0 and 100 the Rise Time is calculated within the range of 10 to 90 Cursor A Max value 90 Mid point value 10 Cursor B Min value Rise time Fall Time Disp
113. of the external DC power supply connect the black gray white navy blue and sky blue leads to the terminal of the external DC power supply and connect the black and white lead to the GND terminal of the external DC power supply There are five leads each for connection to the and terminals plus one lead for connection to the GND terminal so be sure to connect all 11 leads 2 Connect the DC power cord to the WR1000 s DC LINE inlet Whether the DC power is turned on or off the WR1000 is turned on as soon as the DC power cord is connected In the case that you are using the SCSI interface connected to an external device first turn on the external device s and then turn on the recorder When turning off your system first turn off the recorder and then turn off the external device s 3 15 3 PREPARATIONS Connect the red orange vellow brown and green leads to connect the black gray white navy blue and sky blue leads to and connect the black and white lead to GND Red orange yellow brown and green leads External DC power supply 12V 24V DC power cord This cord has five leads each for the and Black gray white navy terminals so be sure to connect them all blue and sky blue leads 4 side red orange yellow brown and green The shielded lead side black gray white navy blue and black amp white is sky blue connected to GND DC POWER Because a maximum cu
114. operation insertion or deletion 3 CHART SPEED value keys Press one of these keys to set the chart speed to the value indicated on the key NOTE 0 The chart speed selected using a CHART SPEED value and UNIT key becomes the CHART SPEED setting in the RECORD SETTINGS menu s Record window 4 Variable CHART SPEED keys Press V1 or V2 to change the chart speed to the chart speed of the V1 or 5 UNIT key V2 setting which you registered in advance at the RECORD SETTINGS menu s Record window NOTE The chart speed selected using a CHART SPEED value and UNIT key becomes the CHART SPEED setting in the RECORD SETTINGS menu s Record window Selects the unit for the chart speed value selected using a CHART SPEED value key Each time you press this key the unit changes in the sequence of mm s mm min and mm h A lamp on the left of this key lights to indicated the currently selected unit NOTE 7 The chart speed selected using a CHART SPEED value and UNIT key becomes the CHART SPEED setting in the RECORD SETTINGS menu s Record window 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 2 1 4 The Main Control Panel This subsection describes the main control panel on the main unit s front panel 3 SELECT key 4 COPY key 2 MODE EVENT key 5 PRINTER key 6 MONITOR key 7 MODE key 1 Jog shuttle dial MODE EVENT OA
115. parameter see Subsection 4 7 3 The Option Settings Window Setting Procedure Press the SYSTEM key to open the Option Set tings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Re mote I F position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 3 Use the arrow keys to select the interface type to be used then press the ENTER key to register your setting 4 Reset the recorder by turning it off then back on again Option Settings System 2 4 1 Remote I F RS 232C Settings New Line code CR LF Speed 115200 NOTE The Remote I F parameter can only be set to GP IB when the GP IB interface unit is installed 17 2 Selecting the New Line Code To select the character code to be used to signify the end of each line perform the steps below For more information about the New Line Code parameter see Subsection 4 7 3 The Option Settings Win dow Setting Procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the Option Set tings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the New Line Code position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Option Settings System 2 4 New Line code Remote I F RS 232C Settings 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired termina Speed tor code then press the ENTER key to register your setting 17 2 17 SETTING THE INTERFACE FUNCTIONS 17 3 Setting the RS 232C Interface Conditions This secti
116. related to enabling DIRECT Y T SAVE operations For other settings see the pertinent section in Chapter 11 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS through Chapter 18 USING THE BASIC FUNCTIONS NOTE 0 Before proceeding to the following settings be sure to first complete the settings described in Chapter 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS Setting Procedure Measurement mode RECORDER Memory Settings window Capture Destination Setting 1 Memory 2 Disk Sampig interval seting Boek Size seming Memory Expansion seing emery Grain seting Capture Block seting Sampling menal seting C Fie Name seting No of Channels seting Evert setting Logie setting Trigger Settings window Function Record 1 Source setting of Start Stop conditions 1 Off Manual External 2 Internal Type setting 1 Normal 2 Slope 1 Combination setting Part 1 Select the measurement mode 1 Press the main control panel s MODE key to switch the mea surement mode to RECORDER Part 2 Settings at the Memory Settings window 2 Press the MEMORY key to open the Memory Settings window 3 Setthe Capture Destination parameter 3 4 Set the Sampling Interval parameter 5 Set other parameters related to data capture When the Capture Destination setting is Memory Set the Block Size parameter Set the Memory Expansion parameter Set the Mem
117. settings cannot be changed To change a set ting exit the Replay mode by pressing the main control panel s MODE key Never remove or exchange a disk during Replay mode when the Replay Source setting is Disk or you may damage the disk s contents 11 USING THE SCALING FUNCTIONS CHAPTER USING THE SCALING FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the setting procedures for two operations involving SCALE related parameters Ee 11 1 Scaling the Upper and Lower Limits of the Signal Input 11 2 Offsetting the Input Values 11 1 11 USING THE SCALING FUNCTIONS 11 1 Scaling the Upper and Lower Limits of the Signal Input To scale the upper and lower limits of the signal input perform the steps described in this section Setting Procedure Part 1 Engineering Unit Settings Press the INPUT key to open the ENGINEER t 2 2 ue ING UNIT SETTINGS window CH El Off 2 On Part 2 Lower EU Upper Unit Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the EU position then press the ENTER key to dis play its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select On then press the ENTER key to register your setting 4500 0 500 0 45000 500 0 1 0000 0 5000 mV mv Y V V JV 41 0000 40 5000 Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the CH EU 1 Off 2 Off 11 2 LOWER EU UPPER position then press the ENTE
118. slope trigger 12 MODE This parameter can only be set when the measurement mode is RECORDER the Function setting is Memory and the Type setting is Slope It selects the mode for trigger activation Available Settings Slope dV dT The start of measurement is triggered when the interval for passing from the Lower to Upper values is outside the specified time Slope dV dT The start of measurement is triggered when the interval for passing from the Lower to Upper values is inside the specified time 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS STOP CONDITION The STOP CONDITION parameters specify the trigger condition that must be met in order to stop measurement Similar to the START CONDITION parameters various trigger conditions can be set by specifying the STOP CONDITION param eters The PRETRIGGER parameter which can be specified for START CONDI TION parameters however cannot be used with STOP CONDITION parameters For an explanation of STOP CONDITION parameters which are listed below see the identically numbered parameter in the description of the START CONDITION parameters which begins on page 4 30 Note however that the START CONDI TION parameters affect the start of an operation whereas the STOP CONDITION parameters its stopping For a more detailed tree structure of trigger related param eters see the diagram on section 4 4 1 Tree Structure of the Trigger Menu on
119. submenu each appears for setting the starting and stopping times The available settings vary with the Time Gate setting The TIME GATE setting only affects the START CONDITION and cannot be used for the STOP CONDITION When the Time Gate setting is Relative Time both the starting and ending times must be specified relative to the starting time of measurement in the range of 0000 00 01 to 9999 59 59 hours minutes seconds When the Time Gate setting is Absolute Time both the starting and ending times must be specified The following table describes the relationship between the absolute starting and ending times Current time or earlier Current time or earlier The Time Gate function is disabled Current time or earlier After current time Only the ending time is recognized After current time Current time or earlier Only the starting time is recognized After current time After current time Both the starting and ending times are recognized but the starting time cannot be set later than the ending time 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS FUNCTION Selects how the recorder will operate after the trigger condition is satisfied Available Settings RECORD After triggering the recorder starts displaying the measured data on the screen or recording it onto chart paper MEMORY After triggering the recorder starts capturing data to a disk either in an internal memory device a hard disk drive or MO drive or in an exter
120. that a signal cable has already been connected to the connector s pins Assembly diagram 22 4 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR 22 3 Using the REMOTE Functions The following describes the procedures for using the REMOTE functions e START STOP This recorder can be started or stopped from an external device by inputting the designated signal to the recorder via the REMOTE connector e EXT FEED When the CHART SPEED setting in the Record menu s RECORD SETTINGS window is EXTERNAL input the designated signal via the REMOTE interface in order to feed the chart paper at a speed based on such signal input e EXT TRIGGER When the SOURCE setting in the Trigger menu s TRIGGER SETTINGS window is EXTERNAL input the designated signal via the REMOTE connector in order to satisfy the trigger condition e EXT SAMPLE When the SAMPLING INTERVAL setting in the Memory menu s MEMORY SETTINGS window is EXTER NAL input the designated signal via the REMOTE connector to sample data at a sampling interval based on such signal input TRIGGER Output When the trigger condition is satisfied this function outputs the designated signal via the REMOTE connec tor M C ALARM When an error occurs in one of the recorder s functions this function outputs the designated signal via the REMOTE connector e JUDGE Output Inputs the designated signal via the REMOTE connector when the waveform judgement condition is met e EXT EVENT Input the
121. the total number of digits When consecutively increasing the numeric value at the one s digit by using an arrow key or the jog shuttle dial for example the numeric value 9 is fol lowed by 10 Be sure to input a value that is within the Limits indicated below the Set Value pa rameter Press the ENTER key to register your Upper SPAN setting NOTE p An error message appears when you input an invalid numeric value If this happens input the value again Part 3 11 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Lower position and press the ENTER key to dis play its pull down menu Next repeat the pre ceding Steps 2 through 10 to set the Lower 1 Off 0 5000 SPAN value 2 Off Span Settings AMP Settings Input 1 2 3 Off Upper 40 5000 0 5000 Lower 000 0 5000 Unit V Enter select Exec register 19 7 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 19 2 2 Alphabetic Example Inputting a Title Character String In the following example the arrow keys and jog shuttle dial are used to input CH1 VOLT as the TITLE setting This example also assumes that the following steps have already been completed Press the RECORD key to open the Annotation Settings window Set the Title Annotation setting to User Sample Setting Procedure Part 1 Annoiation Settings Record 3 3 1 At the Annotation Settings window use the ar row keys to move the cursor to the
122. the ENTER key to reg CH CH 12 ister your setting CH CH 13 CH CH 14 CH CH 15 CH CH 16 Judgement Settings Memory Judge 2 2 9 c N Oo 15 5 15 SETTING THE WAVEFORM JUDGEMENT FUNCTIONS Part 6 Judgement Settings Memory Judge 2 2 Allowable Voltage Range Allowable Time Set Value Generate Judge Limits 0 00 110 00 Judgement Data S Press ENTER to register Part 7 Judgement Settings Memory Judge 2 2 Allowable Voltage Range 1 00 Allowable Time Range EMI Generate Judge 04 Set Value Judgement Data S Limits 0 999 Press ENTER to register Part 8 Judgement Settings Memory Judge 2 2 Allowable Voltage Range 1 00 Allowable Time Range 50 Generate Judge 6 Judgement Data Save V 15 6 12 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Allowable Voltage Range position then press the ENTER key to display its window Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to gether with the jog shuttle dial to enter the de sired value then press the ENTER key to reg ister your setting 13 14 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Allowable Time Range position then press the ENTER key to display its window Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to gether with the jog shuttle dial to enter the de sired value then press the ENTER key to reg ister your set
123. the ENTER key to register your setting NOTE 0 Forinformation about the permissible range of UPPER and LOWER EU values see Subsection 4 2 3 The ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS Window For details on how to input numerals see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the EU VALUE position then press the ENTER key to display the current LOWER limit setting for EU output values Use the numeric keypad or jog shuttle dial to input the LOWER limit setting for EU output values then press the ENTER key to register your setting NOTE h For information about the permissible range of UPPER and LOWER EU values see Sub section 4 2 3 The ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS Window Part 8 11 USING THE SCALING FUNCTIONS The following steps describe how to set the UNIT parameter for scaling For the UNIT setting you choose either one of the predetermined settings or create your own user defined UNIT setting NOTE Wf UNIT SETTINGS Window For more information about the UNIT parameter see Subsection 4 2 3 The ENGINEERING Selecting a Predetermined UNIT Setting Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit 1 Off 500 0 500 0 mV 500 0 500 0 mV V 2 Off Engineering Unit Setting Setting Method 4 point s tting Meas Value EU Value Upper 1 0000 1 0000 Dec pt Lower 1 000
124. the Level condition Available Settings Searches for the position where a single channel among the target chan OR AND nels satisfies the search condition which has not yet been met any other channel Searches for the position where all of the target channels satisfy the search condition 4 Selects the Level condition Available Settings Set this condition for any channel that is to be excluded from the Data Off H Win Win Out LOWER LEVEL UPPER TRIGGER COUNTER Search operation TheLevel condition is satisfied when an input waveform exceeds the speci fied Level value The Level condition is satisfied when an input waveform falls below the In specified Level value Sets the Lower limit and Upper limit levels for each channel The Level condition is met when a captured waveform goes inside both the specified Lower limit and Upper limit levels Sets the Lower limit and Upper limit levels for each channel The Level condition is met when a captured waveform goes outside both the speci fied Lower limit and Upper limit levels Sets the search levels for captured data Set the level in a range of 100 to 100 in 1 steps If the Mode setting is Win In or Win Out be sure to set the difference between the Lower and Upper Levels to 5 or more The Lower limit of the specifiable range is 100 and its Upper limit is 100 Example Fora5V range 5V 100 5V 100 Th
125. the clock wise direction for negative values ASIN Arc Sine ACOS Arc Cosine and ATAN Arc Tangent If the absolute value of the target data of an ASIN or ACOS operation is 1 or more any value equal to 1 or higher is processed as 1 and any value equal to 1 or lower is processed as 1 For ASIN ACOS and ATAN operations the calculated result is displayed as an angle RAD ranging from 7 2 to 41 2 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS Regarding the permissible numeric range If a calculation results in a numeric value absolute value that is lower than 1 17 x 108 or higher than 1 7 10 5 an underflow or overflow state will occur and that value will be rounded off to the closest limit value or to zero LOWER SPAN UPPER UNIT This parameter can only be set for a channel for which the Calcula tion Settings window s Function setting is On the target channel It specifies the Lower Span Upper Span and Unit of the target chan nel 4 3 5 The READOUT SETTINGS Window This subsection describes the READOUT SETTINGS window an example of which is shown below Readout Settings Memory 4 4 Area Statistical Calculation Function S D n 1 Data Search Search Method Level Combination OR CH Mode Lower Level Upper 50 20 10 30 0 0 0 0 ON Oa hWHN Trigger Counter Count O count AREA STATISTICAL CALCULATION Area Statistical Calculation which can only b
126. then press Record Time the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Time minoosec Set Value Limits OO 59 3 Use the arrow keys to select Time then press the ENTER key to register your setting 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Record Time position under Stop Condition then press the ENTER key to display its window 5 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the de sired element of the time hour minute or second then press the ENTER key to display its window 6 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial to enter the desired nu meral then press the ENTER key to register your setting Press Enter to register NOTE 0 For details on inputting numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to change other elements of the time as required 8 When each time element is satisfactorily set press the EXECUTE key to register your entire Time set ting 13 16 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS 13 9 Starting Stopping Measurement After the Trigger Is Activated the Specified Number of Times This section describes the procedure for setting the Count parameter in order to initiate measurement after the trigger condition has been satisfied the specified number of times For more information about the Count parameter see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Setting
127. times that were recorded when the wave form data was originally captured Moreover when the Start Point and End Point are set to the same date time press ing the EXECUTE key in Step 9 will move the cursor to the point of trigger activation 20 15 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS Part 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Date Menu Time then press the ENTER key to display its window C Baur Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired element of the date or time year month Move te Se ected Recon date hour minute or second then press the Move to Selected Position ENTER key to display its window Method Position Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys Date Time 1999 01 01 together with the jog shuttle dial to enter the desired numeral then press the ENTER key to register your setting Date Time Date 1999 oh 01 NOTE W For more information on inputting numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHA NUMERIC CHARACTERS Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for any other element of the date and or time that you wish to change To move the cursor to the selected date and time press the EXECUTE key 20 11 5 Summoning the Other Cursor To summon one of two cursors to the cursor position of the other cursor perform the steps below This function moves the other cursor into the same screen display as the currently selected cursor To select the cursor press th
128. to be controlled from this recorder On Enables printing to be controlled from a personal computer TITLE ANNOTATION Prints a title at the top of the chart paper Available Settings Off Disables the Title Printing function SYSTEM Prints the date starting time and chart speed USER Prints a user defined character string as the title When this set ting is selected a submenu appears for inputting the title charac ter string so input a title that is no longer than the number of characters specified by the LENGTH setting SYSTEM amp USER Prints the information described under the SYSTEM setting and then prints a user defined character string as the title When the TITLE ANNOTATION setting is SYSTEM amp USER the print interval and the number of char acters printed are respectively determined by the PRINT INTERVAL and LENGTH settings 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS CH ANNOTATION Prints a commentary character string for each channel Available Settings Off Disables the CH PRINT function AMP Prints the currently selected RANGE INPUT FILTER and SPAN settings for each channel USER Prints a user defined character string for each channel When this setting is selected a submenu appears for inputting a channel specific comment so input a character string that is no longer than the LENGTH setting AMP amp USER Prints the information described under the AMP setting and then prints a user defined
129. use Available Settings No of MEMORY channels setting EXPANSION Standard memory 256 kW CH Usable channels memory per channel Channel 1 to 8 256 kWords Add on memory 512 kW CH Usable channels memory per channel Channel 1 to 8 512 kWords Channel 1 to 4 512 kWords Channel 1 to 4 1024 kWords Channel 1 amp 2 1024 kWords Channel 1 amp 2 2048 kWords 1 CH only 2048 kWords 1 CH only 4096 kWords Channel 1 to 16 256 kWords Channel 1 to 16 512 kWords Channel 1 to 4 and 9 to 12 512 kWords Channel 1 to 4 and 9 to 12 1024 kWords Channel 1 2 9 amp 10 1024 kWords Channel 1 2 9 amp 10 2048 kWords Channel 1 amp 9 2048 kWords Channel 1 amp 9 4096 kWords CAPTURE TIME This parameter which is only displayed when the CAPTURE DESTINATION setting is MEMORY indicates the time required for capturing data in the recorder s internal memory The total time equals the SAMPLING INTERVAL setting multiplied by the BLOCK SIZE and MEMORY EXPANSION settings Example SAMPLING INTERVAL 4 us BLOCK SIZE 2 KW x 128 MEMORY EXPANSION x 1 CAPTURE TIME 2 kW x 4 us 8 ms 4 15 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS MEMORY CHAIN This parameter which can only be set when the CAPTURE DESTINATION setting is MEMORY selects the method for capturing data in partitioned memory blocks Available Settings Off Repeatealy captures data to th
130. value at the waveform cursor position X axis value at the waveform cursor position Y axis direction X axis direction Display Waveform cursor B Operation Jog shuttle dial Y axis value at the waveform cursor position X axis value at the waveform cursor position Y axis direction X axis direction Y axis direction X axis direction Display Waveform cursors A B Operation Jog shuttle dial The Y axis AV value between both cursors The X axis AV value between both cursors The Y axis value between both cursors The X axis value between both cursors Scrolling 20 3 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS 20 3 The Display Position of Cursor Information The display position of cursor related numeric data such as the waveform cursor position waveform cursor point where the waveform cursor intersects with the waveform data results of statistical calculation and so on varies with the Display Mode setting in the Record Settings window 20 3 1 When the Display Mode Setting is Y T SEEKER gine aae REC ED E aa RECORDER i i i i i i i i i i 200mm S 07 MAY 99 amp 15 32 30 O xI xI O I 1 Display area for y axis values O O l I xI lt lt lt lt lt c c lt I 3 3 C 3 3 0 3 3 C1 3 3 C1 3 3 01 3 X 01 3 3
131. zoom File name Created automatically or user specifiable up to 8 characters Contents displayed Factory Installed unit File name memory capacity used date and time amount of remaining memory capacity APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS A 3 Trigger Functions Item WR1000 8 WR1000 16 Time Gate Off Relative Time Absolute Time Function Record Memory save to disk Action Single Repeat Start Condition Source Off Start triggered by pressing the START key Internal Start triggered by a combination of measured signals Manual Start triggered by pressing the TRIGGER key External Start triggered by a TRIGGER IN signal via the REMOTE connector Stop Condition Source Off Stop triggered by pressing the STOP key Internal Stop triggered by a combination of measured signals Manual Stop triggered by pressing the TRIGGER key External Stop triggered by a TRIGGER IN signal via the REMOTE connector Time Stops measurement at the specified time Combination Level OR Level AND Edge OR Edge AND Judgement Mode Edge Rise time T Fall Time J Level H High L Low Window In Out Off 100 to 100 of the current Range setting in 1 steps When the Type setting is Normal Combination Count setting 1 to 255 times Filt setting 1 to 255 x Sampling Interval setting when the Function setting is Memory When the Type setting is Slope dT Slope dT Slope
132. 0 1 0000 Dec pt Unit V V Select Unit Length Choose Span Do not lin EUN Pressure Enter Area Flow Volume Velocity Acc Freq Mass Energy Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit 1 Off 500 0 500 0 mV 500 0 500 0 mV JM 2 Off Engineering Unit Setting Meas Value EU Value Upper 41 0000 1 0000 Lower 1 0000 1 0000 Unit V V Select Unit Length Enter select Exe Setting Method 4 point s tting Dec pt Dec pt Choose Span not link cm km 17 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the left setting in the SELECT UNIT row then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 18 Use the arrow keys to select the desired cat egory then press the ENTER key to register your setting 19 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to CHOOSE on the right then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 20 Use the arrow keys to select a unit then press the ENTER key to register your setting 11 5 11 USING THE SCALING FUNCTIONS Creating a User Defined UNIT Setting Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 17 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the UNIT setting on the right then press the EN TER key to display a window for creating a user 1 Off 500 0 4500 0 mV defined UNIT setting 500 0 4500 0 NES V 18 Use the numeric keypad or jog shuttle dial to off input the desire
133. 0 Filtering the TOOT duced te eap Lena seed deant 13 18 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 1 4 serene 14 1 14 1 Various Settings Related to Display and Recording in RECORDER Mode Display Mode Setting Y T 14 2 14 1 1 Changing the Waveform Display Mode of Signal Input to 14 2 14 1 2 Changing the Output Destination of Signal Input 14 2 14 1 3 Outputting Captured Data onto Chart Paper 14 2 14 1 4 Selecting a Predetermined Chart Speed Setting 14 3 14 1 5 Specifying a User Defined Chart Speed Setting 14 3 14 1 6 Printing Channel ID Nos on Waveforms 2 eene 14 4 14 1 7 Printing Timing Markers or Event Markers eeee n 14 5 14 1 8 Printing a Scale on Chart 14 6 14 1 9 Printing a List of Current Settings eene 14 6 14 1 10 Changing the Record Format and Zone Settings 14 7 14 1 11 Changing the Grid nennen nennen 14 8 14 1 12 Enabling the Envelope neinna 14 9 14 1 13 Pr
134. 00 kgf cm SSD LOU 69 NOI Logic Disable Threshold V 7 2 Selecting the Input Coupling MEAS Type To set the input coupling status for a single channel set the MEAS parameter as described below The MEAS parameter can also be set using the MEAS key on the recorder s amp control panel Setting Procedure AMP Settings 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the MEAS column then press the ENTER key to dis CH AMP Input Range play its pull down menu 1 V DC 500mV 2 Use the arrow keys to select the desired status 2 V 1V then press the ENTER key to register your set 3 V ting NOTE 0 For more information about the MEAS param eter see Subsection 4 2 2 The AMP SET TINGS Window 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS 7 3 Setting the Measurement RANGE To set the measurement range for a single channel set the RANGE parameter as described below The RANGE parameter can also be set using the RANGE keys on the recorder s amp control panel Setting Procedure AMP Settings Input 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the RANGE column then press the ENTER key to dis CH Input Range Filter play its pull down menu 1 V DC 2 Usethe arrow keys to select the desired measure 2 V DC ment range then press the ENTER key to register 3 V GND 100mV your setting 200mV 1V 2V 5V 10V NOTE For more information about the RANGE param eter see Subsection
135. 0V Temperature TC K TC J TC T TC R TC E TC B The setting selected by the RANGE keys becomes the RANGE setting in the Input menu s AMP SETTINGS window For more information about the automatic selection of the voltage range see the description of the RANGE function on page 4 5 4 POSITION keys Specify the zero point position Each time you press a POSITION key the zero point position changes When you hold down a POSITION key the POSITION value changes continuously until the key is released The selected position is displayed on the screen s Monitor window e NOTE Jr The setting selected by this key becomes the LOWER SPAN UPPER settings in the Input menu s AMP SETTINGS window 5 FILT key Selects the filter mode Each time you press the FILT key the filter mode changes The selected FILTER mode is displayed on the screen s Monitor window FILTER setting LINE 1 5Hz Low pass 5 10 30 50 500Hz 5kHz NOTE 75 The setting selected by this key becomes the FILTER setting in the Input menu s AMP SETTINGS window For more information about the LINE filter and lowpass filter see the description of the FILTER function on page 4 5 6 AUTO BAL key Cannot be used with the V or M type amp 7 VERNI key Selects the ON OFF status of the Vernier function Each time you press the VERNI key the VERNIER mode switches between ON and OFF The selected status is displayed on the screen s
136. 10s 1min 10min 1h 10h SCALE PRINT This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T prints a scale for the recorded waveforms after recording is completed Available Settings Off Disables the Scale Printing function On Enables the Scale Printing function When On is selected a submenu ap pears for selecting the Format setting NOTE W When the Function setting in the Record Settings window is Memory Scale Printing can only be per formed if the Output Mode setting is All Data or One Frame In such case Scale Printing is performed prior to printing the measured data 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS FORMAT Selects the format for Scale Printing Available Settings ALL Prints one scale for all channels SEPARATE Prints a separate scale for each channel Sample printout for ALL Sample printout for SEPARATE T 500 0 a 7 485000 m 1 00 T 250 M 5 00 i280 m M M 4 5 00 q 4 2 i 1v 2 1 005 4 0H1 4 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 10V 3 3 4 4 500 0 mV 4 1 00 4 2 50 4 _ 5 00 E L 500 0 1 00 L 2 50 L 5 00 LIST PRINT Prints a list of the recorder s currently selected settings after recording is completed Available Settings Off Disables the List Printing function On Enables the List Printing function The figure below shows an example of the RECORD SETTINGS window in LOGGING mode
137. 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 19 1 2 Numeric Example Inputting SPAN Values In the following example the numeric keypad is used to change the Lower limit and Upper limit SPAN values for Channel 1 from 0 5000 to 0 5000 to the new values of 1 0000 to 1 0000 This example also assumes that the following step has already been completed Press the INPUT key to open the AMP Settings window Sample Setting Procedure Part 1 AMP Settings _ _nputt2 1 Atthe AMP Settings window use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Lower SPAN Upper position then press the ENTER key to display CH Scaling Lower SPAN Upper Unit the Span Setting submenu 1 Off ERY v e 2 OtflUpper BERE 0 5000 NOTE 7 di id When you begin numeric input from the nu meric keypad after selecting the Lower SPAN Upper function but without opening the Span Setting submenu that submenu auto matically opens as soon as you enter the first character Part 2 AMP Settings Input 2 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the 5 Upper position then press the ENTER key to open its pull down menu CH Scaling Lower SPAN Upper Unit 1 Of IETTEEEEOETTUNESY v 2 Off Upper 1008 0 5000 3 Set Value Limits 1 1000 1 1000 Press Enter to register NOTE 7 When you begin numeric input from the numeric keypad after selecting the UPPER function bu
138. 230 540 or 640 MBytes automatically recognized A 6 3 Hard Disk Factory Installed Unit Disk capacity 9 1 GBytes APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS A 7 Interface Units The RS 232C or GP IB interface can be used to perform all of the recorder s settings all of its control opera tions and data transfer between the WR1000 and a personal computer A 7 1 RS 232C Interface Specification Transfer method Full duplex start stop synchronization Transfer speed 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 115200 or 230400 bps Length of DATA byte 7 or 8 bits Parity modes None Odd or Even No of Stop bits 1 or 2 bits Software handshaking Control by X On and X Off signals Hardware handshaking RS signal always ON mode Receive buffer capacity 1 024 bytes A 7 2 GB IB Interface Specification Standard Compliant with the IEEE 488 1978 standard Specifications SH1 AH1 T6 T8 L4 SRO SR1 RLO RL1 PPO DCO DC1 DTO CO Usable code set ASCII Address setting 0 to 30 A 7 3 SCSI Interface Unit Factory Installed Unit The SCSI interface unit cannot be installed if the GP IB interface unit is already installed Specifications Standard Conforms to the SCSI 3 standard Compatible devices MO disk drive Zip drive or hard disk drive Functions Format File Directory Load Save of settings Load Save of data captured in the recorder s internal memory Loa
139. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CANCEL key 11 CLOSE key INPUT key MEMORY key TRIGGER key RECORD key JUDGE key SYSTEM key EXECUTE key ENTER key Arrow keys 11 CLOSE key 7 EXECUTE key 10 CANCEL key 8 ENTER key 9 Arrow keys Press this key once to open the AMP SETTINGS window Press it once more to open the ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS window Thereafter pressing this key alternately opens the AMP SETTINGS or ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS menu Press this key once to open the MEMORY SETTINGS window Consecutively press it to successively open the DATA REPLAY SETTINGS CALCULA TION SETTINGS and READOUT SETTINGS windows Thereafter pressing this key repeatedly opens one of these four windows Press this key to open the TRIGGER SETTINGS window Depending on the channel configuration of your recorder you may need to press this key again to display the menu s second page Press this key once to open the RECORD SETTINGS window Consecutively press it to successively open the FORMAT SETTINGS and ANNOTA TION SETTINGS windows Thereafter pressing this key repeatedly opens one of these three windows Press this key once to open the JUDGEMENT SETTINGS DIRECT window Press it again to open the JUDGEMENT SETTINGS MEMORY window Press this key once to open the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu Consecutively press it to successively open the OPTION SETTINGS CUSTOMIZE SETTI
140. 4 2 2 The AMP SET TINGS Window 7 4 Selecting the FILTER Mode To set the filter mode for a single channel set the FILTER parameter as described below The FILTER param eter can also be set using the FILT key on the recorder s amp control panel Setting Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the FIL LAMP Setings nut TER column then press the ENTER key to display CH AMP Input Range Filter its pull down menu 1 V DC 20mV 2 Use the arrow keys to select the desired status 2 V DC 1V then press the ENTER key to register your set V GND 2V ting NOTE For more information about the FILTER param eter see Subsection 4 2 2 The AMP SET TINGS Window 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS 7 5 Setting the Measurement SPAN To set the measurement span for a single channel set the LOWER SPAN and UPPER SPAN parameters as described below The SPAN parameters can also be set using the POSITION keys on the recorder s amp control panel NOTE 0 Use of the amp control panel s POSITION keys allows you to change only the zero point position while leaving the span between the Upper and Lower Span settings intact On the other hand use of the amp control panel s VERNI key allows you to widen or reduce the span between the Upper and Lower Span settings while leaving the zero point position intact The settings at such time will appear in the Monitor window on the right of the sc
141. 4ch x 4 or 2ch x 8 Time axis fixed scale x 10 to x 1 10 and screen width Time axis free scale Data specified by cursors Voltage axis Data specified by cursors Cursor function Cursor readout scroll and zoom x c 2 c Q o o E gt o E x 2 G tc Hard disk 3 5 HDD Stored data Setting conditions Measured data Capture start specification Synchronized with the start of waveform recording on off specifiable after a trigger Sampling speeds 20 40 50 80 100 200 400 500 800 us 1 2 4 5 8 10 20 40 50 80 100 200 400 500 800 ms 1 2 4 5 EXT sampling clock Sampling speeds differ according to the type of amps installed and the number of channels Logic amp from 20 us 8ch model from 50 us 16ch model V amp from 20 us 8ch model from 50 us 16ch model M amp from 20 us 8ch model from 50 us 16ch model Data capacity file max 2G bytes 1G word Total data capacity max 2G bytes x 4 1G word x 4 File data search Time Data search from a specified time Level Data search above or below a specified level Event Data search with each event data File data analysis Waveform scaling Time axis Fixed x 10 to x 1 10 Screen Width Time axis Data specified by cursors Voltage axis Data specified by cursors Cursor function Cursor readout scroll and
142. 68 1 kit B 2 Add on Units Designation 3 5 MO disk drive 640 MBytes For cleaning thermal print head Remarks Factory Installed Internal hard disk drive 8 GBytes Factory Installed 512 kW memory option for 8 CH and 16 CH models Factory Installed GP IB interface unit SCSI interface unit Factory Installed 12 VDC adapter Factory Installed 24 VDC adapter Factory Installed Long length Z fold unit Use special paper Internal Z fold unit Use special paper Writing table B 3 Other Accessories 8 input cables B 331 Remarks 2 pin banana plug cables bare tips 16 input cables B 335 2 pin banana plug cables bare tips AC power cord RSC 110 3 pin plugs with grounding conductor DC power cord RIC 140 2 m cord with round 10 pin connectors Clamp adapter 1200 A CM 102 Digital clamp meter CM 111 Probe for logic amp RIC 07 Alligator clip cable RIC 08 IC clip cable RIC 09 Probe set RIC 07 to RIC 09 RIC 10 Floating voltage input probe CM 105 Voltage conversion probe CM 106 Temperature probe for clamp meter RIC 110 Line separator CM 108 REMOTE connector RCN 114 16 pin connector jack Safety adapter SMA 102 Converts a high voltage BNC connector to a banana plug connector APPENDIX C MAINTAINING T
143. 9 1 3 Alphabetic Example Inputting a Title Character String In the following example the numeric keypad is used to input CH1 Volt as the Title setting This example also assumes that the following steps have already been completed Press the RECORD key to open the Annotation Settings window Set the Title Annotation setting to User Sample Setting Procedure Part 1 Annotation Settings Record 3 3 1 Atthe Annotation Settings window use the ar row keys to move the cursor to the Title Anno tation input area then press the ENTER key to Title Annotation User display its submenu TANK OUTLET TEMPERATURE DATI Title Strings OUTLET TEMPERATURE Enter register Part 2 At the numeric keypad input CH1 Volt by per Title Annotation User forming the steps below Press the SEL key to light the ALPHA lamp and enable alphabetic input To input CH press the key three times for C and then press the 3 key twice for H Press the SEL key to light the NUM lamp and enable numeric input To input 1 press the key Press the SEL key to light the ALPHA lamp and enable alphabetic input To input a space character followed by the Volt characters consecutively press the following sequence of keys SPACE key once space key three times V six times gt Gx six times L gt four times T Title Strings
144. 9 Changing the Display Language With this recorder you can choose from English US English UK or Japanese as the language displayed on the screen The default display language is set either to Japanese when this recorder is shipped within Japan or to English US when it is shipped overseas To change the display language see the instructions in Section 18 9 Changing the Displayed Language 3 10 Momentary Interruption of the AC Power Supply In the event that the AC power supply to this recorder is momentarily interrupted while the recorder is being used at or near its maximum power consumption the power supply to the recorder may be cut off The recorder s power consumption increases in direct proportion to an increase in the solid fill black area of recording and or the chart speed If the recorder s power supply is frequently cut off due to a momentary power interruption reduce the solid fill area of recording by such means as changing the Record Format setting lowering the print density and so on 3 11 Protecting the Thermal Printhead This recorder is provided with a circuit for protecting the thermal printhead When the solid fill area of record ing is large this circuit protects the thermal printhead by lowering the print density so that current above a stipulated level will not flow to the thermal printhead As soon as the solid fill area of recording is decreased the print density automatically resumes its usua
145. CORD key to open the Format Set Fomat Settings Record 2 2 tings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Plot position of the target XY pair then press the EN XY Plot X Axis Y AXIS TER key to display its pull down menu 1 On CH2 3 Use the arrow keys to select On or Off then press 2 off CH1 CH1 the ENTER key to register your setting 3 18 CH3 CH2 14 17 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 2 7 Changing the Color of Waveform Display To change the color of the waveform display for a specific channel perform the steps below The Color parameter can only be set when the measurement mode is RECORDER and the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is X Y For more information about the Color parameter see Subsection 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Settings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Color position for the target channel then press olor XIS XIS he ENTER lay th E On CHi CH2 the ey to display the Color Selection Color Red Current Blue 30 Set L 1 Green 20 CJ ENTER select EXEC register Fomat Settings Record 2 2 window lt lt To select a standard color gt gt 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired color from the samples displayed at the
146. Capture Block setting File Name setting Replay CH setting MEM OUT key 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME Part 3 Settings at the Trigger Settings window 6 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Settings window 7 Set the Function parameter to Memory 8 Set the Source parameter for the Start Condition and Stop Condition 9 Set the Type parameter 10 If you set the Source parameter to Internal in Step 8 also set the trigger conditions When the Type setting is Normal Set the Combination parameter Set the Mode and Lower Level Upper parameters When the Type setting is Slope Set the CH parameter Set the Lower dV Level Upper parameters Set the dT parameter Set the Direction parameter Set the Mode parameter NOTE jr Also set other trigger related parameters as required For information about trigger related functions see Subsec tion 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window For details on how to set trigger related parameters see Chapter 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Part 4 Settings at the Record Settings window 11 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Settings window 12 Set the Logging Interval parameter 13 Set the Destination parameter to Printer NOTE jr Also set other recording related parameters as required For information about the recording related functions see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window For details on how
147. DIRECT recording the recorder concurrently saves the measured data in the recorder s internal memory to a disk in an internal memory drive a hard disk drive or MO drive or to a disk in an external memory device connected via the SCSI interface unit Your recorder is capable of performing DIRECT SAVE operations in the mode described below e DIRECT Y T SAVE Mode e DIRECT X Y SAVE Mode e DIRECT LOGGING SAVE Mode While recording temporal changes in the signal input as waveforms on chart paper the recorder also saves the measured data at the selected Sampling Interval setting to its internal memory to a disk in an internal memory drive a hard disk drive or MO drive or to a disk in an external memory device connected via the SCSI interface unit For the setting procedure see Section 9 2 Enabling DIRECT Y T SAVE Operations While recording the correlation between designated channels as waveforms on chart paper the recorder also save the data at the selected Sampling Interval setting to its internal memory or a hard disk only if a hard disk unit is installed For the setting procedure see Section 9 3 Enabling DIRECT X Y SAVE Operations While recording temporal changes in the signal input as digital values on chart paper the recorder also saves the measured data at the selected Sampling Interval setting to its internal memory or a disk in an internal hard disk drive an
148. Data under Action then press the EX E ECUTE key to output all of the waveform data be Expansion Compression Y ing replayed onto chart paper Statistical Calculation V NOTE Arithmetical Calculation gt To output only a segment of the data perform Printer Output Between Cursors gt Printer Output All Data 2 the steps described in Section 20 7 Printing Save to Disk Between Cursors w Action Cursor Defined Range of Data Setting Procedure When the Display Mode Setting is X Y 1 Press the EXECUTE key to display the Execute menu CON 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Printer Statistical Calculation gt Output All Data under Action then press the EX Printer Output All Data gt ECUTE key to output all of the waveform data be ing replayed onto chart paper NOTE 0 During X Y display mode it is not possible to out put only a segment of the replayed data onto chart paper 12 19 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 5 Expanding or Compressing the Display of Data Being Replayed This section describes how to expand or compress the display of waveform data being replayed The setting procedure below assumes that the capture of waveform data has already been completed For more information about the Expansion Compression Method function see Section 4 8 The Execute Menu NOTE jr This operation can only be set during Replay mode after r
149. Displays and records changes the signal input with reference to the time axis X Y Displays and records the correlation between channels that have been desig nated as the X or Y axis FUNCTION Selects the operation to be performed upon activation of a trigger Available Settings DIRECT Records the measured data on chart paper after the trigger is activated MEMORY Saves the measured data to a disk either in an internal memory device a hard disk drive or MO drive or in an external memory device connected to the SCSI interface unit after the trigger condition is satisfied Only if the internal hard disk drive or SCSI interface unit is installed each is a factory installed option that is ordered at the time of the recorder s purchase NOTE W When the FUNCTION setting is MEMORY it is synchronized with the FUNCTION setting in the TRIG GER SETTINGS window 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS OUTPUT MODE This parameter selects whether or not to reload data after it has been measured and saved to memory It can only be set when the Display Mode setting is Y T and the Function setting is Memory Available Settings All Data Replays all of the captured data One Frame Replays only one frame of the captured data No Output Simply saves the measured data without replaying it This One Frame function can be used most effectively when used in combination with the Output Ratio function of the MEMORY key
150. EC 4 e 1 NIE a WZ ol 336 214 4 e Oc Oc Oe 9200 HO o OH We X esi iin Mo Y F M 76 5 0 0 A v 0 0 140 APPENDIX E EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
151. ECHO BACK EXECUTE SETTINGS TESTS SYSTEM INFORMATION FIRMWARE HARDWARE AMP 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 7 2 The SYSTEM SETTINGS Window This subsection describes the SYSTEM SETTINGS window an example of which is shown below System Settings System 1 4 Key Lock Off Settings Save Current Settings v Load Settings From Disk v Return To Default Settings W Disk Operation File List v File Copy Ww File Rename V File Delete V Disk Initialize V Drive List V KEY LOCK Selects the locking mode for the keys on the recorder s front panel Available Settings Off Disables the KEY LOCK function AMP Locks the INPUT key and all keys on the amp control panels SYSTEM Locks alle Conditions keys for accessing the windows except the INPUT and SYSTEM keys and all of the other panel keys SYSTEM amp AMP Locks all keys except the SYSTEM key In this case only the SYSTEM SETTINGS window and KEY LOCK parameter can be displayed SETTINGS 5 Saves or loads settings or returns them to their factory default settings SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS Saves the currently selected settings When this setting is selected a submenu appears for selecting the destination memory device and file name LOAD SETTINGS FROM DISK Loads a set of settings from disk When this setting is selected a submenu appears for specifying the source pa
152. ECORDING IN REALTIME Part 4 Settings at the Format Settings window 9 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Settings window 10 Set the Format parameter 11 Set the Zone and CH parameters NOTE 7 Also perform other format related settings as required For information about format related functions see Subsec tion 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window For details on how to set format related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS Part 5 Start measurement 12 Press the CLOSE key to close the currently opened window 13 Press the PRINTER key if you wish to record onto chart pa per 14 Press the START key 15 Press the TRIGGER key if the Start Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual Part 6 Stop measurement 16 Press the TRIGGER key if the Stop Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual 17 Press the STOP key 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME CHAPTER 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME This chapter describes how to set up your recorder to simultaneously record and save data in realtime ea 9 1 Overview of DIRECT SAVE Operations 9 2 Enabling DIRECT Y T SAVE Operations 9 3 Enabling DIRECT X Y SAVE Operations 9 4 Enabling DIRECT LOGGING SAVE Operations 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME 9 1 Overview of DIRECT SAVE Operations During a DIRECT SAVE operation while recording changes in the signal input as during
153. ENT 2 key to display cursors and B mode eov Press the SELECT key to select cursor A then m turn the jog shuttle dial to move cursor A to the Cc beginning position of the range of data to be ES printed Press the SELECT key again to select cursor B then turn the jog shuttle dial to move cursor woe PRINTER B to the end position of the range of data to be os CO printed OAB SELECT COPY LIST FEED Press the EXECUTE key to open the EXECUTE menu Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Action Printer Output Between Cursors position Expansion Compression v under Action then press the ENTER key to Statical Calculation VW AvfibunaticalCalcalaton d print out the cursor defined range of waveform Printer Output Between Cursors 4 data Printer Output All Data gt Save to Disk Between Cursors VW 20 8 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS 20 8 Saving a Cursor Defined Range of Data to Disk This section explains how to use cursors A and B to specify a range of the waveform data being replayed on the screen in order to save the cursor defined range of data to a disk either in an internal memory device a hard disk drive floppy disk drive or MO drive or an external memory device connected via the SCSI interface unit This function can only be used when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T For more inf
154. ENTER key to display its pull down menu CH Color Zone Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Start position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to Set Value M gether with the jog shuttle dial to specify the Limits 0 200 desired starting point then press the ENTER key to register your Start setting Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to set the Width pa rameter for the zone width Format Settings Record 2 3 NOTE 7 For more information on inputting numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHA NUMERIC CHARACTERS 14 1 11 Changing the Grid Setting The Grid function determines the grid used for Y T waveform display and recording For more information about the Grid parameter see Subsection 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Set tings window Record Format 25mm x 8 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Grid Grid position then press the ENTER key to display its Envelope pull down menu 10mm Coarse 3 Usethe arrow keys to select the desired grid then 5mm Fine press the ENTER key to register your setting Format Settings Record 2 3 5mm Coarse None 14 8 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 1 12 Enabling the Envelope Function To enable Envelope mode perform the steps below For more information about the Envelope parameter see Subsection 4 5 3 The For
155. ETTINGS window CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the 1 500 0 4500 0 mV EU position then press the ENTER key to dis 500 0 5000 mV play its pull down menu 2 f on 70000 400 p V Use the arrow keys to select On then press 0 5000 0 5000 v v the ENTER key to register your setting Part 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the ate aes LOWER EU UPPER position then press the CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit ENTER key to open the ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS submenu Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the SETTING METHOD position then press the Setting Method ENTER key to display its pull down menu Meas Value 4 point setting Use the arrow keys to select Offset setting then Upper 1 0000 press the ENTER key to register your setting 13 Off 5000 45000 mV 500 0 45000 v Off Engineering Unit Setting Lower 1 0000 Unit V gt Select Unit Length Choose NOTE b Span not link For more information about the SETTING Enter Sela eo register METHOD parameter see Subsection 4 2 3 The ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS Win 11 7 11 USING THE SCALING FUNCTIONS Part 3 Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the MEAS VALUE position for measured values CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit then press the ENTER key to display the cu
156. Grid Compensation Mode position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired grid then press the ENTER key to register your setting Format Settings Record 2 2 14 2 5 Selecting the Compensation Mode To select the Compensation mode for the display and recording of waveforms perform the steps below The Compensation Mode parameter can only be set when the measurement mode is RECORDER and the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is X Y For more information about the Compensation Mode parameter see Subsection 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Set tings window Grid 2 Usethe arrow keys to move the cursor to the Com Compensasion Mode pensation Mode position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired mode then press the ENTER key to register your setting Fomat Settings Record 2 2 14 2 6 Selecting the Plot On Off Status for Each XY Number To select the On Off status of output waveform display and or recording for each XY pair perform the steps below The Plot parameter can only be set when the measurement mode is RECORDER and the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is X Y For more information about the Plot parameter see Subsection 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the RE
157. HE RECORDER MAINTAINING THE RECORDER 1 This appendix contains instructions on maintaining the recorder E C 1 Cleaning the Thermal Printhead C 2 If an MO Disk Gets Jammed in its Drive APPENDIX C MAINTAINING THE RECORDER C 1 Cleaning the Thermal Printhead This recorder employs a thermal printhead In the course of recording and printing therefore the thermal printhead becomes soiled which reduces the print quality To ensure consistent print quality periodically clean the thermal printhead using the separately available head cleaning Kit NOTE jr To clean the thermal printhead be sure to use the separately available head cleaning kit f you run out of the dedicated cleaning fluid you can use commercially available ethyl alcohol as a substitute For optimum results however use Graphtec designated cleaning fluid AN CAUTION Avoid subjecting the thermal printhead s drawing component and its periphery to impact by a hard object or to rubbing Cleaning Procedure 1 Open the printer cover 2 Lightly moisten a sheet of cleaning paper with the cleaning fluid 3 Applying slightly strong pressure wipe off the entire length of the thermal printhead s drawing component by methodi cally moving the cleaning paper back and forth at least three to four times A High Temperature Because the thermal printhead may become extremely hot immediately after recording accidentally touching the printhead
158. IGGER SETTINGS Window This subsection describes the TRIGGER SETTINGS window an example of which is shown below Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Time Gate Disable v Function Memory Action Repeat Start Condition Source Internal Type Normal Combination Level AND CH Mode Lower Level Upper i H 9 H 50 50 winout 100 100 Y winout 10 60 W H 4 H 4 H 8 H LOGIC On 30 40 50 60 HHHH LLLL HHHH LLLL Trigger Counter Filter 0 count Pre trigger 20 Stop Condition Source Internal Normal Combination Level OR Mode _ Lower Level Upper 4H FH 50 18 winout 100 100 Y Off Off Off Off 8 Off LOGIC Off 30 40 50 60 70 HLHL XXXX XXXX Trigger Counter Filter 0 count TIME Specifies the time gate time interval for awaiting trigger signal input by setting the begin ning and ending times for that wait interval NOTE p The Time Gate setting only affects the Start Condition and cannot be used for the Stop Condition The timing of the Time Gate function is based on the recorder s internal clock Available Settings DISABLE RELATIVE TIME Disables the Time Gate function Specifies the interval for awaiting trigger signal input as a relative time period which begins when the START key is pressed When this setting is selected a submenu for setting the time in
159. ING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 2 Various Settings Related to Display and Recording in RECORDER Mode Display Mode Setting X Y 14 2 1 Changing the Waveform Display Mode of Signal Input to X Y To change the waveform display mode of signal input to X Y perform the steps below The Display Mode parameter can only be set in RECORDER mode For more information about the Display Mode parameter see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Setting Procedure Record Settings Record 1 2 Display Mode Function Y T 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Set tings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Dis play Mode position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select X Y then press the ENTER key to register your setting 14 2 2 Changing the Output Destination of Signal Input To set the destination for recording input to chart paper or the recorder s internal memory perform the steps below This Function parameter can only be set in RECORDER mode For more information about this Function parameter see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Setting Procedure Record Settings Record 1 3 Display Mode Y T Function Direct Chart Speed V1 setting Memory 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Set tings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Func tion po
160. L Available Settings LEVEL OR The start of measurement is triggered when one channel satisfies the trigger condition Sample Trigger Condition p Measurement starts MODE LEVEL CH 4 CH 1 T H 20 5 CH2 40 rs 60 CH 3 T H 60 CH 2 CH4 T H 80 2 4 LAT TT N09 CHA L 7 7 Trigger activated LEVEL AND The start of measurement is triggered when all of the target channels satisfy the trigger condition Sample S s Measurement Trigger Condition starts MODE LEVEL CH 4 80 CH 1 20 CH2 T H 40 CHS joo CH3 60 CH 2 40 o CH 4 T H 8096 CH 1 20 s Trigger activated Trigger disabled D EDGE OR After all of the target channels have reached a level that does not sat isfy the trigger condition the start of measurement is triggered when any one of the target channels satisfies the trigger condition Sample Trigger Condition Measurement starts MODE LEVEL CH 4 80 CH 1 T H 2096 e CH 2 4096 CH 3 CH3 60 CH 2 40 H4 9 80 piii 20 Trigger activated M EDGE AND After all of the target channels have reached a level that does not sat isfy the trigger condition the start of measurement is triggered when all of the target channels satisfy the trigger condition Moreover once a channel meets the trigger cond
161. Monitor window The minimum and maximum values that can be set are the same as the SPAN values NOTE amp For more information about SPAN values see Section 4 2 The Input Menu 8 SEL key Selects the pre amp group for which you wish to perform settings Each time you press the SEL key the pre amp group changes A lamp on the left of the SEL key lights to indicates the currently selected pre amp group 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 2 1 3 The Numeric Keypad and CHART SPEED Section This subsection describes the numeric keypad and chart speed section on the main unit s front panel 1 SEL key 2 Alphanumeric keys 1 SEL key 2 Alphanumeric keys UR a os Gu UN CUN ma gt Gans Cru i E B gt mmis CHART SPEED CA AY SN SY AY DIO C m CA GEN CAN ve SY unr QN v2 d 5 UNIT key 3 CHART SPEED value keys 4 Variable CHART SPEED keys Selects the input mode for character input Each time the SEL key is pressed the input mode switches between numeric NUM and alphabetic ALPHA input A lamp on the left of the SEL key lights to indicate the currently selected input mode Depending on the key pressed these keys input the corresponding numeral character symbol or space character or perform an editing
162. NGS and TEST menus Thereafter pressing this key repeatedly opens one of these four menus Executes the currently selected operation such as a disk operation at the SYSTEM SETTINGS window accessed by the SYSTEM key Press this key to register your currently selected setting s Move the cursor within the window in the direction indicated by each key Closes the pull down menu or window that was opened to set a parameter It can also be pressed to close the currently opened window that was displayed using a Conditions panel key Closes the currently opened window 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 2 2 The Top Panel This section describes the main unit s top panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 e m I 1 TRACE CONTRAST dial 9 AC LINE inlet 2 RS 232C connector 8 AC POWER switch 3 REMOTE connector 7 GND 4 DC LINE connector 6 DC FUSE 5 DC POWER switch TRACE CONTRAST dial RS 232C connector REMOTE connector DC LINE connector DC POWER switch DC FUSE GND AC POWER switch AC LINE inlet 2 10 Adjusts the screen s contrast level Connects to the RS 232C interface cable s male connector Connects to one end of the REMOTE interface cable
163. NT key to exit Replay mode and then proceed to the desired window If the Replay Source is Disk do not attempt any disk opera tions while in Replay mode The disk may be damaged if you do so 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME 9 3 Enabling DIRECT X Y SAVE Operations To set up your recorder for DIRECT X Y SAVE operations perform the steps described in this section The procedure described only includes the steps directly related to enabling DIRECT X Y SAVE operations For other settings see the pertinent section in Chapter 11 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS through Chapter 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR NOTE amp Before proceeding to the following settings be sure to first complete the settings described in Chapter 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS Setting Procedure Measurement mode RECORDER Memory Settings window Capture Destination Setting 1 Memory 2 Disk Sampling interval sening Bock Size setting Memory Expansion seting Memo Chain soning Capture Blookseting Sampling ntowalseting Fie Name soting No of Channels seting Evert setting Logie setting Trigger Settings window Function Record 1 Source setting of Start Stop conditions 1 Off Manual External 2 Internal o Type setting 1 Normal 2 Slope 1 Combination setting Part 1 Select the measurement mode 1 Press the main control panel s MODE key to switch th
164. ORY key to open the Data Replay Data Replay Settings Memory 2 4 Settings window Replay the target data that has been captured in the recorder s internal memory For instructions Replay CH Selected CH CH Select V on replay see Subsection 12 1 4 Replaying Cap Output Ratio x1 tured Data 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Data Save position then press the ENTER key to dis Data Save Destinati ee play the Data Save Destination window Data 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Data Drive Type position then press the ENTER key to dis Available Text 455104 bytes play its pull down menu Folder 4 Use the arrow keys to select the desired data type File Name DEFAULT DAT Press Enter to select Exec to register then press the ENTER key to register your setting 5 Atthe same window use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Drive position specify the letter of the drive where the disk containing the target data is located then press the ENTER key to reg ister your setting Repeat this process to also specify the names of the folder and file containing the target data then press the EXECUTE key to register all three settings NOTE For details on how to specify the drive letter folder name and file name see Chapter 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS 6 Press the EXECUTE key to initiate the Save op eration If a large v
165. OTE 0 The actual new line code that can be selected is determined by the New Line Code setting By using different combinations of New Line codes you can specify a total of seven types of terminators EOI EOI CR LF EOI CR EOI LF CR LF CR and LF Timeout This parameter selects the time out interval for data transfer via the GP IB interface It can only be set after selecting Change Settings under GP IB Settings Available Settings Off 200ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 20s 4 7 4 The CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS Window This subsection describes the CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS window an example of which is shown below Customize Settings System 3 4 Language English US Long Length Chart Unit DO NOT USE RS 232C Echo Back Enable Execute Setting s gt 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS LANGUAGE Selects the recorder s display language Available Settings Japanese English US English UK NOTE W The only difference between English US and English UK is the way the date is displayed LONG LENGTH CHART UNIT Enables or disables use of the long length Z fold unit provided that the unit is installed Available Settings DO NOT USE Disables use of the long length Z fold unit USE Enables use of the long length Z fold unit RS 232C ECHO BACK Enables the transmission status of the RS 232C interface to be checked Available Settings Enable Enables check Disable Disables c
166. PUT key on the conditions panel 4 2 1 The Input Menu s Tree Structure Parameters accessed by the INPUT key Input windows AMP SETTINGS INPUT r RANGE FILTER r SCALE ON OFF LOWER SPAN UPPER UNIT LOGIC when the logic amp is installed THRESHOLD when the logic amp is installed SCALE SETTINGS EU ON OFF LOWER EU UPPER UNIT 4 2 2 The AMP SETTINGS Window This subsection describes the AMP SETTINGS window an example of which is shown below AMP Settings Input 1 2 CH Input Range Filter Misc DC 500mV Off DC 1V Line GND 2N 500Hz CAL 5V 10Hz DC Off DC 1V Line GND 2N 500Hz CAL 5V 10Hz EE SUE ae eine cae lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt CH Scaling Lower SPAN Upper Unit Off 250 0 250 0 mV v Off 0 500 40 500 V v Off 1 0000 41 0000 V v On 40 000 20 000 kgf cm Off 250 0 250 0 Off 0 500 40 500 Off 1 0000 41 0000 On 40 000 20 000 kgf cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 re 8 Logic Disable Threshold V 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS CE ones Indicates the channel number Displays the type of amplifier installed Displayed settings V V Voltage amp M M Multi input amp INPUT Selects the input coupling status The available settings vary with the type of amp installed Available Settings V amp Off AC DC GND CAL No s
167. R LEVEL UPPER L CH SELECTION p n is I OUTPUT RATIO L LOWER LEVEL UPPER DATA SAVE Winin L LOWER LEVEL UPPER WinOut L LOWER LEVEL UPPER 4 11 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 3 2 The MEMORY SETTINGS Window This subsection describes the MEMORY SETTINGS window an example of which is shown below CAPTURE DESTINATION Memory Settings Memory 1 4 Capture Destination Memory Sampling Interval 1ms 1kHz Program Block Disable Data Memory Settings Block Size 2kW x128 Memory Expansion x1 Capture Time 2 s Memory Chain Empty Block Stat Calc On Number Of Means 100 Capture Block 9 3 4 5 6 rj 8 9 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 34 35 36 37 46 47 28 49 54 56 57 58 59 68 69 78 93 102 103 104 105 106 22 123 124 125 126 Auto Save On File Name A DEFAULT GBD W iiaa Selects the destination for saving measured data Available Settings MEMORY Saves the measured data in the recorder s internal memory Disk SAMPLING INTERVAL Saves the measured data to an internal hard disk or an external memory device 1 Only if the hard disk drive is installed the hard disk drive is a factory installed unit that is ordered at the time of the recorder s purchase Only if the SCSI interface unit is installed a
168. R key to open the ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS submenu Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Lower EU Upper Unit 500 0 5000 500 0 5000 mV mV JM SETTING METHOD position then press the Engineering Unit Setting ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select 4 point setting then press the ENTER key to register your set ting Setting Method Meas Value 1 0000 Lower 1 0000 Unit V Select Unit Span Do not link 4 point setting 4 point setting Upper Offset setting V Length Choose NOTE Enter select Exec register For more information about the SETTING METHOD parameter see Subsection 4 2 3 The ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS Win Part 3 Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit 1 2 Off Off 500 0 45000 mV 500 0 4500 0 mV JM Setting Method 4 point s tting Meas Value EU Value Dec pt Upper ESO 41 0000 Set Value 40000 Limits 2 0000 2 0000 Press ENTER to register 11 USING THE SCALING FUNCTIONS Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the UPPER limit setting for measured values then press the ENTER key to display the current UPPER limit setting for measured values Use the numeric keypad or jog shuttle dial to input the UPPER limit setting for measured values then press the ENTER key to register y
169. RING DATA IN A MEMORY DEVICE Part 6 Start measurement 18 Press the CLOSE key to close the currently opened window 19 Press the START key 20 Press the TRIGGER key if the Start Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual Part 7 Stop measurement 21 Press the TRIGGER key if the Stop Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual 22 Press the STOP key Part 8 Set the Replay Conditions for the Captured Data 23 Press the MEMORY key to open the Data Replay Settings win dow 24 Set the Replay Source parameter 25 Set the Capture Block or File Name parameter When the Replay Source setting is Memory Set the Capture Block parameter When the Replay Source setting is Disk Set the File Name parameter 26 Set the Replay CH parameter 27 Set the Output Ratio parameter Part 9 Replay the Captured Data 28 Press the main control panel s MEM OUT key NOTE To concurrently record the replay data onto chart paper press the EXECUTE key to open the EXECUTE menu and set a Printer Output operation For instructions see Section 12 6 Outputting Data Being Replayed onto Chart Paper During the replay of captured data the recorder s operating mode switches automatically to Replay mode In Replay mode you cannot change any of the recorder s settings To change a setting press the main control panel s MODE EVENT key to exit Replay mode and the
170. S Off Y T mode only On PRINT INTERVAL L FORMAT L LENGTH L LIST PRINT I FLYING ANNOTATION L X Y TITLE ANNOTATION F FUNCTION LIST PRINT SYSTEM USER SYSTEM amp USER CH ANNOTATION Off AMP USER L CH AMP amp USER L CH A VALUE 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS RECORD key Parameters accessed by the RECORD key in LOGGING mode RECORD SETTINGS m LOGGING INTERVAL DESTINATION LIST PRINT FORMAT SETTINGS I FORMAT CH L COLOR 4 5 2 The RECORD SETTINGS Window This subsection describes the RECORD SETTINGS window an example of which is shown below The parameters displayed in the RECORD SETTINGS window vary according to whether the measurement mode is RECORDER or LOGGING In RECORDER Mode When the Record Settings Window s Display Mode Setting is Y T Record Settings Record 1 3 Display Mode Y T Function Direct Chart Speed 20mm s V1 Setting 10 0mm s w V2 Setting 12 5mm s y CH ID Off Marker TIMING Interval 10s Scale Print On Format All Channels List Print Off 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS In RECORDER Mode When the Record Settings Window s Display Mode Setting is X Y Record Settings Record 1 2 Display Mode X Y Function Direct List Print DISPLAY MODE Sets the display and recording mode for data being measured Available Settings Y T
171. S Window The Trigger Menu 1 The Trigger Menu s Tree Structure 2 The TRIGGER SETTINGS Window 3 Possible Combinations of Source Settings The Record Menu 1 The Record Menu s Tree Structure 2 The RECORD SETTINGS Window 3 The FORMAT SETTINGS Window 4 The ANNOTATION SETTINGS Window The Judge Menu 1 The JUDGE Menu s Tree Structure 2 The Judgement Settings Direct Window 3 The Judgement Settings Memory Window The System Menu 1 The System Menu s Tree Structure 2 The SYSTEM SETTINGS Window 3 The OPTION SETTINGS Window 4 5 The CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS Window The TEST Window The EXECUTE Menu 1 Tree Structure of the EXECUTE Menu 2 The EXECUTE Menu Display 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 1 Structure of the Menus Key name INPUT key MEMORY key TRIGGER key setting is Y T Window 1 AMP SETTINGS MEMORY SETTINGS TRIGGER SETTINGS RECORD SETTINGS JUDGEMENT SETTINGS DIRECT SYSTEM SETTINGS EXECUTE MENU Window 2 ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS DATA REPLAY SETTINGS FORMAT SETTINGS JUDGEMENT SETTINGS MEMORY OPTION SETTINGS Window 3 Window 4 CALCULATION SETTINGS READOUT SETTINGS ANNOTATION SETTINGS CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS 1 Only available when the measurement mode is RECORDER and the Record Settings window s Plot Mode 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 2 The Input Menu This section describes the two Input windows accessed via the IN
172. Slope Set the CH parameter Set the Lower dV Level Upper parameters Set the dT parameter Direction setting Set the Mode parameter NOTE 7 Also set other trigger related parameters as required For information about trigger related functions see Subsec tion 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window For details on how to set trigger related parameters see Chapter 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Part 4 Settings at the Record Settings window 11 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Settings window 12 Set the Display Mode parameter to Y T 13 Set the Function parameter to Direct 14 Specify the Chart Speed setting NOTE Also set other recording related parameters as required For information about the recording related functions see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window For details on how to set recording related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS Part 5 Settings at the Format Settings window 15 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Settings window 16 Set the Record Format parameter 17 Assign the Channel Nos to Zones NOTE 7 Also perform other format related settings as required For information about format related functions see Subsec tion 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window For details on how to set format related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME
173. T 0 Sample 128ms Mode Slope gt dV dT Slope gt dV dT Slope lt dV dT 13 12 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Lower dV Level Upper position under Start Condition or Stop Condition then press the ENTER key to display its window Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to gether with the jog shuttle dial to specify the desired Upper and Lower levels then press the ENTER key to register your settings NOTE hy Make sure that the difference between the upper and lower limits is at least 596 For details on how to input numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANU MERIC CHARACTERS Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the dT position then press the ENTER key to dis play its window gether with the jog shuttle dial to specify the desired dT value then press the ENTER key to register your setting 11 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to NOTE hy For information about the dT parameter see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window For details on how to input numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANU MERIC CHARACTERS 12 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Mode position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 13 Use the arrow keys to select the desired mode then press the ENTER key to register your set ting NOTE For information about the Mode parameter see Subsection 4 4 2 The Tri
174. TE 0 Also perform other format related settings as required For information about format related functions see Subsec tion 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window KS YS YS DV 10 11 12 13 For details on how to set format related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS Part 5 Start measurement 14 Press the CLOSE key to close the currently opened window 15 Press the PRINTER key if you wish to record onto chart pa per 16 Press the START key 17 Press the TRIGGER key if the Start Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual Part 6 Stop measurement 18 Press the TRIGGER key if the Stop Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual 19 Press the STOP key 8 RECORDING IN REALTIME 8 4 Enabling DIRECT Logging To set up your recorder for DIRECT logging perform the steps described in this section The procedure described only includes the steps directly related to enabling DIRECT logging For other settings see the pertinent section in Chapter 11 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS through Chapter 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR NOTE h Before proceeding to the following settings be sure to first complete the settings described in Chapter 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS Setting Procedure 1 Press the main control panel s MODE key to switch the mea Trigger Settings window surement mode to LOGGING Par
175. TE key to open the Execute menu and set a Printer Output operation For instructions see Section 12 6 Outputting Data Being Replayed onto Chart Paper When captured data is replayed the operating mode auto matically switches to Replay mode In Replay mode the recorder s settings cannot be changed To change a set ting exit the Replay mode by pressing the main control panel s MODE key Never remove or exchange a disk during Replay Mode when the Replay Source setting is Disk or you may damage the disk s contents 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME 9 4 Enabling DIRECT LOGGING SAVE Operations To set up your recorder for DIRECT LOGGING SAVE operations perform the steps described in this section The procedure described only includes the steps directly related to enabling DIRECT LOGGING SAVE opera tions For other settings see the pertinent section in Chapter 11 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS through Chapter 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR NOTE jr Before proceeding to the following settings be sure to first complete the settings described in Chapter 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS Setting Procedure Measurement mode LOGGING Part 1 Select the measurement mode 1 Press the main control panel s MODE key to switch the mea Memory Settings window surement mode to LOGGING Capture Destinati tti f Memor ide Part 2 Settings at the Memory Settings window 2 Disk Bus 2 Press the MEMORY key to open the Mem
176. THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Part 4 PRINTER MODE C D C 2 COPY MONITOR LIST TRIGGER FEED MEM OUT Action Expansion Compression w Statistical Calculation gt Arithmetical Calculation 4 Printer Output Editing or Deleting a Formula 12 Press the main control panel s MODE EVENT key to select A B in order to display the wave form cursors then define the target area to be calculated Press the EXECUTE key to open the Execute menu use the arrow keys to select Arithmeti cal Calculation and then press the ENTER key to execute the calculation operation The data of the calculated result is saved in the final Block No of the recorder s internal memory To display the calculated result set the Data Replay Settings window s Capture Block set ting to the final Block No and then press the main control panel s MEM OUT key Part A 0e 0 00600000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Calculation Settings Memory 3 4 CH Function Fomula Settings 1 Off 2 Fomula 1 II CHO2 ENTER enter Exec register 12 24 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Formula Settings position then press the EN TER key to display the Formula Settings win dow Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the element you wish to delete a numeric value CH No function or symbol 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Part B
177. The Capture Destination setting is Disk The Replay Source setting at the Memory Settings window is Disk and The Event setting at the Memory Settings window is On to enable cap ture of event data this Event function is displayed only when the Replay Source setting is Disk Displays the previous event marker position before the current position This function however can only be used when event markers have been captured along with the measured data during data capture in the follow case The Capture Destination setting is Disk The Replay Source setting at the Memory Settings window is Disk and The Event setting at the Memory Settings window is On to enable cap ture of event data this Event function is displayed only when the Replay Source setting is Disk The input of event marker data is based on a logical OR operation between input via the REMOTE interface or input by the main control panel s MODE EVENT key Performs various operations for waveforms such as expansion compression printout and calculation Expansion Compression Expands or compresses the display of waveforms being re played Available Settings Between Cursors Expands or compresses the cursor defined segment of the wave form display to fit the screen s width Fixed Scale Expands or compresses the waveform by the ratio selected from the choices below Expansion Can be set to any integer from 1 to 10 Compression Can be s
178. This parameter which can only be set when the REPLAY SOURCE setting is Memory specifies the source drive folder and file name where the data to be replayed is stored You can select any file which has a file name extension of 4 19 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS DATA SAVE CONDITIONS Displays the conditions that were used to save the data being loaded The conditions appear as soon as the REPLAY BLOCK setting is specified The displayed data cannot be changed SAMPLING INTERVAL Displays the SAMPLING INTERVAL setting used to save the data being loaded The displayed data cannot be changed NO OF DATA Displays the NO OF DATA points used to save the data being loaded The displayed data cannot be changed MODE During data capture this displays the current settings of the Statistical Calcu lation Off On and Number of Means parameters REPLAY CH 2n Selects the source channel s for loading data Available Settings ALL CHs Loads the data of all channels SELECTED CH s Loads the data of only the specified channel If you select SE LECTED CH s also specify the target channel number at the CH parameter CH SELECTION This parameter which can only be set when the Replay CH setting is SE LECTED CH s specifies the target channel s for replay OUTPUT RATIO Selects the magnification ratio of the time axis for use in data replay Available Settings
179. Title Anno tation input area then press the ENTER key to Title Annotation User display its submenu TANK OUTLET TEMPERATURE DAT Title Strings BANK OUTLET TEMPERATURE Enter register Part 2 Title Annotation User Using the arrow keys and jog shuttle dial input CH1 VOLT by performing the steps below 2 Use the lt or key to move the cursor to the first character position Select C by either us ing the A and keys or turning the jog shuttle dial 3 Use the lt or gt key to move the cursor to the second character position Select H by either using the and keys or turning the jog shuttle dial 4 Use the lt or gt key to move the cursor to the third character position Select 1 by either us ing the and V keys or turning the jog shuttle dial 5 Use the lt or gt key to move the cursor to the fourth character position Select a space char acter by either using the and Y keys or turn ing the jog shuttle dial 6 Use the lt or gt key to move the cursor to the fifth character position Select V by either us ing the A and keys or turning the jog shuttle dial 7 Use the lt or gt key to move the cursor to the sixth character position Select O by either us ing the A and keys or turning the jog shuttle dial Title Strings Enter register 19 8 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 8 Use the lt or
180. Type setting is Slope Set the CH parameter Set the Lower dV Level Upper parameters Set the dT parameter Direction setting Set the Mode parameter NOTE 0 Also set other trigger related parameters as required For information about trigger related functions see Subsec tion 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window For details on how to set trigger related parameters see Chapter 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Part 4 Settings at the Record Settings window 11 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Settings window 12 Set the the Display Mode parameter to Y T 13 Set the Function parameter to Memory 14 Specify the Output Mode parameter NOTE 7 Also set other recording related parameters as required For information about the recording related functions see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window For details on how to set recording related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS Part 5 Settings at the Format Settings window 15 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Settings window 16 Set the Record Format parameter 17 Set the Zone parameter NOTE 0 Also perform other format related settings as required For information about format related functions see Subsec tion 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window For details on how to set format related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 10 4 10 CAPTU
181. UPPER TRIGGER COUNTER COUNT FILT When the Function setting is Memory PRETRIGGER When the Function setting is Memory LEVEL AND r Condition A TRIGGER COUNTER 6 COUNT FILT When the Function setting is Memory PRETRIGGER When the Function setting is Memory 7 I EDGE OR Condition A PRETRIGGER When the Function setting is Memory 7 EDGE AND Condition A SLOPE CH I_ LOWER dV LEVEL UPPER DIRECTION PRETRIGGER MANUAL EXTERNAL 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 1 SOURCE Selects the trigger type to be used for initiating measurement Available Settings OFF When the SOURCE setting is OFF no trigger is used Instead mea surement is initiated by pressing the START key Internal When the SOURCE setting is INTERNAL after the START key has been pressed measurement is initiated when the specified trigger condition is satisfied Manual When the Source setting is Manual press the TRIGGER key to satisfy the trigger condition and initiate measurement External When the Source setting is External signal input to the REMOTE connectors Ext Trigger terminal satisfies the trigger condition and ini tiates measurement 2 uiis This parameter which can only be set when the FUNCTION setti
182. USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR CHAPTER 22 USING THE REM OTE CONNECTOR This chapter provides instructions on how to use the RE MOTE connector e s 22 1 The REMOTE Connector s Functions and Pin Assignment 22 2 Assembling the REMOTE Connector 22 3 Using the REMOTE Functions 22 1 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR 22 1 The REMOTE Connector s Functions and Pin Assignment This section describes the REMOTE connector s functions and pin assignments Use of the REMOTE functions allows you to perform remote control of this recorder by inputting electrical signals from an external device As control signals use the CMOS type 0 V as Low level and 5 V as High level Connector Pin Nos Connector Pin Nos 5 c3 e3 ca caiga 6 Oaa c3 a e oe Pin 16 Pin 9 Side connected to the cable REMOTE Connector s Pin Assignment Pin no Signal name Function Remarks 1 START STOP Starts or stops measurement Level operation L level Starts measurement H level Stops measurement Pulse width 1 s or more Repeated cycle 1 s or more 2 START STOP Starts or stops measurement Edge operation Measurement is alternately started or stopped whenever this signal goes Low Pulse width 1 s or more Repeated cycle 1 s or more Input CMOS type EXT FEED Advances the chart paper 0 45 V Feed distance per pulse 0 03125 mm Maximum frequency 640 pulses s 20 mm s EXT TRIGGER Activates
183. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Action Expansion Compression position under Action Expansion Compression su then press the ENTER key to display its window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Expansion Compression Method then press Method 09185 the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select Between Cursors Fixed Scale then press the ENTER key to register your set Free Scale Press ENTER to EXEC to ting To expand or compress the cursor defined range of waveform data to fit the screen s width press the EXECUTE key For instructions on how to expand or compress the waveform display when the Expansion Compression Method setting is Fixed Scale or User Scale see Section 12 5 Expanding or Compressing the Display of Data Being Replayed 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS 20 7 Printing Data within a Cursor Defined Range This Cursor defined Print function lets you specify a portion of the memory data being displayed on the screen and then to print out the specified range of memory data This function can only be used when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T For more information about the Cursor defined Print function see Section 4 8 The EXECUTE Menu The procedure below assumes that data has already been captured in memory and displayed again Setting Procedure Part 1 C voen PRINTER 1 Press the main control panel s MODE EV
184. Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to gether with the jog shuttle dial to enter the de sired numeral then press the ENTER key to register your setting Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Press Enter to register NOTE W For details on how to input numerals see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 8 Tochange any other element of the Date or Time settings repeat Steps 6 and 7 9 When the desired Start Time setting is dis played press the EXECUTE key to register your setting 10 Repeat Steps 5 through 9 to also specify the End Time setting NOTE For information about the Absolute Time pa rameter see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window 13 14 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS 13 7 Starting Measurement Before After the Trigger Is Activated This section describes the procedure for setting the Pre Trigger function in order to initiate measurement before after the position where the trigger is activated For more information about the Pre Trigger parameter see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window Setting of the Pre Trigger parameter is restricted as follows The Function setting in the Trigger Settings window must be Memory and The Pre Trigger parameter can only be set for the Start Condition Setting Procedure 1 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Set tings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Pre Trigg
185. a ae 67 ON PREAMP GROUP CH1 CH8 CH9 CH 16 CH17 CH24 CH25 CH 32 6 AUTO BAL Key 7 VERNI key 1 Channel no Indicates the channel number s for which measurement conditions can be specified 2 MEAS key Selects the input coupling status Specifiable status settings vary with the type of amp installed as listed below Each time you press this key the input coupling status changes The selected mode is displayed on the screen s Monitor window A channel installed with a V amp Off AC DC GND CAL A channel installed with an M amp Off AC DC TEMP GND CAL The setting selected by this key becomes the MEAS setting in the Input menu s AMP SETTINGS window For more information about input coupling modes and the difference between AC coupling and DC coupling see the description of the INPUT function on page 4 4 3 RANGE keys Selectthe measurement range Specifiable ranges vary with the type of amp installed as listed below Each time you press a RANGE key the measurement range changes The selected range is displayed on the screen s Monitor window 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS A channel installed with a V amp 50mV 100mV 200mV 500mV 1V 2V 5V 10V 20V 50V 100V 200V 500V A channel installed with an M amp Voltage 20mV 50mV 100mV 200mV 500mvV 1V 2V 5V 10V 20V 50V 100V 200V 50
186. ad or the arrow keys to ee L gether with the jog shuttle dial to specify a shade then press the ENTER key to register imits 0 63 your setting Press Enter to register Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to adjust the combi Format Settings Record 2 3 nation of red green and blue until you achieve the desired color When the desired color is attained press the EXECUTE key to register your setting Press the EXECUTE key again to replace the standard color selected in Step 3 with the new color Enter select Exec register 14 22 15 SETTING THE WAVEFORM JUDGEMENT FUNCTIONS CHAPTER SETTING THE WAVEFORM JUDGEMENT FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the overall flow for setting proce dures involving waveform judgement T 15 1 Performing a Waveform Judgement Operation during DIRECT Measurement 15 2 Performing a Waveform Judgement Operation during MEMORY Measurement 15 SETTING THE WAVEFORM JUDGEMENT FUNCTIONS 15 1 Performing a Waveform Judgement Operation during DIRECT Measurement This section describes how to perform a waveform judgement operation during DIRECT measurement During DIRECT measurement waveform judgement is based on the specified Lower Range and Upper Range values This procedure can only be set when all of the following conditions are met The measurement mode is RECORDER The Record Settings window s Display Mode setting i
187. ailable Settings On Enables the Waveform Priority Display function Off Disables the Waveform Priority Display function This parameter which can only be set when the WAVEFORM PRIORITY DISPLAY setting is On selects the target channel number for priority display The specifiable channel num bers vary with the number of amps installed This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T displays the channel numbers the number of which varies with the channel configuration of your recorder Selects the color of waveform display for each channel Besides 32 existing colors to choose from you can also create an original color In this case a submenu for color editing appears This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T selects the zone for displaying and plotting the data of each channel When the Record Format setting is a predetermined format Specify the recording zone for each channel When the Record Format setting is Zone For each channel specify the position at the bottom of the chart paper as the starting point then specify a zone width that extends from that starting point 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS WIDTH This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T selects the line width for waveform recording according to channel Available Settings e 1
188. alog amp slots Used install analog pre amps V or M type 2 Logic amp slot Used rS tall a logic amp 3 SCSI GP IB board slot Use 7A stall a SCSI or GP IB interface board The SCSI interface board and GP IB interface board cannot be concur rently installed 2 12 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 2 5 The Amp Units This section describes following three types of amps that can be installed on your recorder e V type amp for measuring voltage e Mtype amp for measuring voltage or temperature e Logic amp for logic measurements 2 5 1 TheV Type Amp The V Voltage type amp is used for measuring voltage 1 Mounting removal knob 2 High potential input terminal 3 Low potential input terminal 2 High potential input terminal 3 Low potential input terminal 1 Mounting removal knob Used for mounting or removing an amp unit 2 High potential input terminals For connecting the positive potential of the input signals to be mea sured 3 Low potential input terminals For connecting the negative potential of the input signals to be mea sured Item Description Input format Channel independent unbalanced input Measurement range 50 mV to 500 V full scale Maximum sampling 4 us interval H Frequency response DC coupling DC to 50 kHz AC coupling 10 Hz to 50 kHz 5 V to 500 V range 500 VDC DC ACp p Jems 50 mV to 2 V range
189. ame parameter Set the No of CHs parameter Set the Event parameter Set the Logic parameter NOTE P Logic setting Also set other memory related parameters as required For information about memory related functions see Sub section 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window Trigger Settings window Function Memory For details on how to set memory related parameters see Chapter 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Source setting of Start Stop conditions 1 Off Manual External 2 Internal Type setting 1 Normal 2 Slope 1 Combination setting 10 6 Mode setting Lower Level Upper at sting Dreaton seting ids seing Record Settings window Display Mode X Y Function Memory Format Settings window PLOT On Off setting X Axis setting Vass setting Start measurement Stop measurement Data Replay Settings window Replay Source setting 1 Memory 2 Disk Capture Block setting File Name setting Replay CH setting Output Ratio setting MEM OUT key 10 CAPTURING DATA IN A MEMORY DEVICE Part 3 Settings at the Trigger Settings window 6 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Settings window 7 Set the Function parameter to Memory 8 Set the Source parameter for the Start Condition and Stop Condition 9 Set the Type parameter 10 If you set the Source parameter to Internal in Step 8 also set the trigger conditions
190. aming files and so on NOTE 0 Data is saved in the Memory Settings menus and replayed in the Data Replay menus FILE LIST Lists a directory of the files in the specified disk When this setting is selected a submenu appears for selecting the target drive and directory FILE COPY Copies the specified file When this setting is selected a submenu appears for specifying the source file and destination file of the FILE COPY operation 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS FILE RENAME Renames the specified file When this setting is selected a submenu appears for selecting the file you wish to rename and its new file name NOTE b To rename a folder select the target folder name as the file name to be renamed FILE DELETE Deletes the specified file When this setting is selected a submenu appears for selecting the name of the file to be deleted NOTE To delete a folder select the target folder name as the file name to be deleted DISK INITIALIZE Either formats a hard disk MO disk see NOTE below or floppy disk or reformats a hard disk When this parameter is selected the Disk Initialize submenu shown below appears Disk Initialize Initialize mode Drive Format Drive A FDD Size 1 44MB Type Quick Volume Label Press Enter to select Exec to start format operation INITIALIZE MODE This parameter can only be set when an internal hard disk i
191. an external memory device con nected via the SCSI interface unit The captured data can also be replayed as Y T waveforms For the setting procedure see Section 10 2 Enabling MEMORY Y T SAVE Operations e MEMORY X Y SAVE Mode Saves the signal input to its internal memory or to a hard disk only if a hard disk unit is installed The cap tured data can also be replayed as X Y waveforms that indicate the correlation between pairs of designated channels For the setting procedure see Section 10 3 Enabling MEMORY X Y SAVE Operations e The Relationship between Data Capture and the Stop Condition Source Setting How data is saved during a MEMORY SAVE operation varies with the Stop Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window as described in the table below Stop Condition Source setting Data capture method Data is continuously saved until the available space of the destina tion disk becomes full or the STOP key is pressed to terminate measurement Manual Internal External Measurement is terminated upon satisfaction of the specified Stop Condition If the Stop Condition is not satisfied before the available space in the destination disk becomes full data is only saved up to the amount specified and then data capture stops Furthermore it can take up to 1 ms for data capture to be stopped after the Stop Con dition is satisfied data is captured into memory during this time
192. arameter 27 Set the Output Ratio parameter Part 9 Replay the Captured Data 28 Press the main control panel s MEM OUT key NOTE 0 To record the replay data onto chart paper press the main control panel s PRINTER key to enable the Print function and then press the MEM OUT key Never remove or exchange a disk during Replay mode when the Replay Source setting is Disk or you may damage the disk s contents 10 CAPTURING DATA IN A MEMORY DEVICE CHAPTER CAPTURING DATA IN A MEMORY DEVICE This chapter describes how to set up your recorder to save measured data to memory without recording it pu M M H 10 1 Overview of MEMORY SAVE Operations 10 2 Enabling MEM ORY Y T SAVE Operations 10 3 Enabling MEMORY X Y SAVE Operations 10 CAPTURING DATA IN A MEMORY DEVICE 10 1 Overview of MEMORY SAVE Operations During a MEMORY SAVE operation the recorder saves the signal input to its internal memory to a disk in an internal memory drive a hard disk drive or MO drive or to a disk in an external memory device connected via the SCSI interface unit During such time the data being measured is neither recorded or displayed Your recorder is capable of performing MEMORY SAVE operations in the single mode described below e MEMORY Y T SAVE Mode Saves the signal input to its internal memory to a disk in an internal memory drive a hard disk drive or MO drive or to a disk in
193. as previously saved Setting Procedure 1 Press the EXECUTE key to open the EXECUTE Eee Men 8 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Load Cursor Position under Cursor Position then press the ENTER key to display its window 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Posi tion No position then press the ENTER key to dis Load Cursor Position W play its window v 4 Usethe numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial to enter the file number of the cursor position you wish to load then press the ENTER key to register your setting Save Cursor Position Position No Set Value e Limits 1 10 Enter register NOTE 7 For more information on inputting numeric val ues see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANU Press Enter to select Exec to load MERIC CHARACTERS 5 To load the cursor position press the EXECUTE key 20 11 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS 20 11 Other Cursor Functions This section explains how to use the cursor functions that were not covered earlier in this chapter 20 11 1 Moving to the Beginning of Replay Data To move the displayed cursor to the leading position of the waveform data being replayed perform the steps below This Move to First Data function can only be used when the Recording Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T When two waveform cursors are being displayed this function affects the
194. at gt r Settings CH No Start point 0mm 100mm 30mm 100mm 30mm Zone width 20mm 100mm 100mm 100mm 100mm 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS ENVE LOPE Selects the grid pattern for use when displaying and plotting waveforms Available Settings when the Display Mode setting is Y T None 10mm fine 10mm coarse 5mm fine 5mm coarse E E E el 5 4 H 10mm 10mm 5mm 5mm This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T selects the On Off status of the Envelope function When fast frequency signals are concurrently measured with slow frequency signals recording on chart paper products dark results for fast frequency signals and hardly legible results for slow frequency signals If this happens enable this function to increase the legibility of slow frequency signals Available Settings Off Disables the Envelope function On Enables the Envelope function PRIORITY DISPLAY This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T selects the On Off status of the Waveform Priority Display func tion to determine whether or not to place priority on a certain channel during wave form display When On is selected as the WAVEFORM PRIORITY DISPLAY setting a submenu appears for specifying the priority channel number during waveform dis play PRIORITY CH Av
195. ata that is being replayed The target area is defined using two cursors The calculated result is displayed on the screen This procedure which assumes that data capture has already been completed can only be performed if the data has been captured during RECORDER mode into the recorder s internal memory Moreover when the Record Settings window s Display mode setting is X Y the Readout Settings window s Function setting can only be set to Area only the area can be calculated For more information about the Function parameter see Subsection 4 3 5 The Readout Settings Window Setting Procedure This procedure assumes that data has already been captured to the recorder s internal memory by a Direct Save or Memory Save operation and such data is being replayed Part 1 Press the MEMORY key to open the Readout Settings window Area Statistical Calculation Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Function Function position then press the ENTER key S D n to display its pull down menu S D n 1 Use the arrow keys to select the desired func Max Min tion then press the ENTER key to register your P P setting RMS Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Rise Time Calculation Method position then press the Fall Time ENTER key to display its pull down menu Averge Use the arrow keys to select the desired method then press the ENTER key to register your set ting Readout Settings Memory 4 4 Press the mai
196. ately cool down 2 Pull the papers leading edge out of the chart paper outlet of the internal Z fold unit Paper s thermal sensitive surface for printing When using the internal Z fold unit use PZ100 thermal Z fold paper Recording cannot be performed unless the chart paper s thermal sensitive surface contacts the ther mal head Be sure to load the chart paper so that its thermal sensitive surface faces outward 3 Fit the Z fold paper into the internal Z fold unit 3 PREPARATIONS 4 Mount the internal Z fold unit into the recorder 5 Pull the chart papers leading edge out the printer cover s chart paper outlet so that it covers the rubber rollers while ensuring that the chart paper is not slack Remove any slack in the chart paper by gently pulling the chart paper s leading edge The last meter of the chart paper is marked with a red line to indicate that the end of the chart paper is near In addition the remaining length of the chart paper is printed in meter units on the chart paper s edge every 10 cm 6 Close the printer cover Securely close both the right and left sides of the printer cover Recording without firmly closing the printer cover may not only lead not unsatisfactory plotted results but also cause such problems as paper jams 3 PREPARATIONS 7 Check how the chart paper is being fed Before starting to record turn on the recorder and then press the FEED key to advance th
197. ay 20 13 20 11 4 Moving the Cursor to a Selected Time within Replay Data 20 15 20 11 5 Summoning the Other Cursor ssssssssssssseeeee ener 20 16 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS 5 2 iR nitate inania Die x e ue decus 21 1 21 1 Managing PINGS dst tado ree pu Dur pee ENS Fre ru uu uu iat 21 2 21 1 1 Elements of File Management nennen RERE 21 2 21 1 2 File TYPOS oerte ex arbe ie vor eere Guta anemone iets Keen 21 2 21 2 Designating an Existing Drive esssssssseeeeeneeeenn menn mene nnne nennen nnne 21 3 21 3 Designating an Existing Folder 21 4 21 4 Moving to an Existing Folder sesssssseeeeennn enne nnne nnn 21 5 CONTENTS 21 5 Creating a New Foldet ote tutem t dece A Oise heii ated oa teeters 21 6 21 6 Designating an Existing File a a nnne nenne 21 8 21 Creating a NOW File 21 9 21 8 Using the Auto Save FUNCHION 1 iiie ie reca ix ata eee Eras sea grasp 21 11 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR sss 22 1 22 1 The REMOTE Connector s Functions and Pin Assignment 22 2 22 2 Assembling the REMOTE Connector
198. bottom of the Color Selection window then press the EXECUTE key to register your setting To select a non standard color lt lt Create your own original color by combining varying shades of red green and blue gt gt 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Red Green or Blue position of the Color Set ting window then press the ENTER key to dis play its numeric input submenu Format Settings Record 2 2 XY Plot Color Y Axis 4 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to gether with the jog shuttle dial to enter a nu meric value then press the ENTER key to reg ister it 1 On CH1 CH2 Color Red Current e Gree Limits 0 63 For details on inputting numeric values see Press ENTER to register Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC ENTER Select EXEC Register CHARACTERS 14 18 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to adjust the combi nation of red green and blue until you achieve the desired color After achieving the desired color press the EXECUTE key to register it Press the EXECUTE key once to replace the former color with the color you registered in Step 4 14 2 8 Selecting the X Axis and Y Axis Channels To select the channel numbers to be respectively used as the X axis and Y axis perform the steps below The X Axis and Y Axis parameters can only be set when the measurement mode is RECORDER a
199. change a set ting select Change Settings to display the RS 232C Settings submenu The current RS 232C interface conditions are displayed at below this line At this section you can only check the current settings but you cannot change them here CHANGE SETTINGS Used to change any of the RS 232C interface s interface conditions Speed 19200 bps Length 8 bits Stop Bit s 1 bit Parity None Flow Control None Timeout 2s Enter select Exec register Speed Length Stop Bit s Parity 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS This parameter selects the speed of data transfer It can only be set after select ing Change Settings under RS 232C Settings Available Settings 300bps 600bps 1200bps 2400bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 76800bps 115200bps 230400bps This parameter selects the number of bits per DATA byte It can only be set after selecting Change Settings under RS 232C Settings Available Settings 7bits 8bits This parameter selects the number of Stop bits It can only be set after selecting Change Settings under RS 232C Settings Available Settings 1bit 2bits This parameter selects the parity mode for data transfer It can only be set after selecting Change Settings under RS 232C Settings Available Settings None Odd Even Flow Control This parameter selects the handshaking mode for data transfer via the RS NOTE 0 Timeout 232C
200. circumstances In such case wait until the LCD panel warms up to room temperature Although the LCD panel is made using extremely high precision technology black dots may appear on its screen or red blue or green dots may not disappear Depending on the viewing angle stripes of uneven color or uneven brightness may be apparent These are all due to the structure of the LCD panel and are not defects 3 PREPARATIONS 3 3 Installing or Removing an Amp This section explains the procedures for installing or removing an analog amp a V or M type amp or a logic amp To remove an amp perform the installation procedure in reverse Moreover when pulling out an amp be sure to grasp the amp mounting removal knob with your hand to pull the amp out and off AN CAUTION Always turn off the recorder before installing or removing an amp Whenever handling an amp pay due attention to avoid static electricity and so on 3 3 1 Installing an Analog Amp 1 Remove the M3L4 setscrews that secure the analog amp slot s cover and then remove the cover 2 Select an amp suitable for the type of measurements to be performed and insert it in the slot by sliding the amp s guide board along the slot s mounting rails AN CAUTION Always use the amp mounting removal knob to remove or mount an amp Pulling or pushing an amp s signal terminals or other part to mount or remove an ampis likely to damage that part 3 PREPARATIONS
201. control panel s MODE key to select START n os the desired measurement mode Ss OAB SELECT COPY A amp B CURSOR lt lt DIRECTION LIST o t diis LOCAL FEED REMOTE C lt lt Select the channel group for the 16 channel model only gt gt PCAN GROUP Use the amp control panel s SEL key to select the sd preamp group The selected group is indicated by a lit lamp cH9 CH16 OcHi CH24 CH24 CH32 5 SIMPLIFIED RECORDING IN REALTIME Step 3 lt lt Select the input coupling status gt gt _ __ Use the amp control panel s MEAS key to select the eris NNUS ANN FAS TAG aco input coupling status The selected status is displayed at the Monitor window at the right of the screen lt lt Set the measurement range gt gt POSITION Use the amp control panel s RANGE keys to set the ANTHERS ANN WW measurement range The selected range is displayed at the Monitor window at the right of the screen lt lt Set the measurement position gt gt RANGE mum Use the amp control panel s POSITION keys to set css weed ww AP WON ew Weer WET the upper and lower limits of the measurement span The selected measurement span is displayed at the Monitor window at the right of the screen lt lt Select the filter mode gt gt _ RGE posmon Use the amp control panel s FILT key to select the suns ww filter mode The selected fi
202. ct On then press Scale Print On the ENTER key to register your setting Record Settings Record 1 3 Part 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Format position then press the ENTER key to Record Settings Record 1 3 display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select the desired print Scale Print On format for scale printing then press the Format All Channels ENTER key to register your setting All Channels List Print Independent 14 1 9 Printing a List of Current Settings To enable the printing of a list of the recorder s currently selected settings on chart paper after measurement is completed perform the steps below For more information about the List Print parameter see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Setting Procedure ER Ts 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Record eee Settings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Scale Print On List Print position then press the ENTER key Format All Channels to display its pull down menu List Print 3 Use the arrow keys to select On then press the ENTER key to register your setting On 14 6 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 1 10 Changing the Record Format and Zone Settings To select a predetermined format for Y T waveform display and recording perform the steps be
203. ction describes the procedure for setting the Filter parameter in order to filter the trigger For more information about this Filter parameter see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window This Filter parameter can only be set in the following case When the Function setting is Memory When the Type setting is Normal and When the Combination setting is Level OR or Level AND Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Set tings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Trigger Counter position then press the ENTER Trigger Counter 0 Count key to display its pull down menu Pre Trigger Count 800ms Use the arrow keys to select Filt then press Stop Condition rce Internal the ENTER key to register your setting Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 8 T H 60 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the numeral to the right of the Filt parameter the current Filt setting then press the ENTER to display its window Count O Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to Delay Set Value gether with the jog shuttle dial to enter the de Stop Con mm sired value then press the ENTER key to reg ister your setting Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 8 1 H 60 Limits Press Enter to register NOTE For details on inputting numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 6 Continue to specify the Start Condit
204. cts the method for specifying scaling Available Settings 4 point setting Specifies the output upper and lower limit values that respectively correspond to the measured data s upper and lower limit values Offset setting Specifies the offset relative to the input values NOTE The Scaling operation is calculated using a ratio of the Meas Value or EU Value settings If a ratio value that the recorder cannot process is specified the message below appears FS input is out of range N Scale factor too large Decrease output digit ENTER Yes CANCEL No If this message appears follow the instructions by either reducing the number of digits to be output by one or changing the Meas Value and or EU Value settings while leaving the number of digits un changed 2 Meas Specifies the numeric value s to be scaled according to the Setting Method setting f the Setting Method setting is 4 point setting set two points the Upper and Lower parameters f the Setting Method setting is Offset setting specify one point the Meas Value parameter 3 EU Value Specifies scaled output which varies with the Setting Method setting Specifies two points the Upper and Lower parameters if the Setting Method setting is 4 point setting Specifies one point the Meas Value parameter if the Setting Method setting is Offset setting 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 Decimal point Specified only if the S
205. currently opened window 15 Press the PRINTER key if you wish to record onto chart pa per 16 Press the START key 17 Press the TRIGGER key if the Start Condition Source set ting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual Part 6 Stop measurement 18 Press the TRIGGER key if the Stop Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual 19 Press the STOP key 8 RECORDING IN REALTIME 8 3 Enabling DIRECT X Y Recording To set up your recorder for DIRECT X Y recording perform the steps described in this section The procedure described only includes the steps directly related to enabling DIRECT X Y recording For other settings see the pertinent section in Chapter 11 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS through Chapter 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR NOTE h Before proceeding to the following settings be sure to first complete the settings described in Chapter 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS Setting Procedure Part 1 Select the measurement mode 1 Press the main control panel s MODE key to switch the mea Trigger Settings window surement mode to RECORDER Function Record Source setting for Start Stop 2 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Settings window Conditions 3 Setthe Function parameter to Record 1 Off Manual External 4 Set the Source parameter for the Start Condition and Stop 2 Internal Condition 2 Set the Combination parameter 010
206. d 20 00rpm CH 1 Scaling AAAA 5m i 20 00rpm 10V Linked 5 10 00 CH 1 Scaling 10 00rpm J 4 10 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 3 The Memory Menu This section describes the four Memory windows accessed via the MEMORY key on the conditions panel 4 3 1 The Memory Menu s Tree Structure Parameters accessed by the MEMORY key Memory Window MEMORY SETTINGS A NM ME CALCULATION SETTINGS FUNCTION L SAMPLING INTERVAL e I PROGRAM BLOCK L on DATA MEMORY SETTINGS FORMULA SETTINGS a EVE BON NUMBER OF MEANS E SAPTURE TIME LOWER SPAN UPPER UNIT I MEMORY CHAIN L READOUT SETTINGS STAT CALC AREA STATISTICAL CALCULATION L Off FUNCTION On DATA SEARCH NUMBER OF MEANS L SEARCH METHOD CAPTURE BLOCK L LEVEL 2 pcm L COMBINATION L piek LEVEL OR LEVEL AND SAMPLING INTERVAL See Note 1 I FILE NAME I No of CH L TRIGGER COUNTER L EVENT NT LOGIC only when the Logic amp is installed cou FILTER DATA REPLAY SETTINGS L REPLAY SOURCE MEMORY REPLAY BLOCK DATA SAVE CONDITIONS REPLAY CH ALL CHS SELECTED CH s L CH SELECTION OUTPUT RATIO DATA SAVE DISK FILE NAME t CONDITION Note 1 REPLAY CH MOBE ALL CHS M SELECTED CHIS LOWE
207. d Save of waveform judgement patterns File Delete APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS A 8 DC Adapter Unit Factory Installed Unit While the recorder is being run using the DC adapter unit the maximum chart speed becomes 25 mm s Item Specifications Input voltage range For 12 V specifications 10 to 16 VDC For 24 V specifications 21 to 32 VDC Isolation resistance 500 VDC between input and output terminals 500 VDC between an input output terminal and FG Insulation resistance 100 MQ or higher Automatic switching AC DC selection with a priority on the AC power supply Power consumption Approx 190 VA maximum While printer is off approx 100 VA 1 hr of printing at 10 mm s approx 120 VA Common to both 8 and 16 channel models APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX B SUPPLIES ADD ON AND OTHER ACCESSORIES SUPPLIES ADD ON UNITS AND OTHER ACCESSORIES This appendix contains a brief description of the WR1000 s supplies add on units and other accessories ppp ea B 1 Supplies Designation B 2 Add on Units Designation B 3 Other Accessories APPENDIX B SUPPLIES ADD ON AND OTHER ACCESSORIES B 1 Supplies Designation Thermal roll paper PR231A Min supply unit 10 rolls Remarks 40 m roll Thermal Z fold paper PZ231A 5 packs 100 m pack for long length Z fold unit Thermal Z fold paper PZ100 10 packs 20 m pack for internal Z fold unit Head cleaner kit B 3
208. d UNIT setting then press the Setting Method 4 point s tting ENTER key to register your setting Meas Value Value Upper 41 0000 1 0000 Dec pt Lower 1 0000 1 0000 Dec pt Unit V NOTE Select Span CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit For details about how to input alphanumerics see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANU MERIC CHARACTERS L LE P Q Press ENTER to register Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the SPAN position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 1 Off 5000 500 0 mV Use the arrows key to select whether or not to 500 0 5000 m JM have the ENGINEERING UNIT settings affect Off Engineering Unit Setting the measurement span then press the ENTER Setting Method 4 point s tting key to register your setting Meas Value Value Upper 41 0000 41 0000 Dec pt Lower 1 0000 1 0000 Dec pt Unit V V NOTE Select Unit Length Choose For more information about this SPAN set Span ting see Subsection 4 2 3 The ENGINEER ect Exec register ING UNIT SETTINGS Window Link 11 6 11 USING THE SCALING FUNCTIONS 11 2 Offsetting the Input Values To offset the input values perform the steps described in this section Setting Procedure Part 1 Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 Press the INPUT key to open the ENGINEER ING UNIT S
209. d connected to an external memory device and The Capture Destination setting is Disk This parameter specifies the data format destination folder and destination file name When the Capture Destination setting is Memory see the previous page for an explana tion of the File Name setting for the Auto Save operation For instructions on how to specify the destination folder and destination file name see Chapter 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS NUMBER OF CH This parameter can only be specified in the following case In some cases channels Either a hard disk drive or MO drive is installed as an internal memory device or an external memory device is connected via the SCSI interface unit and The Capture Destination setting is Disk This parameter selects the target number of channels to be involved in data capture to a disk either in an internal memory device a hard disk drive or MO drive or in an external memory device connected via the SCSI interface unit The Number of CH setting represents the total number of channels starting from CH 1 Available Settings 8 channel model 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 16 channel model 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 itis possible to raise the maximum Sampling Interval by reducing the target number of This parameter can only be specified in the following case Either a hard disk drive or MO drive is installed as an internal memory device or an external mem
210. dot about 0 125 mm to 8 dots about 1 mm BASE LINE This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T enables the plotting of a base line at the specified position on the chart paper Only one base line can be plotted per zone however and the base line is not displayed LOGIC ZONE This parameter which can only be set when the Logic setting in the AMP Settings window is Enable and the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T selects both the display recording zones for logic waveforms and the line color for displaying logic wave forms by Logic Group The number of zones that can be specified varies with the Record Format setting Moreover the Color setting can be set to one of 32 colors It is also possible to create an original color besides the existing 32 colors In this case a submenu for color editing appears Available Settings Sample printout RECORD FORMAT 200 mm x1 RECORD FORMAT LOGIC ZONE for recording Logic Group Zone 1 Zone 6 Zone1 to Zone16 Zone 11 D Zone 16 Zone1 to Zone10 Zonet Zone1 to Zone8 Zone2 Zone3 Zone9 to Zone16 Zone4 Zone1 to Zone5 Zones Zone6 Zone9 to Zone13 Zone7 Zone1 to Zone4 Zones Zone9 Zoned to Zone8 Zone10 Zone9 to Zone12 Zone11 Zone12 Zone13 to Zone16 Zone13 Zone14 2 Zones in each recording zone 5 Zonet5 Zone16
211. dshaking mode used during data transfer via the RS 232C interface For more information see Subsection 4 7 3 The Option Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the Option Set Option Settings System 2 4 tings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Change Remote I F RS 232C Settings on the right of RS 232C Settings then RS 232C Settings v press the ENTER key to display the RS 232C Set Speed a Settings 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Flow Stop Bit Length Conirol position then press the ENTER key to dis Parity Stop Bit s play its pull down menu Flow Co 4 Use the arrow keys to select the desired setting Timeout eed then press the ENTER key to register your setting Flow Control None 5 Timeout ENTER select Xon Xoff RS CS If you are finished changing all of your RS 232C settings press the EXECUTE key to register them 17 3 6 Selecting the Time Out Interval The Timeout parameter specifies the time out interval used during data transfer via the RS 232C interface For more information see Subsection 4 7 3 The Option Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the Option Set Option Settings System 2 4 tings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Change Remote I F RS 232C Settings on the right of RS 232C Settings then RS 232C Settings Change Settings v press the
212. e Limits desired ratio then press the ENTER key to reg ister your setting Press the EXECUTE key to execute the expan sion or compression of the waveform display Method Between Cursors Direction Expand x lt lt When the Expansion Compression Method is Free Scale gt gt 5 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Scale then press the ENTER key to display its win dow Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to Action gether with the jog shuttle dial to specify a mag Expansion Compression V nification ratio then press the ENTER key to Expansion Compression register your setting Press the EXECUTE key to execute the expan Method Free Scale sion or compression of the waveform display Set Value Upper Limit 1600000 Lower Limit 160 Press ENTER to register 12 21 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 6 Performing a Calculation Operation on a Cursor Defined Range of Captured Data This section describes how to perform a calculation operation on a specific range of previously captured data that is being replayed The target area is defined using two cursors The calculated result will be saved at the final Memory Block No This operation can only be set when all of the following conditions are met The target data has already been captured in memory The Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T The Memory Settings window s Block Size setting is o
213. e ENTER key v NOTE 7 If you selected MO Magneto Optic disk Drive A FDD drive as the Drive setting in Part 2 Steps 8 Sue and 9 need not be performed because the Type Size setting will be automatically recognized Volume Label and selected Initialize mode Drive Format t btart format operation Part 4 System Settings System 1 4 10 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to TYPE then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu File Delete W v 11 Use the arrow keys to select Quick or Normal Soe then press the ENTER key to register your set Initialize mode Drive Format Drive Size Type Volume Label o start format operation 16 9 16 PERFORMING DISK OPERATIONS Part 5 12 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to VOLUME LABEL then press the ENTER key to display its window File Delete 13 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial to specify a Disk Initialize volume label then press the ENTER key to reg ister your setting 14 Press the EXECUTE key to initiate the FOR Volume Label MAT operation or press the CANCEL key to cancel it System Settings System 1 4 Type Quick Press Enter t Exec tq Volume Label Enter register 16 9 Listing the Recorder s Existing Drives To list the drives installed on the recorder perform the steps below For details about the SYSTEM SETTINGS window see Subsec
214. e Range Generates a reference waveform with a wide time axis Generate Judgement Data Generates waveform judgement data that reflects the values specified by the Allowable Voltage Range and Allowable Time Range settings onto the refer ence waveform NOTE amp The generated waveform data is automatically saved at the final Block No Judgement Data Save Execute this function in order to save the generated judgement data file to a disk 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 7 The System Menu This section describes the menu and four windows accessed via the SYSTEM key on the conditions panel 4 7 1 The System Menu s Tree Structure Parameters accessed by the SYSTEM key SYSTEM key SYSTEM SETTINGS KEY LOCK SETTINGS SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS LOAD SETTINGS FROM DISK FILE LIST FILE COPY FILE RENAME FILE DELETE DISK INITIALIZE DRIVE LIST OPTION SETTINGS I LCD SCREEN ADJUSTMENT M SCREEN SAVER m POWER ON START PRINTER BEEPER FUNCTION BEEPER VOLUME I KEY CLICK DATE TIME NEW LINE CODE REMOTE I F RS 232C SETTINGS SPEED L LENGTH L STOP BIT s PARITY FLOW CONTROL L TIMEOUT GP IB SETTINGS L ADDRESS L TERMINATOR L TIMEOUT RETURN TO DEFAULT SETTINGS DISK OPERATION CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS I LANGUAGE I LONG LENGTH CHART UNIT RS 232C
215. e chart paper about 30 cm while checking that the chart paper is being properly fed MODE EVENT PRINTER MODE QA O START os 5 Co Sie SELECT COPY MONITOR C NE T CURSOL o DIRECTION LIST TRIGGER STOP o REMOTE LOCAL MEM OUT o 3 7 3 Loading Z Fold Paper in the Long Length Z Fold Unit When the long length Z fold unit is installed the WR1000 can record continuously over a maximum length of 100 meters When using the long length Z fold unit set the chart speed no higher than 25 mm s Satisfactory recording results cannot be guaranteed when the chart speed is set higher than 25 mm s The following describes the procedure for setting up the long length Z fold unit and loading Z fold chart paper 1 Mount the main unit onto the long length Z fold unit As shown below fit the main unit s rubber feet into the round openings on the top surface of the long length Z fold unit 3 PREPARATIONS 2 Load the chart paper in the long length Z fold unit and then insert the unit into the recorder Unpack the PZ231A Z fold paper pull out the chart paper compartment of the long length Z fold unit then load the chart paper into the compartment Next push the chart paper compartment back into the long length Z fold unit Thermal sensitive surface When using the long length Z fold unit use PZ231A thermal Z fold paper After unpacking the chart paper fan its edges to separate t
216. e main control panel s SELECT key This function can only be used when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T For more information about the Call Other Cursor function see Section 4 8 The EXECUTE Menu The following procedure assumes waveform data is being replayed and that a cursor has already been displayed Setting Procedure 1 Press the EXECUTE key to open the EXECUTE menu 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Call Other Cursor under Cursor Position then press the ENTER key to summon the other cursor into the same screen display as the currently selected cur sor Cursor Position Move to Selected Position w Move to First Data p Move to Last Data p Call other Cursor Load Cursor Position w Save Cursor Position w 20 16 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS CHAPTER 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS This chapter provides instructions on how to perform file related operations 21 1 Managing Files 21 1 1 Elements of File Management 21 1 2 File Types 21 2 Designating an Existing Drive 21 3 Designating an Existing Folder 21 4 Moving to an Existing Folder 21 5 Creating a New Folder 21 6 Designating an Existing File 21 7 Creating a New File 21 8 Using the Auto Save Function 21 1 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS 21 1 Managing Files This recorder s system for managing files consists of three elements drives folders and files 21 1 1 Elements of File Manag
217. e mea surement mode to RECORDER Part 2 Settings at the Memory Settings window Press the MEMORY key to open the Memory Settings window 2 3 Set the Capture Destination parameter 4 Setthe Sampling Interval parameter 5 Set other parameters related to data capture When the Save To setting is Memory Set the Block Size parameter Set the Memory Expansion parameter Set the Memory Chain parameter Set the Capture Block parameter When the Save To is Disk Set the File Name parameter Set the No of CHs parameter Set the Event parameter Set the Logic parameter NOTE Also set other memory related parameters as required For information about memory related functions see Sub section 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window For details on how to set memory related parameters see Chapter 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME Mode setting Lower Level Upper Record Settings window Display Mode X Y Function Direct Format Settings window Plot On Off setting X Axis setting Y Axis setting Start measurement Stop measurement Data Replay Settings window Replay Source setting 1 Memory 2 Disk Capture Block setting File Name setting Replay CH setting Output Ratio setting MEM OUT key Part 3 Settings at the Trigger Settings window 6 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Settings window 7 Se
218. e param 256 kW x eter see Subsection 4 3 2 The Memory Set tings Window Memory Settings Memory 1 4 Part 5 11 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Memory Expansion position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 12 Use the arrow keys to select the desired ex pansion factor then press the ENTER key to register your setting Memory Settings Memory 1 4 Block Size 25kW x 128 Memory Expansion Capture Time x1 x2 NOTE x4 For information about the Memory Expansion parameter see Subsection 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window X8 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Part 6 Memory Settings Memory 1 4 Capture Time 2 s Memory Chain 0112 9 Calc Off Sequential Block Empty Block Part 7 Memory Settings Memory 1 4 Stat Calc Off Capture Block EJ Set Value Limits 1 128 Press Enter to register 12 4 13 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Memory Chain position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 14 Use the arrow keys to select the desired se quence then press the ENTER key to register your setting NOTE 7 For information about the Memory Chain pa rameter see Subsection 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window 15 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Capture Block position then press the ENTER key to display its wi
219. e specified Block No SEQUENTIAL BLOCK Repeatedly captures and overwrites data in ascending order from the specified Block No proceeding to Block 1 after the highest Block No until measurement is completed EMPTY BLOCK Captures data in ascending order from the specified Block No proceeding to Block 1 after the highest Block No terminating data capture when no empty blocks remain A block containing data and an empty block can be distinguished by the color used to display their Block No Green A block containing data Gray An empty block Blue A block containing the result of a calculation operation and so forth STAT CALC This parameter selects the On Off status of statistical calculation provided that both of the following conditions are met The Capture Destination setting is Memory and The Block Size setting is other than 256kW 512kW x 1 Arithmetic averaging is used as the method for statistical calculation Statistical calculation calculates the arithmetic mean between the data captured in the specified Memory Block which varies with the Memory Chain and Memory Block settings and the data captured at the final Block No and then saves the calculated result at the final Block No This operation is performed the number of times specified by the Number of Means param eter Available Settings Off Disables statistical calculation On Enables statistical calculation When On is selected a sub
220. e specified when the Capture Destination setting is Memory permits calculation only within a cursor defined range of data captured in memory that is being replayed The calculation operation is defined at the Readout Settings win dow After replaying the target captured data execute the operation from the Execute menu The result of Area Statistical Calculation will be displayed on the screen 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS FUNCTION Selects the function used for area statistical calculation Specifiable functions vary with the Display Mode setting in the Record Settings window Available Settings The table below lists the available settings according to the Display Mode setting Display Mode Function Submenu parameters Standard Deviation n Standard Deviation n 1 Max Min Values Min Max Max Min Value P P RMS Value Rise Time Fall Time Average Area Normal Calculation Method Positive Negative Absolute AREA Open End Point Processing Closed Standard Deviation n Displays the standard deviation of the cursor defined range of data c V ED D n n n D Data n No of data points Standard Deviation n 1 Displays the standard deviation of the cursor defined range of data A ED ED n n 1 n 1 D Data n No of data points Maximum and Minimum Values Min Max Displays the maximum and minimum values within the cursor defined range
221. ea sured data or recorder settings be sure to save them before performing this setting Setting Procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the CUSTOMIZE Customize Settings System 3 4 SETTINGS window Language English US 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Long Length Chart Unit LONG LENGTH CHART UNIT position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 3 Use the arrow keys to select USE then press the Execute Setting s gt 88 ENTER key to register your setting 4 Move the cursor to Execute Setting s press the ENTER key to display the selected setting for con firmation and then press the ENTER key once again to register your setting 5 As instructed turn the power off and then on again to enable the settings you have made 18 6 18 USING THE BASIC FUNCTIONS 18 11 Making a Copy of the Screen Display To print a hard copy of the screen display or save the screen image to a file perform the steps below Setting Procedure Copy Screen Destination BMP File Copy Screen Destination BMP File File SNUB Rei 4 Bitmap Save Destination Drive A FDD Available 14555104 byte Folder N File Name Enter to select Exec to register 1 Display the screen image that you wish to copy 2 Press the main control panel s COPY key to display its submenu 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
222. easurement mode is RECORDER and the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T For more information about the Flying Annotation parameter see Subsection 4 5 4 The Annotation Settings Window Setting Procedure Annotation SettingsRecord 3 3 Print Interval 10cm 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Annotation Settings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Fly Length 10 ing Annotation position then press the ENTER key Flying Annotation On to display its pull down menu Off 3 Use the arrow keys to select On or Off then press On the ENTER key to register your setting NOTE For instructions on how to control annotation printing from a personal computer when the Fly ing Annotation setting is On refer to the WR1000 COMMAND MANUAL 14 13 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 1 20 Printing a Title at the Top of the Chart Paper To enable the Title Annotation function and specify a user defined character string for use as the title perform the steps below For more information about the Title Annotation parameter see Subsection 4 5 4 The Annotation Settings Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Annota tion Settings window Print Interval 10 cm Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Length 32 Title Annotation position then press the EN Flying annotation Off TER key to display its pull down menu
223. ecting the Time Out Interval 17 SETTING THE INTERFACE FUNCTIONS The Timeout parameter determines the time out interval used during data transfer via the GP IB interface For more information see Subsection 4 7 3 The Option Settings Window Setting Procedure Option Settings System 2 4 1 GP B Settings GRAA amp 4 GP IB Settings Address 0 Terminator 3 Timeout ENTER select E Press the SYSTEM key to open the Option Set tings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Change Settings on the right of GP IB Settings then press the ENTER key to display the GP IB Settings submenu Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Timeout position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select the desired interval then press the ENTER key to register your setting If you are finished changing all of your GP IB set tings press the EXECUTE key to register them 17 7 17 SETTING THE INTERFACE FUNCTIONS 17 8 18 USING THE BASIC FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 16 USING THE BASIC FUNCTIONS This chapter describes how to use the recorder s basic functions _ 18 1 Locking the Panel Keys 18 2 Returning the Settings to Their Factory Default Settings 18 3 Adjusting the Backlit Display s Brightness 18 4 Using the Screen Saver 18 5 Starting Measurement Printing When the Power is Turned On 18 6 Using the Beeper and Adjus
224. ecute menu and perform a Level Search operation 12 17 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 3 2 Searching for an Event Marker This section describes the Event Search operation for seeking the position of an Event Marker within captured data This Event Search operation which is performed at the Readout Settings window can only be set when all of the following conditions are met The Capture Destination setting is Disk and the Data Load Settings window s Load from setting is Disk The Memory Settings window s Event setting is On to enable the capture of Event data during data capture the Event setting only appears when the Load From setting is Disk and Data has already been captured in the recorder s internal memory by a Direct Save or Memory Save opera tion Setting Procedure voen PRINTER 1 Press the main control panel s MODE EVENT n key to display the cursor COPY MONITOR LIST TRIGGER FEED MEM OUT Press the CLOSE key to close the Readout Settings window Serch Press the EXECUTE key to open the Execute Next Level Match gt Prev Level Match d Next Event P Prev Event gt Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Next Event or Prev Event position then press the ENTER key to search for and display the point where the matching Event signal was in put NOTE W A regular Search operation can be performed by displaying the Execute
225. ed by pressing the START key it is stopped by input of a REMOTE trigger signal Time After measurement is started by pressing the START key it is stopped after the specified time interval Internal Off After measurement is started according to the specified Start Condition it is stopped by pressing the STOP key Internal After measurement is started when the specified Start Condition is met it stopped when the specified Stop Condition is met Manual After measurement is started when the specified Start Condition is met it is stopped when the specified Stop Condition is met External After measurement is started when the specified Start Condition is met it is stopped when the specified Stop Condition is met Time After measurement is started when the specified Start Condition is met it is stopped when the specified Stop Condition is met Manual Off After measurement is started by pressing the TRIGGER key it is stopped by pressing the STOP key Internal After measurement is started by pressing the TRIGGER key it is stopped when the specified Stop Condition is met Manual After measurement is started by pressing the TRIGGER key it is also stopped by pressing the TRIGGER key External After measurement is started by pressing the TRIGGER key it is stopped by the input of a REMOTE trigger signal Time After measurement is started by pressing the TRIGGER key it is stopped after the specified time inter
226. een s Width The section explains how to use cursors A and B to specify a range of the waveform data being replayed on the screen in order to expand or compress that data to fit the screen s width Replayed waveform data can also be expanded by setting the time axis and the cursor DIRECTION to the X axis direction This function can only be used when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T The following procedure assumes that waveform data has already been captured and is being replayed Setting Procedure Part 1 C wonen PRINTER Press the main control panel s MODE EVENT key to display cursors B in A B mode n 1c N IS ES Press the SELECT key to select cursor A then aa Te turn the jog shuttle dial to move cursor A to the e Cc beginning position of the range of data to be E ES expanded or compressed Press the SELECT key again to select cursor B then turn the jog shuttle dial to move cursor Sa roen PANTER Move B to the end position of the range of data to be E expanded or compressed ok SELECT COPY MONITOR BN NOTE FEED Expansion is performed if you select a range _ that is narrower than the screen s width Compression is performed if you select a range that is wider than the screen s width REMOTE o Press the EXECUTE key to open the EXECUTE menu
227. eien ansi aena NE nnne 14 17 14 2 5 Selecting the Compensation Mode sssssesssssseseeeeeeeennee nennen 14 17 14 2 6 Selecting the Plot On Off Status for Each XY 14 17 14 2 7 Changing the Color of Waveform Display sessseeenennenn 14 18 14 2 8 Selecting the X Axis and Y Axis Channels sse 14 19 14 3 Recording and Display in LOGGING Mode ssssseeeeeeenenneenn nennen nennen 14 20 14 3 1 Changing the Logging Interval ssssesssssseseeeeneenneenn eene nennen 14 20 14 3 2 Printing a List of the Current Settings 14 20 14 3 3 Changing the Number of Displayed Zones ssssseeeeemee 14 20 14 3 4 Assigning a Channel to a Display Zone sssssssenmenneenmenne 14 21 14 3 5 Changing the Text Color of Each Zone 14 21 SETTING THE WAVEFORM JUDGEMENT FUNCTIONS 15 1 15 1 Performing a Waveform Judgement Operation during DIRECT Measurement 15 2 15 2 Performing a Waveform Judgement Operation during MEMORY Measurement 15 4 PERFORMING DISK OPERATIONS seen 16 1 163 Saving YOUR Settings retentu ee ea vitae dada exti atii usen ric 16 2 16 2 Loading xenon pr enia doe a t s tr b cereus 16 2 16 3 Displaying I
228. el s Y axis value at the waveform cursor point Y axis value at the waveform cursor position Operation Jog shuttle dial X axis value at the waveform cursor position Each channel s Y axis value at the waveform cursor point Y axis direction X axis direction Y axis direction X axis direction Display Waveform The Y axis AV value between both cursors cursor A or B Operation Jog shuttle dial The X axis At value between both cursors The difference between the Y axis value at both waveform cursor points Y axis value at the waveform cursor position X axis value at the waveform cursor position Each channel s Y axis value at the waveform cursor point 1 The CURSOR DIRECTION key selects the travelling direction of a waveform cursor when the Display Mode setting is Y T If the Format Settings window s Record Format setting is any other setting except x1 however the CURSOR DIRECTION key s setting is fixed to the x axis direction 2 In the table above the waveform cursor point the Numeric display column refers to the point where the waveform cursor intersects with waveform data 20 2 2 When the Display Mode Setting is X Y Cursor related keys Operation Function RSOR MODE key 03880 Y axis direction X axis direction DIRECTION key Waveform cursor display operation Display Waveform cursor A Operation Jog shuttle dial Numeric display Y axis
229. ement 1 Drive 2 Folder 3 File Represents a specific memory device which is assigned a unique drive letter such as A or B Example A FDD signifies that the drive letter A is assigned to the floppy disk drive Represents a location on a memory device and is assigned a unique group name The name of a folder can be freely chosen lt is also possible to create a folder within another folder In the Disk submenu a folder name is distinguished by marks Example 1 AAGRAPHTEC indicates that the presence of the GRAPHTEC folder within the floppy disk in drive A Example 2 The folder named GRAPHTEC appears as lt GRAPHTEC gt within the Disk submenu Represents one set of saved data The name of a file can be freely chosen Example A GRAPHTEC WR1000 indicates that the file named WR1000 is located in the GRAPHTEC folder within the floppy disk in drive A 21 1 2 File Types This recorder distinguishes file types by the three character file name extension which consists of the two types below ace con Signifies a file that contains measurement conditions xak dat Signifies a file that contains measured data cece TXT Signifies a file that contains text data acc BMP Signifies a file that contains bitmap data A dat file cannot be read by a personal computer or other external device in its original status To read a dat file first convert it to a text
230. ent mode is RECORDER The Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T and The Record Settings window s Function setting is Memory For more information about parameters related to waveform judgement during MEMORY measurement see Subsection 4 6 3 The Judgement Settings Memory Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Judgement Settings Memory Judge 2 2 Press the JUDGE key to open the Judgement Settings window Function Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Reference off Function position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select On then press the ENTER key to register your setting Part 2 Judgement Settings Memory Judge 2 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Mode On Reference position then press the ENTER key Reference to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select the desired refer Good ence criterion then press the ENTER key to register your setting Part 3 Judgement Settings Memory Judge 2 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the CH position then press the ENTER key to dis CH Judgement Data File play its pull down menu Load Judgement Data v Use the arrow keys to select the desired chan CH nel number then press the ENTER key to reg CH ister your setting CH e cH NOTE 7 CH CH CH CH O x c eo I The data of the c
231. ent opera tion is output as a pulse from the REMOTE connector s JUDGE Output terminal 15 7 15 SETTING THE WAVEFORM JUDGEMENT FUNCTIONS 15 8 CHAPTER PERFORMING DISK OPERATIONS This chapter explains the procedural flow of disk opera tions s 16 1 Saving Your Settings 16 2 Loading Your Settings 16 3 Displaying Information about a File 16 4 Copyinga File or Folder 16 5 Renaminga File or Folder 16 6 Deleting a File or Folder 16 7 Reformatting a Hard Disk 16 8 Formatting a Disk 16 9 Listing the Recorder s Existing Drives 16 PERFORMING DISK OPERATIONS 16 16 1 16 PERFORMING DISK OPERATIONS 16 1 Saving Your Settings To save your current settings perform the following steps For details about the SYSTEM SETTINGS window see Subsection 4 7 2 Setting Procedure System Settings System 1 4 Settings Save current settings V Save Settings Drive DDD Available 1456640 bytes Folder File Name DEFAULT CND Press Enter to select Exec to start save operation 16 2 Loading Your Settings Press the SYSTEM key to open the SYSTEM SET TINGS window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS position under SET TINGS then press the ENTER key to open the SAVE SETTINGS window Select the destination drive as described in Sec tion 21 2 Designating an Existing Drive Select or create the destination folder as described in
232. enu 12 Use the arrow keys to select X H or L then press the ENTER key to register your setting for that digit 13 Repeat Steps 11 and 12 for the other logic groups 14 Press the EXECUTE key to register your set tings for all logic groups 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS 13 5 Activating the Trigger by the Slope of the Signal Input s Rise Fall Time This section describes the procedure for enabling trigger activation when the input voltage satisfies the speci fied trigger condition the passage of time from the Lower to Upper levels This trigger operation can only be set when the recorder is in Direct Save measurement mode or Memory Save measurement mode For more information about the Start Condition and the Stop Condition see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window For details about the impact of different combinations of Source settings for the Start Con dition and Stop Condition see Subsection 4 4 3 Possible Combinations of Source Settings Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Settings window Time Gate Relative Time Time Setting W Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Function Memory Action Repeat Source position under Start Condition or Stop Start Condition Source Condition then press the ENTER key to dis Type Normal Combinati layite aul downimenk CH Mode Lower Le ey ee Use the arrow keys to select Internal then p
233. eplaying captured data using the MEM OUT key Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the EXECUTE key to display the EXECUTE menu Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Action Expansion Compression position under Action then press the ENTER key to display Expansion Compression dba pe Use the arrow keys to move to the Expansion Method Compression Method position then press the B ENTER key to display its pull down menu etween Cursors ee Use the arrow keys to select either Fixed Scale Press ENTER to Free Scale or Free Scale then press the ENTER key to EXEC to register your setting NOTE 7 If you wish to perform expansion or compres sion of a cursor defined range of data by set ting the Expansion Compression Method to Between Cursors see Section 20 6 Using the Cursor Zoom Function 12 20 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Part 2 lt lt When the Expansion Compression Method is Fixed Scale gt gt Eewewe 1 b Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Di rection then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Action Use the arrow keys to select Expansion or Com Expansion Compression Ru pression then press the ENTER key to register Vinc Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the numeral on the right then press the ENTER key to display its window Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to Set Value gether with the jog shuttle dial to specify th
234. er Count I LEVEL AND See Note 1 Trigger Counter L Count EDGE OR See Note 1 MANUAL EDGE AND A I EXTERNAL See Note 1 TIME Note 1 I MODE I OFF LOWER LEVEL UPPER L L LOWER LEVEL UPPER Win In LOWER LEVEL UPPER Win Out LOWER LEVEL UPPER LOGIC Parameters accessed by the TRIGGER key MEMORY ACTION START CONDITION L SOURCE OFF INTERNAL L NORMAL L COMBINATION I LEVEL OR See Note 1 I Trigger Counter Count FILTER PRE TRIGGER I LEVEL AND See Note 1 t Trigger Counter Count FILTER PRE TRIGGER EDGE OR See Note 1 PRE TRIGGER L EDGE AND See Note 1 PRE TRIGGER SLOPE I CH LOWER dV LEVEL UPPER MANUAL dT EXTERNAL DIRECTION I MODE PRE TRIGGER STOP CONDITION L SOURCE OFF I INTERNAL L TYPE I NORMAL L COMBINATION L LEVEL OR See Note 1 I Trigger Counter Count FILTER PRE TRIGGER I LEVEL AND See Note 1 I Trigger Counter Count FILTER PRE TRIGGER I EDGE OR See Note 1 L_ EDGE AND L SLOPE See Note 1 CH I LOWER dV LEVEL UPPER MANUAL I dT r EXTERNAL DIRECTION TIME MODE 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 4 2 The TR
235. er position then press the ENTER key to display its window Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 8 T H 60 Trigger Counter Count 0 count Pre Trigger 96 3 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together Set Value al with the jog shuttle dial to specify the desired Pre Trigger interval then press the ENTER key to register your setting 4 Continue to specify the Start Condition param eters and Stop Condition parameters according to the instructions in one of the preceding sections from 13 4 to 13 6 Limits 0 100 Press ENTER to register NOTE 7 For details on how to input numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 13 15 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS 13 8 Stopping Measurement at a Specified Time Interval After the Trig ger is Activated This section describes the procedure for setting the Stop Condition Source setting to Time in order to stop measurement following a specified time interval after the start of measurement has been triggered The Source setting can only be set to Time for the Stop Condition For more information about this Time parameter see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Set Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 tings window 7 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Stop Condition eus Source position under Stop Condition
236. er setting Check that no calculation operation has been specified The chart paper isn t being fed Check that the chart paper is correctly loaded Check that the PRINTER key is in the On position APPENDIX E EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS r APPENDIX EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS eee E 1 External Dimensions of the Standard Model 16 Channels E 2 External Dimensions of the Standard Model with Writing Table Attached 16 Channels APPENDIX E EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS E 1 External Dimensions of the Standard Model 16 Channels THERMAL ARRAYCORDER WRIO0O 20 po e tOO 99 200908 29 0 9 3 Sa E 336 e t E 9 oS a 140 APPENDIX E EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS E 2 External Dimensions of the Standard Model with Writing Table Attached 16 Channels GRAPHT
237. es before attempting to use this recorder 1 Note on the CE Marking This recorder complies with the EN55022 1994 A1 1995 A2 1997 Class A and EN50082 2 1995 3 stan dards based on the EMC directive 89 336 EMC It also conforms to the EN61010 1 1993 A2 1995 standard based on the LV directive 72 73 EEC Although this recorder complies with the above mentioned standards be sure to used it correctly in accordance with the instructions and notes provided in its User s Manual Moreover use of this recorder by incorrect procedures may result in damage to the recorder or may invalidate its safeguards Please confirm all of its notes regarding use and other related information to ensure correct use 2 Warning This is a Class A product according to the EMC directive In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference or may be affected by radio interference to the extent that proper measurement cannot be performed 3 Notes for Safe Operation 1 Be sure to connect the power cord to an electrical socket with a good protective ground 2 When a high voltage signal cable has been connected to the main unit s analog signal input terminal avoid touching the leads of the input terminal s signal cable to prevent electrical shock due to high voltage 3 Ensure that the recorder s power source is positioned so that it can easily be disconnected 4 Notes on Functions and Performance 1 Be sure to connect the main u
238. eseeeseeeeeneneeenneneenenen nnns A 11 APPENDIX B SUPPLIES ADD ON UNITS AND OTHER ACCESSORIES B 1 B 1 Supplies Designation sessirnir nnana B 2 B2 Add on Units DesignatlOr uiii nato EAE aAA ETAN B 2 Other Accessories nennen nennen nennt 2 APPENDIX C MAINTAINING THE RECORDER 1 eene C 1 C1 Cleaning the Thermal Printhead iiec enki recte eeu t aa e ERR bera C 2 C 2 Ifan MO Disk Gets Jammed in its C 2 APPENDIX D BEFORE REQUESTING SERVICE 7 seen D 1 Da BEFORE REQUESTING SERVICE sisirain doe cce tie Ra CE Ye soe ERE de UE RE RE e a Rc Da arbre D 2 APPENDIX E EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 1 1 7 0 sees E 1 E 1 External Dimensions of the Standard Model 16 E 2 E 2 External Dimensions of the Standard Model with Writing Table Attached 16 Chiarinels ous a susto daret aa E 3 xiv 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION CHAPTER GENERAL DESCRIPTION This chapter provides a general description of the WR1000 and its features It also explains how to check the recorder s external casing and its standard accesso ries after you unpack your recorder pec
239. ess the Press Enter to register ENTER key to display the window for numeric input 7 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial to enter the desired numeral then press the ENTER key to register your setting NOTE py For details on how to input numerals see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 8 To change any other element of the Start Time setting repeat Steps 6 and 7 9 When the desired Start Time setting is displayed press the EXECUTE key to register your setting 13 13 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS 10 Repeat Steps 5 through 9 to also specify the End Time setting NOTE p For information about the Relative Time parameter see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trig ger Settings Window lt lt When the Time Gate Setting is Absolute Time gt gt Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Time Settings position then press the ENTER Time Gate Absolute v key to display the Absolute Time Settings win Functil Apsolute Time Settings us Start Start Time Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Type Start Time position then press the ENTER key to display the Date Time Settings window 1999 W 01 Use the arrow keys to move to the element of Set Value E the Date setting you wish to change year Limits 01 12 month or date then press the ENTER key to display the window for numeric input
240. essee 4 2 4 2 Thelnput e Ea 4 3 4 2 1 The Input Menu s Tree Structure sssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeee ener enn 4 3 4 2 2 The AMP SETTINGS Window nennen nnns einen nnn nnns 4 3 4 2 3 The ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS Window seen 4 8 4 3 The Momon MON Ebene sexy ratae 4 11 4 3 1 The Memory Menu s Tree Structure sesssesssssseseseseeeeeeeeeenenennn nennen 4 11 4 3 2 The MEMORY SETTINGS WINdOW siriy einni nine treia aea naaa aoa 4 12 4 3 8 The REPLAY SETTINGS WINdOW iicet ert e d eme ena urere ttn 4 19 4 3 4 The CALCULATION SETTINGS Window 4 21 4 3 5 The READOUT SETTINGS WIDQOW creto neret Rena tee ep rece Yee deena tees 4 23 44 The Trigger Mentis oi eio sh lect estes eva std Pede abonner SEU 4 30 4 4 1 The Trigger Menu s Tree Structure ssesssssssesseseseeeeeeeeneee enne nnne nnne 4 30 4 4 2 The TRIGGER SETTINGS Window sss enne nnne 4 31 4 4 8 Possible Combinations of Source Settings sssssssssssseeene 4 42 4 5 Record NAAR EENEN ASEENA NENANA AREENA NAAN 4 43 4 5 1 The Record Menu s Tree Structure isiishie 4 43 4 5 2 The RECORD SETTINGS Window sess nennen nnn 4 44
241. essing the TRIGGER key perform the steps below For more information about the Start Condition and the Stop Condition see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window For details about the impact of different combinations of Source settings for the Start Con dition and Stop Condition see Subsection 4 4 3 Possible Combinations of Source Settings Setting Procedure Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Time Gate Relative Time Function Memory Start Condition Source Type Normal Combinatio CH Mode Lower Le Time Setting W Action Repeat Internal External 13 2 1 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Set tings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Source position under Start Condition or Stop Condition then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select Manual then press the ENTER key to register your setting 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS 13 3 Activating the Trigger by an Externally Supplied REMOTE Signal To enable trigger activation by signal input to the REMOTE connector s trigger terminal perform the steps below For more information about the Start Condition and the Stop Condition see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window For details about the impact of different combinations of Source settings for the Start Con dition and Stop Condition see Subsection 4 4 3 Possible Combination
242. estination drive as described in Section 21 2 Designating an EE er 8 Specify the name of the destination folder only Data Save Destination es if you wish to save to a file within a folder Memory Settings Memory 1 4 Drive To designate an existing folder see Section Available sf 1455104 bytes 21 3 Designating an Existing Folder Folder To create a new folder see Section 21 5 Cre File Name DEFAULT DAT ating a New Folder 9 Specify the name of the destination file P Enter to select ae aes i ae To designate an existing file see Section 21 6 Designating an Existing File To create a new file see Section 21 5 Creat ing a New File NOTE 7 For information about the File Name param eter see subsection 4 3 2 The Memory Set tings Window 10 When all of the Data Save Destination settings are satisfactory press the EXECUTE key to register your settings lt lt To automatically save the captured data to disk gt gt 6 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the File Name position then press the ENTER key to display the Dave Save Destination window Perform settings at this window as described in Section 21 8 Using the Auto Save Function 7 When all of the Data Save Destination settings are satisfactory press the EXECUTE key to register your settings 12 7 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Part 4
243. et to any fraction with a numerator of 1 from 1 1 to 1 1000 User Scale Expands or compresses the waveform by the desired magnifica Stat Calc Arith Calc tion ratio from 1 1000 to 10x The User Scale value is specified as the time unit per division Performs an Area Statistical Calculation operation on the cursor defined portion of a waveform The type of calculation used is determined by the Function setting under Area Statistical Calculation in the Readout Settings window This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T performs an arithmetic operation on the cursor defined portion of a waveform The type of operation used is determined by the Formula Settings in the Calculation Settings window 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS Printer Output Between Cursors Printer Output All Data Printer Output Display Data Save to Disk Between Cursors This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T prints the cursor defined segment of the wave form display onto chart paper This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T prints all waveform data being replayed onto chart paper This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is X Y prints out the data being replayed onto chart paper in a 200 x
244. etting Method setting is 4 point setting This parameter specifies the decimal point position of the numeral to be specified as the EU value s Available Settings n nnnn nn nnn nnn nn nnnn n nnnnn 5 Unit Selects the scaled unit which can be specified as a user defined character string consisting of alohanumerics This Unit parameter can also be specified by select ing the Select Unit setting 6 Select Unit Selects the type of engineering unit 7 Select Selects the scaled unit The unit displayed here is the type of unit selected by the Select Unit setting To specify a unit that is not displayed here specify a user defined character string as the Unit setting Moreover the setting specified here is displayed as the Unit setting 8 Span Selects whether or not to link the specified scaled unit to the SPAN settings Available Settings Linked Links the specified scaled unit to the SPAN settings Method of linking varies with the Setting Method setting 4 point setting The specified EU Value settings become the Upper and Lower SPAN settings Offset setting The SPAN settings are shifted by the offset specified by the Meas Value setting Not linked The SPAN settings specified by the Lower SPAN Upper settings in the AMP Settings window take effect d Setting Example ES Upper setting Lower setting Specified scaled unit 2 5000 2 5000 EU value setting 410 000 10 000 Not Linke
245. evel 40 lt Sampling Interval gt Count setting 3 times CHA 0 Trigger activated 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS Filter Can only be set when the Function setting is Memory The trigger is activated when the trigger signal is input for the specified time interval or longer The actual time is the product of the Sampling Interval and Filt settings Available Settings 1 to 255 Sample Trigger Condition Based on the Level OR or Level AND setting Measurement Sampling Interval Trigger level Sampling Interval 10 us Filter Setting 5 20 us 7 B0us _ Trigger activated j 7 PRETRIGGER This parameter can only be set when the measurement mode is RECORDER and the Function setting is Memory It specifies the pre trigger period as a per centage Available Settings 100 to 100 NOTE Based on the position where the trigger condition is satisfied as the reference point the Pretrigger function initiates data capture before or after that reference point A Pretrigger setting of 10096 equals the total capture time the Sampling Interval setting x Block Size setting Trigger activated Input signal Pretrigger is 096 100 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 8 This parameter can only be set when the measurement mode is RECORDER the Func tion setting is Memory and the Type setting is Slope
246. ew Folder To create a new file see Section 21 7 Creating a New File Press the EXECUTE key to initiate the RENAME operation 16 5 16 PERFORMING DISK OPERATIONS 16 6 Deleting a File or Folder To delete a selected file or folder perform the steps below For details about the SYSTEM SETTINGS window see Subsection 4 7 2 Setting Procedure System Settings Disk Operation File List W File Copy W File Rename V V File Delete System 1 4 Drive C HDD Available Folder N File Name 16 6 1456640 bytes Press Enter to select Exec to delete file Press the SYSTEM key to open the SYSTEM SET TINGS window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the FILE DELETE position under DISK OPERATION Press the ENTER key to open the FILE DELETE window Select the drive containing the folder or file to be deleted as described in Section 21 2 Designat ing an Existing Drive Select the name of the folder or file to be deleted To select a folder see Section 21 3 Designating an Existing Folder To select a file see Section 21 6 Designating an Existing File Press the EXECUTE key to initiate the DELETE operation 16 PERFORMING DISK OPERATIONS 16 7 Reformatting a Hard Disk To reformat a hard disk either an internal or external hard disk perform the steps below For details about the SYSTEM SETTINGS window see Subsection 4 7 2 Setting Procedure Part
247. ex perienced personnel is extremely dangerous Avoid using the recorder in extremely dusty or humid places Such use may cause a fire hazard due to electrical shock or current leakage Amateur repair prohibited Use prohibited INTRODUCTION Safety Precautions Continued WARNING Avoid using the recorder in places where it may be exposed to water such as bathrooms locations exposed to wind and rain and so on Prevent dust or metallic matter from adhering to the power adapter s plug Adhesion of foreign matter may cause a fire hazard due to electrical shock or current leakage NO Avoid water gt Watch out for electrical shock No foreign matter gt Watch out for electrical shock Never use a damaged power cord Use of a damaged cord may result in a fire hazard due to electrical shock If the cord becomes damaged order a new one to replace it vi Unplug the power cord from the socket Safety Precautions Continued CAUTION INTRODUCTION Do not use or store the recorder in a location exposed to direct sunlight or the direct draft of an air conditioner or heater Such location may impair the recorder s performance Cosy Storage Use prohibited Do not place coffee cups or other receptacles contain ing fluid on the recorder Fluid spilling inside the recorder may cause a fire hazard due to electrical shock or current leakage
248. falls to or falls below the specified trigger level Sample Trigger Condition gt Measurement starts Target channel CH 1 LEVEL 50 50 0 Trigger activated Win In It specifies the lower and upper limits of the trigger level for each channel When the signal input goes within or is within both limits the trigger condition is met and measurement is initiated Sample Trigger Condition Target channel CH 1 LOWERLEVEL 4096 ee UPPER LEVEL 70 2 Measurement starts 100 CH 1 Trigger activated 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS Win Out It specifies the lower and upper limits of the trigger level for each channel When the signal input goes outside or is outside both limits the trigger condition is met and measurement is initiated Sample lt Trigger Condition gt Target channel CH 1 LOWER LEVEL 3096 UPPER LEVEL 8096 e Measurement starts 100 CH 1 0 Trigger activated J M When the Combination setting is Level OR or Level AND 5 LOWER LEVEL UPPER Specifies the trigger level for the input signal in a range from 0 to 100 Lower SPAN limit 0 Upper SPAN limit 100 When the Mode setting is or 4 L Specify one Trigger Level in the range of 100 to 100 in 196 steps where the current Range setting s lower limit is 100 and its upper limit is
249. for use with calculation Calculation is performed on data captured in the recorder s internal memory After replaying the captured data define the range to be calculated using the cursors and then execute calculation from the Execute menu The calculated result will be saved at the final Block No Calculation Settings Memory 3 4 CH Function Formula Settings INT CH02 CH1 0 12345 CH2 142 CH440 432 SIN CH5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CH Lower Span Upper 1 2 0000 2 0000 2 100 00 100 00 3 2 0000 2 0000 4 2 0000 2 0000 5 2 0000 2 0000 6 2 0000 2 0000 7 2 0000 2 0000 8 2 0000 2 0000 lt lt lt lt lt lt 3 lt 44444444 Function Selects the On Off status of calculation functions for each channel Available Settings Off Disables the calculation functions On Enables the calculation functions NOTE When a channel s Function setting is On the Lower Span Upper and Unit settings specified at the AMP Settings window for that channel become invalid Therefore set the Span and Unit values using the Lower Span Upper and Unit parameters described in the following 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS FORMULA SETTINGS This parameter can only be set for a channel for which the Function setting is On It specifies a numerical formula containing up to 32 terms Available Functions Definition Addition Definition Square root Subtraction Integration
250. from both the starting and end points to the X axis as shown in the figure below Starting point Closed Calculates the area within the space enclosed by directly connecting the starting and end points over the shortest distance as shown in the figure below Starting point When calculating the area during X Y display all of the data captured in memory from the first point to the last point becomes the target of the calculation regardless of the cursor position DATA SEARCH A Data Search operation can only be set when all of the following conditions are met The measurement mode is RECORDER and The Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T A Data Search operation conducts a search of data captured in memory and then replayed Set the search conditions at this menu and then execute the search op eration after replaying the captured data When the search condition is met the status of the targeted point changes from a no match point to a matched point Once the starting point satisfies the search condition that point is ignored until it no longer satisfies it SEARCH METHOD COMBINATION 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS This parameter s setting is fixed to Level which lets you search for a data position that satisfies the specified Level condition A submenu for setting the Level condi tion appears below this parameter Selects the method for satisfying
251. g Unit Settings Input 2 2 CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit il Off 500 0 500 0 mV 500 0 500 0 mV 2 Of Engineering Unit Setting Setting Method 4 point s tting Meas Value EU Value Upper 1 0000 1 0000 Dec pt Lower 1 0000 Dec pt Set Value ooo Limits 2 0000 2 0000 Press ENTER to register Part 7 Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit 1 Off 500 0 500 0 mV 500 0 4500 0 2 Of Engineering Unit Setting Setting Method 4 point s tting Meas Value EU Value Upper 1 0000 Dec pt Set Value Limits 2 0000 2 0000 Press ENTER to register Enter select Exec register 11 4 11 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the EU VALUE position then press the ENTER key to display the current UPPER limit setting for EU output values 12 Use the numeric keypad or jog shuttle dial to input the UPPER limit setting for EU output values then press the ENTER key to register your setting NOTE 0 For details on how to input numerals see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 13 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the LOWER limit setting for measured values then press the ENTER key to display the current LOWER limit setting for measured values 14 Use the numeric keypad or jog shuttle dial to input the LOWER limit setting for measured values then press
252. gger Settings Window 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS 13 6 Arming the Trigger Only within the Specified Time Interval This section describes the procedure for setting the Time Gate parameter in order to arm the trigger only within the specified time interval For more information about the Time Gate parameter see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Settings window le te Relative Time RA Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Start Co ME Source e Time Gate position then press the ENTER key Type N Relative Time bination Edge AND to display its pull down menu Absolute Time evel Upper Use the arrow keys to select Relative Time or Absolute Time then press the ENTER key to register your setting Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Part 2 lt lt When the Time Gate setting is Relative Time gt gt 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Time Settings position then press the ENTER Time Gate Relative Time Uus V key to display the Relative Time Settings win Functi Relative Time Setting dow Start 5 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Start Time position then press the ENTER key to display the Time window 6 Use the arrow keys to move to the element of the Start Time setting you wish to change Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Limits 0 9999 hours minutes or seconds then pr
253. h gt Next Event gt Prev Event gt Action Expansion Compression V Statistical Calculation gt Arithmetical Calculation gt Printer Output Between Cursors gt Printer Output All Data Save To Disk Between Cursors V Cursor Position Move To Selected Position w Move To First Data Move To Last Data Call Other Cursor p gt Load Cursor Position V Save Cursor Positionw When the Record Settings Window s Display Mode Setting is X Y Action Statistical Calculation gt Printer Output Display Data gt SEARCH This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is YT conducts a search of the replay data and displays the specified position on the screen Next Trigger Displays the next position among data after the current position which satisfies the trigger level condition specified by the Data Search param eters in the Readout Settings window ACTION Prev Trigger Next Event Prev Event 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS Displays the previous position among data before the current position which satisfies the trigger level condition specified by the Data Search param eters in the Readout Settings window Displays the next event marker position after the current position This function however can only be used when event markers have been captured along with the measured data during data capture in the follow case
254. hannel number selected in Step 7 will serve as the data of the reference waveform c e e x x oN oo 5 Cc rnm c 15 4 15 SETTING THE WAVEFORM JUDGEMENT FUNCTIONS Set the Judgement Data File parameter only if you want to use a reference waveform file that has saved to a disk as the reference waveform for waveform judgement Once you have generated waveform judgement data and saved judgement data to the final Memory Block No there is no need to set the Judgement Data File parameter 8 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Judgement Data File position then press the ENTER key to display the window for designat ing the judgement data file Judgement Settings Memory Judge 2 2 CH Judgement Data File CHI v 9 Fi ia the filename of the target judgement Judgement Data File Drive EL NOTE b Available F Folder The generated judgement data is saved at File Name the final Memory Block No Comment For details on designating a file see Chap ter 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERA TIONS Press ENTER to select EXEC to register Part 5 10 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Reference CH position then press the ENTER Reference CH key to display the window for selecting a chan Range CH 9 nel number EU CH 10 11 Use the arrow keys to select the desired chan No of Da CH CH 11 nel number then press
255. hapter 10 CAPTURING DATA IN A MEMORY DEVICE Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the MEMORY key to open the Memory Settings window Capture Destination BEDES Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Capture Destination position then press the EN Memory TER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select Disk then press the ENTER key to register your setting Data Replay Settings Memory 1 4 NOTE For information about the Capture Destina tion parameter see Subsection 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Sampling Interval position then press the EN Capture Destination Disk TER key to display its pull down menu Sampling Interval 407187 Use the arrow keys to select the desired inter val then press the ENTER key to register your setting Memory Settings Memory 1 4 NOTE The available choice of Sampling Interval settings varies with the type of amp in stalled For information about the Sampling Interval parameter see Subsection 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window External 12 6 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Part 3 lt lt To manually save the captured data to disk gt gt 6 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the File Name position then press the ENTER key Capture Destination Disk to display the Data Save Destination window Sampling Interval 1ms 1kHz 7 Designate the letter of the d
256. he GND terminal of the signal source Unless the recorder is properly grounded noise may enter its input terminals Never attempt to connect a cable while high voltage of 42 4 Vp p or more is being applied Accidental contact with a cable in such status may cause electrical shock or short circuiting 3 11 3 PREPARATIONS 3 5 2 Connection to the M Voltage amp Temperature Amp Connect the signal input cables to the M voltage amp temperature amp as shown in the figure below E High potential side of signal input Low potential side of signal input High potential side of signal input Low potential side of signal input The table below lists the maximum permissible input voltage levels of the M amp 2 V to 500 V range 500 VDC DC AC Between and terminals 20 mV to 1 V range 100 VDC DC AC Between an input terminal and GND 250 VAC r m s AN CAUTION Prior to measurement be sure to connect the recorder s GND terminal with the GND terminal of the signal source Unless the recorder is properly grounded noise may enter its input terminals Never attempt to connect a cable while high voltage of 42 4 Vp p or more is being applied Accidental contact with a cable in such status may cause electrical shock or short circuiting 3 12 3 PREPARATIONS 3 5 3 Connecting the Logic Cable to a Logic Amp To co
257. he SOURCE setting is OFF in the TRIGGER SETTINGS menu s Trigger window In the case of other SOURCE settings measurement starts as soon as the trigger condi tion is met Press this key to stop measurement Displays and records if the PRINTER key is ON measured data which has been saved to the WR1000 s internal memory or a disk The output data corresponds to the Block No specified by the MEMORY BLOCK set ting in the MEMORY SETTING menu s Memory window When the trigger mode is set to MANUAL press this key to activate the trigger and initiate measurement Press this key to advance the chart paper without recording measured data until the key is released Press this key to print a list of the currently selected measurement condi tions on chart paper Press this key to cancel REMOTE status and thus disable remote control operation of the recorder by a personal computer or other external device Each time you press this key the cursor s traveling direction changes A lamp on the left of this key lights to indicate the currently selected direction 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 2 1 5 The Conditions Panel This subsection describes the conditions panel on the main unit s front panel 3 TRIGGER key 4 RECORD key 2 MEMORY key b JUDGE key 1 INPUT key 6 SYSTEM key m E nh i 1 2 3
258. he combi nation of red green and blue until you achieve the desired color When the desired color is attained press the EXECUTE key to register your setting Press the EXECUTE key again to replace the standard color selected in Step 3 with the new color Format Settings Record 2 3 Enter select Exec register 14 10 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 1 15 Changing the Line Width of Waveforms The Width function lets you select the line width of each channel for waveform display For more information about the Line parameter see Subsection 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Set tings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Width CH Color Zone position for the target channel then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired line width then press the ENTER key to register your set ting Format Settings Record 2 3 14 1 16 Printing a Reference Line in Each Zone To print a reference line in each zone perform the steps below The Base Line parameter can only be set in RECORDER mode For more information about the Base Line parameter see Subsection 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Format Settings Record 2 3 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Settings window Use the arrow key
259. he pages before inserting it in the long length Z fold unit s chart paper compartment Recording cannot be performed unless the chart paper s thermal sensitive surface faces the direction shown in the figure above The last meter of the chart paper is marked with a red line to indicate that the end of the chart paper is near 3 Insert the chart paper s leading edge into the main unit Pull out the leading edge of the Z fold paper in the long length Z fold unit and insert it into the space below the main unit s printer cover 4 Assemble the guide shaft To assemble the guide shaft attach a bobbin to each end of the long length pipe provided as shown below Bobbin Long length pipe 3 PREPARATIONS 5 Mount the roll paper into the main unit by fitting the bobbin tabs onto the cutouts provided in the printer cover A High Temperature Right after recording the thermal head may be very hot and cause burns or other injuries if accidentally touched Before replacing the chart paper allow the thermal head to adequately cool down 6 Pass the chart paper out of the main unit Pass the chart paper s leading edge as shown in the side view below and then pull it out of the printer cover s paper outlet Close the printer cover Side view gt gt 4 Chart paper Long length pipe Securely close both the right and left sides of the prin
260. he result of a calculation or the waveform judgement reference data file 4 14 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS When the Program Block setting is Reserve even if the final Memory Block No contains data such data will be overwritten BLOCK SIZE This parameter which can only be set when the CAPTURE DESTINATION setting is MEMORY selects the number of blocks in the recorder s internal memory By partitioning the internal memory according to the amount of time spent on measurement you can change the capacity of the internal memory Available Settings For the standard memory unit 256 kWords channel 256 kWords x 1 128 kWords x 2 64 kWords x 4 32 kWords x 8 16 kWords x 16 8 kWords x 32 4 kWords x 64 2 kWords x 128 For the optional memory unit 512 kWords channel 512 kWords x 1 256 kWords x 2 128 kWords x 4 64 kWords x 8 32 kWords x 16 16 kWords x 32 8 kWords x 64 4 kWords x 128 The WR1000 has an internal memory capacity equivalent to 256 kWords per channel with the standard memory unit or 512 kWords per channel with the add on memory unit The block sizes listed above represent the amount of memory allocated to each channel MEMORY EXPANSION This parameter which can only be set when the CAPTURE DESTINATION setting is MEMORY selects the expansion rate for allocating the recorder s internal memory This function lets you allocate the memory assigned to unused channels to the channels you intend to
261. heck This setting should normally be set to Disable NOTE When the LONG LENGTH Z FOLD UNIT setting is USE the maximum chart speed automatically be comes 25 mm s EXECUTE SETTINGS Executes a revised setting of the Language Long Length Chart Unit or RS 232C Echo Back parameter 4 7 5 The TESTS Window This subsection describes the TESTS window an example of which is shown below Tests System 4 4 System Information Firmware v Hardware v AMP V SYSTEM INFORMATION Displays the recorder s system information with respect to the firmware s version number hardware s version number and the amps Each set of infor 4 71 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS mation can be checked by displaying the corresponding submenu FIRMWARE Displays information regarding the version number of your recorder s firmware Sample Display Main Firmware Ver 1 00 OS Ver 1 11 Printer Firmware Ver 1 00 Pattern Ver 1 10 Press CANCEL key to close HARDWARE Displays information regarding the version number of your recorder s hardware er Displays information regarding the version number of each amp installed on your recorder 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 8 The EXECUTE Menu This section describes the EXECUTE menu which can be displayed by pressing the EXECUTE key during the replay of data that has been captured in the recorder
262. hen both cursors A and B are displayed use this key to select which cursor to move Each time this key is pressed the selected cursor switches between cursors A and B 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 4 COPY key 5 PRINTER key 6 MONITOR key 7 MODE key 8 START key 9 STOP key 10 MEM OUT key 11 TRIGGER key 12 FEED key 13 LIST key 14 LOCAL key 15 CURSOR DIRECTION key Makes a copy of the screen display Copying is initiated as soon as the COPY key is pressed As soon as this key is pressed the recorder prints a hard copy of the current screen display onto chart paper using a 1 1 scale factor NOTE For more information see Section 18 11 Making a Copy of the Screen Display Selects the ON OFF status of the recording of measured data When this key is pressed and its upper left lamp lights recording is enabled Press this key to display the measured signals as digital values for each group of eight channels in the Monitor window The Monitor window initially displays input values When any amp control panel key is pressed however its setting is also displayed at the Monitor window Selects the measurement mode Each time you press this key the mea surement mode switches between RECORDER and LOGGING modes The currently selected measurement mode is indicated at the top right of the Screen Press this key to initiate measurement provided that t
263. hen press the ENTER key to display the Insert Delete pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select Insert then press the ENTER key to register your selection Use the arrow keys to select the element to be inserted into your formula To input a numeric value a Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Value then press the ENTER key to dis play the submenu for numeric input b Use the numeric keypad or the jog shuttle dial to enter the desired numeric value then press the ENTER key to register the numeral To insert a channel number a Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the CH position then press the ENTER key to display the pull down menu for chan nel number input b Use the arrow keys to select the desired channel number then press the ENTER key to register your selection To insert a function or symbol a Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired function or symbol then press the ENTER key to display the submenu for channel number input b Use the arrow keys to select the desired channel number then press the ENTER key to register your selection Press the EXECUTE key to insert the selected element into your formula Press the EXECUTE key to insert the defined formula To consecutively insert a numeral channel number function or symbol first use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the right Press the CLOSE key to close the Calculation Settings window 12 23 12 USING
264. hich is regarded as us The parameter is specified on the basis of the data s first position as 0 and its last position as 10096 20 13 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS Part 2 lt lt When the Method setting is Position gt gt 5 6 Cursor Position Move to Selected Position 4 Move to Selected Position Method Position Move to Set Value Limits Enter register Exec to register 7 NOTE p For more information on inputting numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHA Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Se lected Position then press the ENTER key to display its window Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial to enter the target position then press the ENTER key to register your setting NUMERIC CHARACTERS To move the cursor to the selected position press the EXECUTE key lt lt When the Method setting is gt gt Cursor Position Move to Selected Position 4 Move to Selected Position Method Percent Move to n 96 Set Value 0 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Se lected Position then press the ENTER key to display its window Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial to enter the target position as a percentage then press the ENTER key to register your setting NOTE Limits 0 100 For more information on inputting numeric
265. ignal input is accepted Used for measuring an alternating current component of signal input that also contains a direct current component Used for measuring direct current voltage Measures the 0 V line instead of measuring changes in the signal input Generates a calibration voltage that is 1 2 full scale of the currently selected range instead of measuring the input voltage Available Settings M amp Off AC DC TEMP GND CAL No signal input is accepted Used for measuring an alternating current component of signal input that also contains a direct current component Used for measuring direct current voltage Used for measuring temperature Measures the 0 V line instead of measuring changes in the signal input Generates a calibration voltage that is 1 2 full scale of the currently selected range instead of measuring the input voltage The figures below illustrate the difference between AC coupling and DC coupling for similar signal input AC coupling AAAY DC coupling Input signals A ov AAAA eo uy e The frequency response of AC coupling and DC coupling are listed below by amp type V amp AC coupling 10 Hz to 50 kHz 1 3 dB typical DC coupling DC to 50 kHz 1 3 dB typical M amp AC coupling 10 Hz to 20 kHz 1 3 dB typical DC coupling DC to 20 kHz 1 3 dB typical 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS RANGE
266. ing replayed Call Other Cursor Summons the other cursor within the same screen as the cur rently displayed cursor Load Cursor Position Loads a previously saved cursor position and then moves the cursor to that position Save Cursor Position Saves the cursor s current position The cursor position is saved under the name of Position number n Up to 10 cursor posi tions can be saved CHAPTER SIMPLIFIED RECORDING IN REALTIME This chapter provides instructions for simplified Direct recording that is for directly initiating realtime record ing using the panel keys gt _ EEEEEEEEE 5 1 Overall Flow of the Setting Procedure 5 2 Enabling Simplified Direct Recording 5 SIMPLIFIED RECORDING IN REALTIME m 5 SIMPLIFIED RECORDING IN REALTIME During DIRECT recording the recorder records changes in the signal input onto chart paper in realtime that is as the changes actually occur Simplified Direct recording refers to DIRECT recording that is directly initiated by the panel keys For more information about other types of Direct recording see Chapter 8 RECORDING IN REALTIME 5 1 Overall Flow of the Setting Procedure The overall flow of the setting procedure for simplified Direct recording is shown below Detailed instructions are provided on the next page Measurement mode Main control panel Select measurement mode MODE key Amp conditions Amp control panel
267. ings Termina Address 0 submenu Timeout Terminator 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Ad dress position then press the ENTER key to dis play its pull down menu 4 Use the arrow keys to select the desired address then press the ENTER key to register your setting 5 f you are finished changing all of your GP IB set tings press the EXECUTE key to register them Timeout 17 4 2 Selecting the Terminator Code The Terminator parameter selects the character code used as the terminator during data transfer via the GP IB interface For more information see Subsection 4 7 3 The Option Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the Option Set tings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Change Settings on the right of GP IB Settings then press Option Settings System 2 4 GP IB Settings Change Settings V A 1 5 the ENTER key to display the GP IB Settings Timeout _ Address 0 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Ter Terminator minator position then press the ENTER key to dis play its pull down menu 4 Use the arrow keys to select the desired termina tor then press the ENTER key to register your set ting b If you are finished changing all of your GP IB set tings press the EXECUTE key to register them Timeout EO ENTER select EOl New Linecode New Linecode 17 6 17 4 3 Sel
268. internal MO drive or an external memory device connected via the SCSI interface unit Since its maximum measurement cycle is 1 second this mode is suitable for measuring slowly changing events such as changes in temperature For the setting procedure see Section 9 4 Enabling DIRECT Logging SAVE Operations 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME e The Relationship between Data Capture and the Stop Condition Source Setting How data is saved during a DIRECT SAVE operation varies with the Stop Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window as described in the table below Stop Condition Source setting Data capture method Data is continuously saved until the available space of the destina tion disk becomes full or the STOP key is pressed to terminate measurement Manual Internal External Measurement is terminated upon satisfaction of the specified Stop Condition If the Stop Condition is not satisfied before the available space in the destination disk becomes full data is only saved up to the amount specified and then data capture stops Furthermore it can take up to 1 ms for data capture to be stopped after the Stop Con dition is satisfied data is captured into memory during this time 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME 9 2 Enabling DIRECT Y T SAVE Operations To set up your recorder for DIRECT Y T SAVE operations perform the steps described in this section The procedure described only includes the steps directly
269. ion 20 11 Other Cursor Functions 20 11 1 Moving to the Beginning of Replay Data 20 11 2 Moving to the End of Replay Data 20 11 3 Moving to a Cursor Defined Position within Replay Data 20 11 4 Moving the Cursor to a Selected Time within Replay Data 20 11 5 Summoning the Other Cursor 20 1 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS 20 1 Overview of Cursor Functions This section describes the types of cursor functions and restrictions on their use The cursor functions can only be used during the replay of data that was captured in RECORDER mode 20 1 1 Types of Cursor Functions The cursor types and functions available vary with the Display Mode setting in the Record Settings window When the Display Mode Setting is Y T Scroll The jog shuttle dial can be used to scroll the display of memory data data that has been captured in the recorder s internal memory being displayed on the screen Cursor Readout The electrical potential time and frequency values frequency difference of the signal input indicated by the waveform cursor s are displayed at the top of the screen or in the Monitor window to the right Cursor defined Zoom Expands or reduces the memory data within the range specified by the waveform cursors Printer Output Prints the memory data within the range specified by the waveform cursors Cursor defined Save operation Saves the memory data within the range specified by the waveform cursors to a floppy disk or
270. ion param eters and Stop Condition parameters accord ing to the instructions in one of the preceding sections from 13 4 to 13 6 13 18 CHAPTER USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the overall flow of setting param eters related to recording 14 1 Various Settings Related to Display and Recording in RECORDER Mode Display Mode Setting Y T 14 1 1 Changing the Waveform Display Mode of Signal Input to Y T 14 1 2 Changing the Output Destination of Signal Input 14 1 3 Outputting Captured Data onto Chart Paper 14 1 4 Selecting a Predetermined Chart Speed Setting 14 1 5 Specifying a User Defined Chart Speed Setting 14 1 6 Printing Channel ID Nos on Waveforms 14 1 7 Printing Timing Markers or Event Markers 14 1 8 Printing a Scale on Chart Paper 14 1 9 Printing a List of Current Settings 14 1 10 Changing the Record Format and Zone Settings 14 1 11 Changing the Grid Setting 14 1 12 Enabling the Envelope Function 14 1 13 Prioritizing Display of a Specific Channel 14 1 14 Changing the Color of Waveform Display 14 1 15 Changing the Line Width of Waveforms 14 1 16 Printing a Reference Line in Each Zone 14 1 17 Changing the Print Interval between Annotations 14 1 18 Selecting the No of Characters in Annotation 14 1 19 Selecting the Method for the Control of Annotation Printing 14 1 20 Printing a Title at the Top of the Chart Paper 14 1 21 Printing a Message or Measured Values for Each Channel 14 2 Va
271. ion the name of the folder file remains the same but its contents are overwritten thus erasing its original con tents 7 Press the EXECUTE key to initiate the COPY operation 16 4 16 5 Renaming a File or Folder 16 PERFORMING DISK OPERATIONS To rename a selected file or folder perform the steps below For details about the SYSTEM SETTINGS window see Subsection 4 7 2 Setting Procedure System Settings System 1 4 Disk Operation File List W File Copy V _File Rename y File Rename Current Drive C HDD Available 1456640 bytes Folder File Name New Name File Name DEFAULT Press Enter to select Exec to change file name Press the SYSTEM key to open the SYSTEM SET TINGS window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the FILE RENAME position under DISK OPERATION Press the ENTER key to open the FILE RENAME window Under CURRENT select the drive containing the folder or file to be renamed as described in Section 21 2 Designating an Existing Drive Under CURRENT select the name of the folder or file to be renamed To select a folder see Section 21 3 Designating an Existing Folder To select a file see Section 21 6 Designating an Existing File Under NEW select the new name of the folder or file using the numeric keypad arrow keys or jog shuttle dial To create a new folder see Section 21 5 Creat ing a N
272. ion then press the ENTER key to display the Insert Delete pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select Insert then press the ENTER key to register your selection Select the element to be inserted To input a numeric value a Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Value then press the ENTER key to dis play the submenu for numeric input b Use the numeric keypad or the jog shuttle dial to enter the desired numeric value then press the ENTER key to register the numeral To insert a channel number a Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the CH position then press the ENTER key to display the pull down menu for chan nel number input b Use the arrow keys to select the desired channel number then press the ENTER key to register your selection 12 25 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Part 6 Calculation Settings Memory 3 4 CH Lower Span Upper Unit 2 0000 2 0000 V Seen Setho EERP 2 0000 Lower 2 0000 Unit V Part 7 Calculation Settings Memory 3 4 CH Lower Span Upper 2 0000 Upper 2 TN Dec pt Set Value Limits s 2 2000 2 Doo on Press ENTER to register 12 26 To insert a function or symbol a Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired function or symbol then press the ENTER key to display the submenu for channel number input b Use the arrow keys to select the desired channel number then press the ENTER key to regis
273. ioritizing Display of a Specific 14 9 14 1 14 Changing the Color of Waveform Display 14 10 14 1 15 Changing the Line Width of Waveforms 14 11 14 1 16 Printing a Reference Line in Each 20 14 11 14 1 17 Changing the Print Interval between Annotations 14 12 14 1 18 Selecting the No of Characters in Annotation 14 13 14 1 19 Selecting the Method for the Control of Annotation Printing 14 13 14 1 20 Printing a Title at the Top of the Chart 14 14 14 1 21 Printing a Message or Measured Values for Each Channel 14 15 14 2 Various Settings Related to Display and Recording in RECORDER Mode Display Mode Setting ucc ti tette rta eot reed Retirer et posed sh anida aaea id 14 16 14 2 1 Changing the Waveform Display Mode of Signal Input to X Y 14 16 14 2 2 Changing the Output Destination of Signal Input 14 16 xi CONTENTS 15 16 17 18 14 2 3 Printing a List of Current Settings 14 16 14 2 4 Changing the Grid Settings r
274. is function determines how many times or how long to ignore the targeted point s from the time the Level condition is first satisfied until the condition se lected by the Trigger Counter parameter is satisfied Count Searches for the position which has satisfied the Level condition for the Filter specified number of times Available Settings 1 to 255 count Searches for the position which has satisfied the Level condition for at least the specified time interval The actual time is the product of this Filter setting and the Sample Interval setting Available Settings 1 to 255 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 4 The Trigger Menu This section describes the menu and window accessed via the TRIGGER key on the conditions panel 4 4 1 The Trigger Menu s Tree Structure TRIGGER SETTINGS TIME GATE DISABLE RELATIVE TIME L SET TIME ABSOLUTE TIME SET TIME L FUNCTION RECORD r ACTION START CONDITION L SOURCE I OFF INTERNAL L COMBINATION LEVEL OR See Note 1 Trigger Counter L Count LEVEL AND See Note 1 Trigger Counter Count I EDGE OR H See Note 1 EDGE AND MANUAL See Note 1 EXTERNAL STOP CONDITION L SOURCE OFF I INTERNAL L COMBINATION I LEVEL OR See Note 1 Trigger Count
275. ition it becomes a triggered channel Sample S lt Trigger Condition gt ed Measurement starts MODE LEVEL CHA CH T H 20 e CH2 409 CHS 60 CH3 60 CH 2 40 CH 4 80 CH 2096 Trigger activated 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS The operation of this trigger condition varies with its MODE setting 4 MODE This parameter selects the trigger condition for each channel according to the Com bination setting It can only be set in the following cases When the Function setting is DIRECT and the Source setting is Internal or When the Function setting is Memory the Source setting is Internal and the Type setting is Normal Available Settings Off When a channel s MODE setting is OFF it will not be affected by the cur rently selected COMBINATION setting TH This Mode setting cannot be used by any channel for which the Range parameter is a temperature setting When the MODE setting is T H the start of measurement is triggered when the signal input rises to or rises above the specified trigger level Sample Trigger Condition Measurement ela Target channel CH 1 LEVEL 60 60 CH 1 0 _ Trigger activated J IL This Mode setting cannot be used by any channel for which the Range parameter is a temperature setting When the MODE setting is L L the trigger is activated when the signal input
276. ition then press the ENTER key to display its setting window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Upper position then press the ENTER key to 50 200 my display the Lower Span Upper Settings window U L Limits Settings Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to Fy 100 00 gether with the jog shuttle dial to enter the de LON Set value sired Upper value then press the ENTER key ne to register your setting Limits 110 00 110 00 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Press ENTER to register Lower position then set its value as described in Steps 9 and 10 After setting both the Upper and Lower values press the EXECUTE key to register both set tings Judgement Settings Direct Judge 1 2 13 The specified waveform operation will be ex ecuted when measurement is initiated NOTE The result of the waveform judgement opera tion is output as a pulse from the REMOTE connector s JUDGE Output terminal 15 3 15 SETTING THE WAVEFORM JUDGEMENT FUNCTIONS 15 2 Performing a Waveform Judgement Operation during MEMORY Measurement This section describes how to perform a waveform judgement operation during MEMORY measurement Dur ing MEMORY measurement judgement data is generated out of the reference waveform and then waveform judgement is based on that judgement data This procedure can only be set when all of the following conditions are met The measurem
277. key to dis play its pull down menu Format Settings Record 2 3 Format 1 Division 1 Division Zone CH 2Divisions bne CH Color 1 CHI 4 Divisions 9 CH9 E 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired number 2 CH 8 Divisions 10 CH10 gy of zones then press the ENTER key to register 3 No 11 CH11 gy your setting 4 CHF W 12 CH12 E 14 20 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 3 4 Assigning a Channel to a Display Zone To assign a channel number for display in a certain zone set the CH parameter as described below This procedure can only be performed for LOGGING mode For more information about the Logging interval function see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Setting Procedure Format Settings Record 2 3 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Set tings window Format 16 Divisions 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the CH position of the target Zone No then press the Zona CH Color Zone CH Color ENTER key to display its pull down menu 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired Channel No then press the ENTER key to register your setting 1 RM 9 CH9 10 CH 10 11 CH 11 12 CH 12 13 CH 13 14 CH 14 15 CH 15 16 Logic 14 3 5 Changing the Text Color of Each Zone The Color function lets you select the color of text displayed in each zone This function can only be set for LOGGING mode For more informa
278. key to register your Data Save Destination setting Data Type 8 Select the destination drive as described in e Section 21 2 Designating an Existing Drive ries 9 Select the destination folder only if you wish to vailable Text 455104 bytes U save the data to a file inside a folder Folder File Name DEFAULT GBD Press ENTER to select Exec to start save operation To select an existing folder see Section 21 3 Designating an Existing Folder To create a new folder see Section 21 5 Creating a New Folder 20 9 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS 10 Select an existing file to be overwritten or create a new file To select an existing file see Section 21 6 Designating an Existing File To create a new file see Section 21 7 Creat ing a New File To save the data to the specified destination press the EXECUTE key 20 9 Saving the Cursor Position This section explains how to save the position of the cursor displayed on the memory data being replayed This function can only be used when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T For more information about the Cursor defined Print function see Section 4 8 The EXECUTE Menu The following procedure assumes that memory data has already been captured and is being replayed and that the cursor has already been displayed and moved Setting Procedure
279. l level In the event that the print density fluctuates too often reduce the solid fill area of recording by such means as changing the Record Format setting lowering the print density and so on 3 12 Notes on Temperature Measurement When measuring temperature over a channel equipped with an M type amp observe the following precau tions e This recorder is provided with vents and an exhaust port for the cooling fan To ensure that these openings are never blocked always allow a space of at least 30 cm on all sides of the recorder e For stabilized temperature measurement allow the recorder to warm up for at least 30 minutes after turning it on e Exposure of the M amp s input terminals to direct drafts direct sunlight or abrupt changes in temperature may impair the equilibrium of the input parts and result in measurement errors To measure temperature in such an environment take appropriate countermeasures such as changing the installation site of the re corder 3 PREPARATIONS CHAPTER DESCRIPTION OF MENUS This chapter provides a description of each menu M Structure of the Menus The Input Menu The Input Menu s Tree Structure The AMP SETTINGS Window The ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS Window The Memory Menu 1 The Memory Menu s Tree Structure 2 The MEMORY SETTINGS Window 3 The REPLAY SETTINGS Window 4 5 on The CALCULATION SETTINGS Window The READOUT SETTING
280. l through the available folders or files vertically To display the time of data capture press the gt key to scroll the list horizontally Setting Procedure Step 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the File Name parameter then press the ENTER key to dis Move to upper level folder gt play its pull down menu WR1000 CND Make new folder Make new file NOTE V7 In the pull down menu each folder name ap CND file pears enclosed in lt gt brackets Press to change display mode Press EXEC to move folder Press ENTER to select Next use the arrow keys to move to lt GRAPHTECs then press the EXECUTE key to move to that folder Move to upper level folder WR1000 CND Make new file Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to WR1000 then press the ENTER key to select the file named WR1000 The WR1000 file has now been designated as the Eel target file Press 5 to change display mode Press EXEC to move folder Press ENTER to select 21 8 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS 21 7 Creating a New File This section explains how to create a new file Sample Setting In this example a new file named WR1000 will be created inside the GRAPHTEC folder located in the hard disk at drive C The new file will be used as the destination file for a Save current settings operation at the System Settings window The hard disk can only be specified if the hard disk unit is ins
281. lay The Color function lets you select the line color of each channel for waveform display For more information about the Color parameter see Subsection 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Settings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Width Color position for the target channel then press the ENTER key to display the Line Color Set ting submenu Format Settings Record 2 3 Enter select Exec register lt lt To simply select a standard color gt gt 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired color then press the EXECUTE key to register your setting lt lt To specify a user defined color gt gt When a user defined color is created it replaces one of the standard colors A user defined color can be created using a combination of red green and blue 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the standard color to be replaced then press the ENTER key to display the color definition win Width dow Zonet Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to ei ther red green or blue then press the ENTER Current key to display its window Set Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to gether with the jog shuttle dial to specify a shade then press the ENTER key to register your setting Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to adjust t
282. layed Language The Language function lets you change the recorder s display language For more information about the Language function see Subsection 4 7 4 The CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS Window NOTE 0 Executing the Language setting will reset the recorder If you have not saved your measured data or recorder settings be sure to save them before performing this setting Setting Procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the CUSTOMIZE Customize Settings System 3 4 SETTINGS window Language English US 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Long Length Chart Japanese Language position then press the ENTER key to English US display its pull down menu English UK 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired language Execute Setting s then press the ENTER key to register your setting 4 Move the cursor to Execute Setting s press the ENTER key to display the selected setting for con firmation and then press the ENTER key once again to register your setting b Asinstructed turn the power off and then on again to enable the settings you have made 18 10 Using the Long Length Chart Unit In order to use the long length chart unit the LONG LENGTH CHART UNIT setting must first be set to On For more information about this function see Subsection 4 7 4 The CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS Window NOTE Wy Executing the Long Length Chart Unit function will reset the recorder If you have not saved your m
283. lays the fall time of a waveform displayed within a cursor defined range of waveform data The calculation of the Fall Time varies with the direction of the cursors 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS When the cursors are in the time axis direction After determining the maximum and minimum values within a cursor defined range of data the target waveform is that which first passes their mid point value Assuming that the maximum and minimum values are respectively 100 and 0 the Fall Time is calculated within the range of 90 to 10 Cursor A Cursor B 1 Max value 90 Mid point N value 10 Min value Fall time When the cursors are in the voltage axis direction Regarding Cursors A and B as the maximum and minimum values respectively the target waveform is that which first passes their mid point value Assuming that the maximum and minimum and maximum values are respectively 100 and 0 the Fall Time is calculated within the range of 90 to 10 Cursor A Max value 9 4 Mid point value 10 Cursor B Min value Fall time Average Displays the purely arithmetic mean of data points within a cursor defined range Area Displays the area defined by data points within a cursor defined range 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS Calculation Method This parameter selects the method to be used for calculating the area It can only be set when all of the following condi
284. ll down menu Chart Speed 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired mode then press the ENTER key to register your set ting One Frame No Output 14 2 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 1 4 Selecting a Predetermined Chart Speed Setting This subsection explains how to set the chart speed to one of the predetermined chart speed settings or to a user defined chart speed setting The chart speed can only be set in the following case The measurement mode is RECORDER and The Function setting in the Record Settings window is Direct For more information about the Chart Speed V1 and V2 parameters see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Setting Procedure Record Settings Record 1 3 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Set tings window Display Mode Y T 2 Usethe arrow keys to move the cursor to the Chart Function Direct Speed position then press the ENTER key to dis Chart Speed play its pull down menu immi ftne immis gn 3 Use the arrow keys to select any chart speed ex NN dimer v2 cept for V1 or V2 then press the ENTER key to 5mm h 5mm min 5mm s External register your setting 10mm h 10mm min 10mm s 20mm 20mm min 50mm h 50mm min 50mm s 100mm h 100mm min 100mm s 200mm h 200mm min 200mm s 14 1 5 Specifying a User Defined Chart Speed Setting To specify one of two user defined chart speed settings as V1 or V2 perform the s
285. low For more information about the Record Format parameter see Subsection 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window Setting Procedure Format Settings Record 2 3 Record Format Press the RECORD key to open the Format Settings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Record Format position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select the desired for mat then press the ENTER key to register your setting lt lt When the Record Format parameter is set to a fixed format gt gt Format Settings Record 2 3 CH Color EC MEINT NNI Nu 02 03 04 05 06 07 13 14 15 16 Enter select Exec register 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Zone position then press the ENTER key to display its window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired Zone No then press the ENTER key to display the channel selection window Use the arrow keys to select the desired chan nel number then press the ENTER key to reg ister your setting for that zone Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until all channels have been assigned to zones then press the EN TER key to register all of your Zone settings 14 7 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS Part 3 lt lt If you selected Zone in Step 3 you must also perform Steps 4 through 7 gt gt 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Zone position of the target channel then press the
286. lter mode is displayed at the Monitor window at the right of the screen This completes the settings at the amp control panel To perform settings for another pre amp group return to Step 1 select a different pre amp group and then repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the newly selected pre amp group 5 SIMPLIFIED RECORDING IN REALTIME lt lt Select the CHART SPEED value gt gt ARTS PEED Sam s Select the numeric value of the CHART MEANE AY AA m Y A SPEED setting by pressing of the CHART SPEED value keys 1 to 200 at the CHART SPEED section Select the unit for the CHART SPEED value canes Select the unit for the value selected in the DW AY A A e ANC Ae A e e Ne previous step by pressing the CHART SPEED section s UNIT key to light the lamp of the desired unit This completes the set tings at the CHART SPEED section Step lt lt Turn on the printer gt gt oa NODE EVENT J 9 PRINTER To turn on the printer press the main control panel s e C Kec PRINTER key The lamp at the upper right of the key i mmm lights during PRINTER On status A amp B CURSOR DIRECTION of Co REMOTE mE o Step 10 lt lt Initiate measurement gt gt SA Voeren 9 PRINTER To initiate measurement press the main control ms panel s START key The lamp at the upper right of oas q E the key light
287. m While printer is off approx 90 VA 4 1 Hz signal printing at 10 mm s approx 110 approx 400 VA maximum While printer is off approx 120 1 Hz signal printing at 10 mm s approx 140 External dimensions approx 405 W x 336 D x 140 H m berances m excluding rubber feet and protu Weight approx 9 kg including 4 V amp units approx 10 5 kg including 8 V amp units 1 A factory installed unit that is ordered at the time of the recorder s purchase 2 Only when the long length Z fold unit is installed e Only when the internal Z fold unit is installed 4 When no factory installed units are installed A 2 Memory Functions Function Memory mode Memory capacity APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS WR1000 8 WR1000 16 256 kwords ch memory expandable up to 512 kW ch Sampling speeds 1 2 4 5 8 10 20 40 50 80 100 200 400 500 800 us 1 2 4 5 8 10 20 40 50 80 100 200 400 500 800 ms 1 2 4 5s EXT clock The sampling speeds differ according to the type of amp installed Logic amp from 1 us V amp from 4 us M amp from 10 us For temperature measurement the maximum sampling speed is 10 us regardless of the type of amp installed Memory banks Block 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 or 128 blocks Memory coupling Expand Waveform scaling WR1000 8 8ch x 1 4ch x 2 2ch x 4 or ich x 8 WR1000 16 16ch x 1 8ch x 2
288. mat Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Format Settings Record 2 3 Settings window Record Format 25mm x 8 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Grid 10mm Fine Envelope position then press the ENTER key to Envelope Off display its pull down menu Off 3 Use the arrow keys to select On then press the ENTER key to register your setting 14 1 13 Prioritizing Display of a Specific Channel The Priority Display function lets you prioritize the display of a certain channel during waveform display For more information about the Priority Display parameter see Subsection 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Settings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Envelope Priority Display position then press the ENTER Priority Display key to display its pull down menu Priority CH Use the arrow keys to select On then press the ENTER key to register your setting Format Settings Part 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Priority CH position then pres the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Priority Display Use the arrow keys to select the target chan Priority CH nel then press the ENTER key to register your Format Settings Record 2 3 setting 14 9 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 1 14 Changing the Color of Waveform Disp
289. menu appears for setting the frequency of arithmetic averaging The result of a Stat Calc operation will be stored at the last Memory Block No Data saved in the specified Memory Block is constantly overwritten so that only the most recent data is stored Please note that earlier data will not be retained Number of Means Sets the number of elements to be used for calculating the arithmetic mean The permissible range of this setting is 1 to 128 4 16 CAPTURE BLOCK 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS This parameter which can only be set when the CAPTURE DESTINATION setting is MEMORY selects the starting Block No for a data capture operation The specifi able Block Nos vary with the BLOCK SIZE setting BLOCK SIZE setting Standard memory 256 kW CH 256 kW x 1 Add on memory 512 kW CH 512 kW x 1 Specifiable Block No 1 128 kW x 2 256 kW x 2 1 2 64 kW x 4 128 kW x 4 1to4 32 kW x 8 64 kW x 8 1108 16 kW x 16 32 kW x 16 1 to 16 8 kW x 32 16 kW x 32 1 to 32 4 kW x 64 8kW x64 1 to 64 2 kW x 128 4 kW x 128 1 to 128 During measurement a graphic image indicating the status of each memory block appears in the Moni tor window enabling you to visually confirm which memory block is currently being used to capture data Red block Green block Gray block AUTO SAVE FILE NAME AUTO SAVE Now capturing
290. mp 3 6 Connecting the Recorder to a Power Supply 3 6 1 Connecting to an AC Power Supply 3 6 2 Connecting to a DC Power Supply 3 7 Loading Chart Paper 3 7 1 Loading Roll Paper 3 7 2 Mounting the Internal Z Fold Unit 3 7 3 Loading Z Fold Paper in the Long Length Z Fold Unit 3 8 Attaching the Writing Table 3 9 Changing the Display Language 3 10 Momentary Interruption of the AC Power Supply 3 11 Protecting the Thermal Printhead 3 12 Notes on Temperature Measurement 3 PREPARATIONS 3 1 The Working Environment 3 1 1 Choosing an Installation Site 1 2 3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Be sure to operate the WR1000 within the following ranges Temperature 0 to 40 C 5 to 35 C if using the printer Humidity 30 to 80 RH Environment Avoid using the WR1000 in the following locations Locations exposed to high temperature and or high humidity such as in direct sunlight or near heating equipment Locations subject to excessive salt spray or heavy fumes from corrosive gas or organic solvents Excessively dusty locations Locations subject to strong vibrations or shock Locations subject to surge voltages and or electromagnetic interference Installation Category Excessive Voltage Category This recorder conforms to Installation Category II local level electrical device portable device etc as defined in the IEC664 standard AN CAUTION In case of condensation When the reco
291. n control panel s MODE EVENT PUES key to select A B the A B lamp lights and then C gt 2 COPY MONITOR define the target area for the Area Statistical Calculation operation LIST TRIGGER FEED MEM OUT 12 27 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Part 3 Eie Action Expansion Compression w Statistical Calculation P Arithmetical Calculation gt Printer Output 12 28 Press the EXECUTE key to open the Execute menu Next use the arrow keys to select Sta tistical Calculation and press the ENTER key to execute the specified operation After the calculation is completed the calculated result is displayed on the screen 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the overall flow of setting param eters related to trigger operations SSS Say 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 Disabling the Trigger Function Activating the Trigger by the TRIGGER Key Activating the Trigger by an Externally Supplied REMOTE Signal Activating the Trigger by the Signal Input s Voltage Level 13 4 1 Starting Stopping Measurement When the Trigger Condition of One Channel Is Met 13 4 2 Starting Stopping Measurement When the Trigger Condition of Every Channel Is Met Activating the Trigger by the Slope of the Signal Input s Rise Fall Time Arming the Trigger Only within the Specified Time Interval Sta
292. n menu Use the arrow keys to move to the desired logic group then press the ENTER key to display its v pull down menu Use the arrow keys to move to the desired set ting then press the ENTER key to register your Group 600018 setting for that logic group 1 4V TTL Press the EXECUTE key to register your set C 2 5V CMOS tings for all logic groups D 5 0V Contact Enter select Exec register 8 On 0 000 420 000 kgficm2 Logic Enable Threshold L Threshold Settings 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS 7 7 Setting the VERNIER Function To set the VERNIER function perform the steps below Setting Procedure RANGE POSITION Press the amp control panel s VERNI key At this CATT we NNN a Nw Nw paw ANA time the Span values for each channel are dis TANGE FOSITION played at the Monitor window Turn the jog shuttle dial to adjust the Vernier value to the desired setting which is displayed at the Monitor window NOTE W For information about the Span parameters see Subsection 4 2 2 The AMP Settings Window 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS 8 RECORDING IN REALTIME CHAPTER RECORDING IN REALTIM E This chapter describes how to set up your recorder to perform different types of realtime recording 8 1 Overview of DIRECT Recording 8 2 Enabling DIRECT Y T Recording 8 3 Enabling DIRECT X Y Recording 8 4 Enabli
293. n proceed to the desired window If the Replay Source is Disk do not attempt any disk opera tions while in Replay mode The disk may be damaged if you do so 10 5 10 CAPTURING DATA IN A MEMORY DEVICE 10 3 Enabling MEMORY X Y SAVE Operations To set up your recorder for MEMORY X Y SAVE operations perform the steps described in this section The procedure described only includes the steps directly related to enabling MEMORY X Y SAVE operations For other settings see the pertinent section in Chapter 11 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS through Chapter 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR NOTE 7 Before proceeding to the following settings be sure to first complete the settings described in Chapter 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS Setting Procedure Part 1 Select the measurement mode 1 Press the main control panel s MODE key to switch the mea Memory Settings window surement mode to RECORDER Capture Destination setting 1 Memory 2 Disk Part 2 Settings at the Memory Settings window 2 Press the MEMORY key to open the Memory Settings window 3 Setthe Capture Destination parameter 4 Setthe Sampling Interval parameter b Setother parameters related to data capture When the Save To setting is Memory Set the Block Size parameter Set the Memory Expansion parameter Set the Memory Chain parameter Set the Capture Block parameter When the Save To setting is Disk Set the File N
294. nal DC filter box s cable into the recorders DC LINE connector 3 Insert the DC adapter unit s connector into the external DC filter box 4 Torun the recorder on the DC power supply consecutively turn on the external DC filter box s switch and then the recorders DC POWER switch In the case that you are using the SCSI interface connected to an external device first turn on the external device and then turn on the recorder When turning off your system first turn off the recorder and then turn off the external device Connect the red orange vellow brown and green leads to connect the black gray white navy blue and sky blue leads to and connect the black and white lead to GND Red orange yellow DC FILTER BOX brown and green leads Connect to External DC power WR1000 DC power cord supply 12V 24V 0 in GND 7 Black gray white navy t blue and sky blue leads The shielded lead black amp white To the protective ground terminal is connected to GND AN DANGER Because a maximum current level of 20 A or more may flow through the cable in some cases use of a DC power cord that has a small diameter or is longer than 1 5 meters may result in overheating which is extremely dangerous When connecting the recorder to an external power supply be sure to use the DC power cord provided Before running the recorder using a DC power supply be sure to gr
295. nd connected to an external memory device such as an MO drive or hard disk drive ie Selects the interval for sampling data during measurement The win dow shows the SAMPLING INTERVAL as a time interval on the left and a frequency on the right Available settings vary with the CAP TURE DESTINATION setting 4 12 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS Available Settings CAPTURE DESTINATION setting is MEMORY When the CAPTURE DESTINATION setting is MEMORY the available settings vary with the type of amp installed If the channels are equipped with different types of amps the fastest sampling interval of the amp with the highest sampling interval becomes the recorder s fastest possible SAMPLING INTERVAL setting Moreover if the MEAS setting in the Input menu s AMP SETTINGS window is TEMP the recorder s fastest SAMPLING INTERVAL setting becomes 10 us Available SAMPLING INTERVAL Settings by Amp Type Amp installed SAMPLING INTERVAL settings V amp 0 20 40 50 80 100 200 400 500 800 us 8 10 20 40 50 80 100 200 400 500 800 ms M amp 0 50 80 100 200 400 500 800 us 8 10 20 40 50 80 100 200 400 500 800 ms Logic amp 10 20 40 50 80 100 200 400 500 800 us 10 20 40 50 80 100 200 400 500 800 ms For more information about the External setting see the NOTE on the next page NOTE When different types of amps are installed and measurement is conducted using the fasti
296. nd the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is X Y For more information about the X Axis and Y Axis parameters see Subsection 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Set Fomat Settings Record 2 2 tings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the X Axis position of the target XY pair then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 1 On cH2 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired channel 2 Off CH1 number then press the ENTER key to register your 3 Off CH2 setting 4 Set the Y Axis parameter in the same way by re peating Steps 2 and 3 14 19 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 3 Recording and Display in LOGGING Mode This section describes various setting procedures related to recording and display in LOGGING mode 14 3 1 Changing the Logging Interval The Logging Interval function specifies the interval for sampling data in LOGGING mode This function can only be set for LOGGING mode For more information about the Logging interval function see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Set Record Settings Record 1 3 tings window Logging Interval Second 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Log Destination Set Value ging Interval position then press the ENTER key List Print Limits 1
297. ndow 16 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial to input the desired Block No then press the ENTER key to register your setting NOTE For information about the Capture Block parameter see Subsection 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window For details on inputting numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANU MERIC CHARACTERS 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 1 2 Automatically Backing Up Data Captured in the Recorder s Internal Memory to Disk To automatically save the data captured in the recorder s internal memory to the specified destination a disk perform the following procedure This procedure can only be set in the following case When data capture will be performed by a Direct Save or Memory Save operation and When the Capture Destination setting is Memory For more information about the Auto Save and File Name parameter see Subsection 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the MEMORY key to open the Memory Settings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the 120 EM E ES CL EL EL EL HE Auto Save position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Aulo Savas Use the arrow keys to select On then press the Hle Names Off ENTER key to register your setting On Memory Settings Memory 1 4 Part 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the File Name position then p
298. nector WR1000 68 pin 50 pin con nector adapter Not needed WR1000 SCSI I F terminator setting MO Zip drive 50 pin connector WR1000 Connector adapter Connector adapter without terminator Connector adapter with terminator External device s terminator status Last device s terminator On MO Zip drive 50 pin connector WR1000 Connector adapter Connector adapter without terminator Cannot be used Connector adapter with terminator 1 Use a commercially available connector adapter 2 For the terminator equipped connector adapter use a product with a high byte active terminator Last device s terminator On 5 Connect an external device by inserting one end of the SCSI cable into the external device s SCSI con nector and its other end into the recorder s SCSI connector Only one external device can be connected Be sure to set the ID of an external device to 2 or more Device name Internal hard disk drive Magneto optic disk drive 2 or more External device 3 PREPARATIONS AN CAUTION Be sure to use a SCSI interface cable that is shielded To connect an external device use an interface cable that is no longer than 0 6 meters long When turning on your system first turn on the external device and then turn on the recorder When turning off your system first turn off the recorder and then turn off the external device NOTE y
299. nformation about a File 16 3 16 4 Copying ai File On ROUGE 16 4 16 5 Renaming ooi eine xta tire eux ES 16 5 16 6 Deleting a Fileor Folder rere diit ea pete dete eue eva Soc dani deb 16 6 16 7 Betormiatung a Hard eerta tea tege aee began bes Een a unes nido x ta usb exe So ER 16 7 16 8 Fomaitng a DISK du 16 8 16 9 Listing the Recorder s Existing Drives ssssssseeeennnnennnm enne 16 10 SETTING THE INTERFACE FUNCTIONS 1 74 sse 17 1 17 Selectingthe Interface Type caet carere tei 17 2 17 2 Selecting the New Line Code 17 2 17 3 Setting the RS 232C Interface Conditions sssini nin aaan 17 3 17 3 1 Selecting the Transfer Speed ssssssssssssssseseeeneeeeneen nennen 17 3 17 3 2 Selecting the Length of the DATA Byte 17 3 17 3 3 Selecting the Number of Stop Bits nennen 17 4 17 3 4 Selecting the Parity Mode sess nennen nennen nnns 17 4 17 3 5 Selecting the Handshaking Flow Cont Mode 17 5 17 3 6 Selecting the Time Out Interval enne enne nnne nnne
300. nformation about the selected file perform the following steps the figure below assumes that the SYSTEM SETTINGS window is already open For details about the SYSTEM SETTINGS window see Subsection 4 7 2 Setting Procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the SYSTEM SET i 1 4 System Settings System 1 4 TINGS window Disk Operation 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the FILE File List Y LIST position under DISK OPERATIONS then press the ENTER key to open the FILE LIST window 3 Selectthe drive containing the target file as described Drive A J FDD in Section 21 2 Designating an Existing Drive Available 1456640 bytes 4 Selectthe target file from the listed files as described Folder in Section 21 6 Designating an Existing File File Name DEFAULT CND 5 Press the EXECUTE key to display the selected file s information Press Enter to select Exec to display the list of files 16 3 16 PERFORMING DISK OPERATIONS 16 4 Copying a File or Folder To copy a selected file or folder perform the steps below When the name of a folder is selected as the source file name in the FILE COPY window that folder will be copied When an existing file name is selected that file will be copied For details about the SYSTEM SETTINGS window see Subsection 4 7 2 Setting Procedure System Settings System 1 4 Disk Operation File List v File Copy v File Copy Copy From Drive
301. ng see Subsection 4 2 3 The ENGINEER Do not link gister LK ING UNIT SETTINGS Window 11 10 CHAPTER USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the overall flow of setting param eters related to the capture and replay of measured data EU 12 1 Setting Procedures for Capturing Data 12 1 1 Saving Data to the Recorder s Internal Memory 12 1 2 Automatically Backing Up Data Captured in the Recorder s Internal Memory to Disk 12 1 3 Saving Data to a Disk 12 1 4 Performing Statistical Calculation on Data Captured in Internal Memory 12 2 Setting Procedures for Replaying Data 12 2 1 Replaying Captured Data 12 2 2 Replaying the Data of All Channels or Only the Specified Channel 12 2 3 Expanding Compressing the Time Axis for Replaying Captured Data 12 2 4 Saving Data Captured in the Recorder s Internal Memory to Disk 12 3 Searching for Memory Data 12 3 1 Searching for a Position of the Specified Voltage Level 12 3 2 Searching for an Event Marker 12 4 Outputting Data Being Replayed onto Chart Paper 12 5 Expanding or Compressing the Display of Data Being Replayed 12 6 Performing a Calculation Operation on a Cursor De fined Range of Captured Data 12 7 Performing Area Statistical Calculation on a Cursor Defined Range of Captured Data 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 12 1 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 1 Setting Procedures for Capturing Data This section describes various setting procedures for
302. ng DIRECT Logging 8 RECORDING IN REALTIME 8 1 Overview of DIRECT Recording During DIRECT recording the recorder records changes in the signal input onto chart paper in realtime that is as the changes actually occur Your recorder is capable of performing DIRECT recording in the two different modes described below e DIRECT Y T Recording Records temporal changes in the signal input as wave forms on chart paper For the setting procedure see Section 8 2 Enabling DIRECT Y T Recording e DIRECT X Y Recording Records the correlation between designated channels as waveforms on chart paper For the setting procedure see Section 8 3 Enabling DIRECT X Y Recording e DIRECT Logging sam cua cua Records temporal changes in the signal input as digital 00 01 19 asn 1548 7822 15 11 1544 7022 1511 1508 V h t S t t Soha ae eiui o alues on chart paper Since its measurement cycle is saw an a cim 1 second maximum this mode is suitable for measur 01 01 14 15 3 1544 78 22 1511 1544 7822 1511 1544 7 00 01 12 asn 1548 7822 15 11 saa Tea 1533 1544 in n h t m r t r h n CURT 6 g slow changes such as temperature changes 01 00 09 1511 1544 7822 1511 1544 7822 1511 1544 T H icm Dum Oma oem Dua e Om oum For the setting procedure see Section 8 3 Enabling 01 00 07 15 11 15 44 7822
303. ng SAM PLING INTERVAL setting of the amp with the highest SAMPLING INTERVAL setting each amp with a slower SAMPLING INTERVAL setting will sample data using its own fastest SAMPLING INTERVAL setting and any data between its own sampling intervals will be regarded as measured data of identical value Sample measurement Installed amp types Logic amp V amp and M amp SAMPLING INTERVAL 1 us 1us pey Measured p erae spese a Logic V amp M amp Sampled points 4 13 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS Available Settings CAPTURE DESTINATION setting is DISK When the Capture Destination setting is Disk the available Sampling Interval settings vary with the number of channels used to conduct measurement The table below lists the Sampling Interval settings that permit stable data capture provided that the Sampling Interval setting is at least 1 us When data capture is performed at a Sampling Interval setting higher than those listed in the table some of the measured data may be skipped during data capture If this happens the Skipped message and a count of the number of data points skipped appear at the bottom of the Monitor window during data capture In such case change the Sampling Interval setting to a lower value Available SAMPLING INTERVAL Settings by Channel Configuration No of channels SAMPLING INTERVAL settings 8 channels 20 40 50 80 100 200 400 500 800 us 8 10 20
304. ng is MEMORY and the SOURCE setting is INTERNAL selects the trigger type Moreover this Source setting cannot be used by any channel for which the Range parameter is a temperature setting Available Settings Normal When the TYPE setting is NORMAL the trigger condition is based on the level or rising falling edge of the input voltage Slope When the Type setting is Slope the trigger condition is satisfied and mea surement is initiated when the signal input passes the specified Upper and Lower Level settings within the specified time interval determined by the External setting Sample e Measurement lt Trigger Condition gt ii 100 Target channel CH 1 J 2 2 80 LOWER LEVEL 30 UPPER LEVEL 80 dT 10ms DIRECTION 4 MODE Input d V dT 8ms Trigger activated NOTE When the Function setting is DIRECT the Type setting is fixed to Normal f the slope of the measurement signal is extreme and one sample cannot be taken within the set range the trigger will not be activated 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 3 COMBINATION This parameter selects how a trigger condition is satisfied and the target channel s It can only be specified in the two cases below If the FUNCTION setting is DIRECT when the SOURCE setting is INTERNAL or If the FUNCTION setting is MEMORY when the SOURCE setting is INTERNAL and the TYPE setting is NORMA
305. nit to an AC or DC power supply that conforms to the rated range Connection to a non rated power supply may cause the main unit to overheat and break down 2 Do not block the vents on the main unit s panels Continued operation with the vents blocked may cause the main unit to overheat and break down 3 To avoid malfunctions and other damage avoid using this recorder in the following locations Places exposed to high temperature and or high humidity such as in direct sunlight or near heating equipment Operating range Temperature 0 to 40 C Humidity 30 to 8096 RH Locations subject to excessive salt spray or heavy fumes from corrosive gas or solvents Excessively dusty locations Locations subject to strong vibrations or shock Locations subject to surge voltages and or electromagnetic interference 4 Usethe chart paper supplied by Graphtec The print quality cannot be guaranteed if other paper types are used 5 Ifthe main unit becomes soiled wipe it off using a soft dry cloth Use of organic solvents such as thinner or benzene causes deterioration and discoloration of the outer casing 6 In the course of use the thermal head gradually becomes soiled which will lower the print quality If this happens it is recommended to clean it using the optional B 368 head cleaner kit If the print quality does not improve even after using the head cleaner contact your sales representative or nearest Graphtec vendor 7 Do
306. nnect a logic cable to a logic amp perform the steps below 1 Connect the round connector of the RIC 07 logic cable to an input terminal from A to D on the logic amp For the remaining terminals connect an RIC 08 alligator clip cable or RIC 09 IC clip cable depending on the shape of the point to be measured Apply the seal 0 that matches the amp s Attach the seal so that A channel group G is next to the black lead S i Brown c FA ATE Orange RIC 07 Black D RIC 08 or 09 25V max NOTE Contact point measurement cannot be performed using the RIC 07 logic cable RIC 08 alligator clip cable or RIC 09 IC clip cable For contact point measurement contact your sales representative or nearest Graphtec vendor to separately purchase a dedicated cable 2 Perform connections to the measurement points of the RIC 08 alligator clip cable or RIC 09 IC clip cable as indicated in the table below Terminal color Cable color Channel Red 2 3 4 Black Common NOTE To remove the RIC 07 logic input cable RIC 08 alligator clip cable or RIC 09 IC clip cable after finishing measurement insert a blade screwdriver into the connector as shown below to unlatch the cable gt 3 13 3 PREPARATIONS 3 6 Connecting the Recorder t
307. o a Power Supply This section provides instructions on connecting the recorder to a power supply and turning on the recorder These instructions vary with the type of power supply to be used AC or DC 3 6 1 Connecting to an AC Power Supply 1 Insert the power cord s female plug into the AC LINE inlet on the input output panel and insert its male plug into an electrical socket 2 To operate the recorder on the AC power supply turn on the main units AC POWER switch In the case that you are using the SCSI interface connected to an external device first turn on the external device and then turn on the recorder When turning off your system first turn off the recorder and then turn off the external device AN CAUTION Be sure to connect the GND terminal while referring to the Safety Precautions at the front of this manual It must also be connected when connecting an external device so that both the recorder and that device will share the same GND level When one or more external devices are connected to the recorder be sure to turn your system on or off according to the sequence described above After turning on the power after a hard disk drive has just been installed as an external device be sure to reformat its hard disk using the Disk Initialize function in the System Settings window For more informa tion about the Disk Initialize function see Sec
308. o the CH Annotation Channel Annotation position then press the CH ENTER key to display its pull down menu Amp Use the arrow keys to select the desired status User except Off which disables Channel Annota Amp amp User tion then press the ENTER key to register your Value setting Annotation Settings Record 3 3 Part 2 lt lt lf you selected User or Amp amp User in Step 3 you must also perform Steps 4 through 7 gt gt 4 Use the arrow keys to move to the CH position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu CH Annotation User Use the arrow keys to select the number of the CH channel for which you wish to print channel an notation Annotation Settings Record 3 3 Part 3 Use the arrow keys to move to the Channel Annotation input area then press the ENTER key to open the character input window CH Annotation User Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to CH CH1 gether with the jog shuttle dial to input a char O acter string that is no longer than the number Character V of characters specified by the Length param eter Finally press the ENTER key to register your setting Annotation Settings Record 3 3 NOTE For more information on inputting numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING AL PHANUMERIC CHARACTERS Press Enter to register 8 Repeat Steps 4 through 7 for each of the other channels as required 14 15 14 US
309. of F S Temperature coefficients Zero point 0 02 of F S C Gain 0 0196 of F S C Insulation resistance 100 MQ at 500 VDC Isolation voltage 2300 VAC for one minute between an input terminal and the frame Permissible signal source resistance Input bias current 1 or less 25 pA typical A D converter Sampling interval 4 us A D resolution 12 bits Common mode rejection ratio 100 dB typical at 50 60 Hz and a maximum signal source resistance of 500 Q Signal noise ratio 46 dB typical at 200 uVp p in the 50 mV range with the and terminals shorted Frequency response Maximum permissible input voltage DC coupling DC to 50 kHz 1 3 dB typical AC coupling 10 Hz to 50 kHz 1 3 typical Between 4 and terminals 5 V to 500 V ranges 500 VDC DC ACP P 50 mV to 2 V ranges 30 VDC DC ACP P Between an input terminal and GND 250 VAC r m s Input terminal type Safety socket two terminals APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS A 5 2 M Multi Input Type Amp Item M Multi input type amp Number of channels 2 channels unit Input configuration Input resistance Floating ground with unbalanced load input independent for each channel 1MQ 1 Input coupling AC DC TEMP GND CAL 1 2 F S OFF Measurement range Voltage 20 50 100 200 500 mV F S 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 V F S Temperat
310. olume of data has been saved to a hard disk and you attempt to save it all to a floppy disk or MO disk the portion of that data which exceeds the storage capacity of the target floppy disk or MO disk cannot be saved In such case first replay the target data and then perform a Cursor defined Save operation to save only the necessary portion of the data to a floppy disk or MO disk For more informa tion see Section 20 9 Saving a Cursor Defined Range of Data 12 15 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 3 Searching for Memory Data This section describes different procedures for specifying a Data Search operation for reading out the neces sary portion of replayed data Perform these procedures at the Readout Settings window For more information about Data Search see Subsection 4 3 5 The Readout Settings Window NOTE 0 A Data Search operation can only be set during Replay mode after replaying captured data using the MEM OUT key 12 3 1 Searching for a Position of the Specified Voltage Level To search replayed data for a position of the specified voltage level perform the steps below This procedure can only be set when the data has already been captured by a Direct Save or Memory Save operation For more information about the Search Method and Combination parameters see Subsection 4 3 5 The Readout Settings Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the MEMORY key to open the Readout Settings window
311. on 4 7 2 Setting Procedure Part 1 System Settings System 1 4 File Delete v Disk Initialize Disk Initialize Initialize mode 7 SCSI 10 0 Format HDD FDISK IBM DDRS Press Enter to select Exec to start format operation Part 2 System Settings File Delete W DS alicia V Drive Size Type Volume Label Press Enter to Exec to start fo 16 8 Press the SYSTEM key to open the SYSTEM SETTINGS window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Disk Initialize position under DISK OPERA TION then press the ENTER key to open the Disk Initialize window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Disk Initialize parameter and display its submenu Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to DRIVE FORMAT then press the ENTER key Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the DRIVE parameter and display its submenu Use the arrow keys to select the drive contain ing the disk to be formatted then press the ENTER key If you selected a hard disk drive HDD for the DRIVE setting in Step 6 above proceed to Step 9 in part 4 If the DRIVE setting in Step 6 is a floppy disk drive FDD however proceed to part 3 16 PERFORMING DISK OPERATIONS Part 3 Only if the DRIVE setting is FDD System Settings System 1 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the SIZE parameter and display its submenu Use the arrow keys to select the desired disk eee size then press th
312. on describes how to set the various interface conditions of the RS 232C serial interface which are specified using the RS 232C Settings submenu For more information about each of the RS 232C interface conditions see Subsection 4 7 3 The Option Set tings Window 17 3 1 Selecting the Transfer Speed The Speed parameter determines the speed of data transfer via the RS 232C interface For more information see Subsection 4 7 3 The Option Settings Window Setting Procedure Option Settings System 2 4 Remote I F RS 232C Length 57600 Parit Stop Bit s 76800 Flow Parity 115200 Timed Flow Control Timeout 230400 17 3 2 Selecting the Length of the DATA Byte Press the SYSTEM key to open the Option Set tings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Change Settings on the right of RS 232C Settings then press the ENTER key to display the RS 232C Set tings submenu Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Speed position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select the desired speed then press the ENTER key to register your setting If you are finished changing all of your RS 232C settings press the EXECUTE key to register them The Length parameter determines the number of bits in each DATA byte transferred via the RS 232C interface For more information see Subsection 4 7 3 The Option Settings Window Setting Procedure Op
313. order to look for a specific file Sample Setting In this example we will move to the GRAPHTEC folder in the hard disk at drive C This GRAPHTEC folder contains a file named WR1000 which will be designated as the destination file name for a Save current settings operation at the System Settings window The hard disk can only be specified if the hard disk unit is installed NOTE jr The same procedure is used for moving to an existing folder whether you wish to save data load data or perform another file related operation If the existing folders or files cannot all be displayed in a one page pull down menu press the V key to scroll through the available folders or files vertically To display the time of data capture press the gt key to scroll the list horizontally Setting Procedure Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the File Name parameter then press the ENTER key to dis play its pull down menu Make new folder Make new file NOTE V7 In the pull down menu each folder name ap CND pears enclosed in lt gt brackets Press to change display mode Press EXEC to move folder Press ENTER to select Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to SEUSEDSEHITIEG lt GRAPHTECs then press the EXECUTE key to m ve to thattolder lt WR1000 gt Every file inside the GRAPHTEC folder is now dis ii Pis ia played for selection new Tile NOTE jr To return to the previous folder
314. ormation about the Cursor defined Print function see Section 4 8 The EXECUTE Menu The following procedure assumes that waveform data has already been captured and is being replayed Setting Procedure Part 1 REMOTE o O PRINTER C 2 COPY MODE EVENT LIST FEED LOCAL OB OAB O A amp B 23 REMOTE o MODE EVENT O PRINTER SELECT COPY LIST C 4 FEED Cu Action Expansion Compression W Press the main control panel s MODE EVENT key to display cursors A and B in A B mode Press the SELECT key to select cursor A then turn the jog shuttle dial to move cursor A to the beginning position of the range of data to be saved Press the SELECT key again to select cursor B then turn the jog shuttle dial to move cursor B to the end position of the range of data to be saved Press the EXECUTE key to open the EXECUTE menu Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Save to Disk Between Cursors position under Action then press the ENTER key to display its window Statical Calculation V 6 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Arithmetical Calculation gt Format position then press the ENTER key to Printer Output Between Cursors gt display its pull down menu Printer Output All Data gt 7 Use the arrow keys to select the desired file for Save to Disk Between Cursors bd mat then press the ENTER
315. ormation about the time axis and the Output Ratio parameter see Subsection 4 3 3 The Replay Settings Window The Output Ratio parameter cannot be set for LOGGING mode Setting Procedure Memory 2 4 Data Replay Settings Replay CH Selected CH CH Select W Output Ratio Data Save x5 x8 x 10 Screen 12 14 Press the MEMORY key to open the Data Replay Settings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Out put Ratio position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select the desired ratio then press the ENTER key to register your setting When the main control panel s MEM OUT key is pressed to replay the captured data the replay of the time axis will conform to the specified Output Ratio setting 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 2 4 Saving Data Captured in the Recorder s Internal Memory to Disk The following procedure lets you replay data that has been captured in the recorder s internal memory and then save the replayed data to a disk either in an internal memory device a hard disk drive floppy disk drive or MO disk or in an external memory device connected via the SCSI interface unit This procedure can only be set when the target data has been captured by a Direct Save or Memory Save operation For more information about the Data Save parameter see Subsection 4 3 3 The Replay Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the MEM
316. ory Chain parameter Set the Capture Block parameter When the Capture Destination setting is Disk Set the File Name parameter Set the No of Channels parameter Set the Event parameter Logic setting NOTE 0 Also set other memory related parameters as required For information about memory related functions see Sub section 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window For details on how to set memory related parameters see Chapter 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Mode setting Lower Level Upper Record Settings window Display Mode Y T Function Direct Y axis setting Format Settings window Record Format setting Zone settings Start measurement Stop measurement Data Replay Settings window Replay Source setting 1 Memory 2 Disk Capture Block setting File Name setting Replay CH setting Output Ratio setting MEM OUT key 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME Part 3 Settings at the Trigger Settings window 6 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Settings window 7 Set the Function parameter to Memory 8 Set the Source parameter for the Start Condition and Stop Condition 9 Set the Type parameter 10 If you set the Source parameter to Internal in Step 8 also set the trigger conditions When the Type setting is Normal Set the Combination parameter Set the Mode and Lower Level Upper parameters When the Type setting is
317. ory Settings window 3 Setthe Capture Destination parameter 4 Setthe Sampling Interval parameter 5 Set other parameters related to data capture When the Save To setting is Memory Memory Expansion setting Set the Block Size parameter Memory Chain setting Set the Memory Expansion parameter Set the Memory Chain parameter Capture Brock setting Set the Capture Block parameter When the Save To setting is Disk Set the File Name parameter Set the No of Channels parameter Set the Event parameter Set the Logic parameter NOTE Dy Logic setting Also set other memory related parameters as required For information about memory related functions see Sub section 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window Trigger Settings window For details on how to set memory related parameters see Chapter 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Function Record Source setting of Start Stop conditions 1 Off Manual External 2 Internal Type setting 1 Normal 2 Slope 1 Combination setting 9 10 1 2 1 Mode setting C cH sening Cower dV Level Upper at seting Direction setting Mode setting Record Settings window Logging Interval setting Destination Printer Format Settings window Format setting Zone CH settings Start measurement Stop measurement Data Replay Settings window Replay Source setting 1 Memory 2 Disk
318. ory device is connected via the SCSI interface unit and The Capture Destination setting is Disk This parameter enables or disables the simultaneous capture of Event Marker printing data along with data capture to a disk either in an internal memory device a hard disk drive or MO drive or in an external memory device connected via the SCSI interface unit Event marker input is based on a logical OR operation between input via the REMOTE interface or input by the main control panel s MODE EVENT key Available Settings Off Disables the capture of Event Marker data On Enables the capture of Event Marker data This parameter can only be specified in the following case Either a hard disk drive or MO drive is installed as an internal memory device or an external memory device is connected via the SCSI interface unit The Capture Destination setting is Disk and The Logic setting at the AMP Settings window is Enable This parameter enables or disables the simultaneous saving of logic data while saving the analog amp data to a disk in either an internal memory device or external memory device connected via the SCSI interface unit Available Settings Off Disables the saving of logic data On Enables the saving of logic data 4 18 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 3 3 The REPLAY SETTINGS Window This subsection describes the REPLAY SETTINGS window an example of which is shown below REPLAY SOURCE
319. osition under Start Condition or Stop Condition for the logic amp then press the 5095 ENTER key to display its pull down menu 60 9 Use the arrow keys to select either Off or On then HHHH LLLL HHHH LLLL Vv press the ENTER key to register your setting Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 NOTE Wf Even though the logic amp trigger has been activated AND operation measurement is not started unless the analog amp trigger combination conditions have also been met 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Part 5 lt lt When an analog amp s Mode setting is H ort L gt gt Ti Setti Tri 12 10 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the ee VSEE e Lower Level Upper position under Start Con dition or Stop Condition then press the Type Normal Combination Level AN ENTER key to display its window CH Mode Lower Level Upper 11 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys 1 4 H 50 together with the jog shuttle dial to specify the 2 Set Value PD desired level then press the ENTER key to Limits 0 100 register your setting Press Enter to register NOTE W For details on how to input numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANU MERIC CHARACTERS lt lt When an analog amp s Mode setting is Win In or Win Out gt gt 10 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the ue Lower Level Upper position under Start Con dition or Stop Condition
320. ound the protective ground terminal to avoid electrical shock and fire hazards For grounding use a ground wire with a diameter of at least 0 75 mm When using the recorder in an environment where grounding is not possible ensure that the voltage to be measured is no greater than 50 V DC or rms 3 17 3 PREPARATIONS 3 7 Loading Chart Paper Your recorder can print on two types of chart paper roll paper and Z fold paper only when the long length Z fold unit is installed The method of loading chart paper varies with the chart paper type NOTE 7 If you have the writing table attach it after loading the chart paper For more information see Section 3 8 Attaching the Writing Table 3 7 1 Loading Roll Paper 1 Open the printer cover A High Temperature Right after recording the thermal head may be very hot and cause burns or other injuries if accidentally touched Before replacing the chart paper allow the thermal head to adequately cool down 2 Insert the roll paper bobbins into both sides of the roll paper s core When using the WR1000 to record on roll chart paper use PR231A thermal paper Before loading the chart paper remove the paper s outer packaging and then remove the seal secur ing the leading edge of the paper 3 18 3 PREPARATIONS 3 Mount the roll paper into the main unit by fitting the bobbin tabs onto the cutouts provided in the printer cover 4
321. our setting NOTE 0 Forinformation about the permissible range of UPPER and LOWER EU values see Sub section 4 2 3 The ENGINEERING UNIT SETTINGS Window For details on how to input numerals see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 9 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Dec pt then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 10 Use the arrow keys to select the Dec pt set ting then press the ENTER key to register your setting Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit 1 Of 500 0 5000 mV 500 0 500 0 mV 1M Engineering Unit Setting i Setting Method 4 point s tting Meas Value EU Value Upper 1 0000 1 0000 PEA si Lower 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 a _ n 410 000 100 00 Span Do not link 41000 0 10000 2 Off NOTE 7 For more information about the DEC PT pa rameter see Subsection 4 2 3 The ENGI NEERING UNIT SETTINGS Window Length 11 3 11 USING THE SCALING FUNCTIONS Part 5 Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 CH Lower EU Upper Unit 13 Of 5000 4500 0 mV 500 0 5000 mV IM Off Engineering Unit Setting Setting Method 4 point s tting Meas Value EU Value Upper 1 0000 SNO Dec pt Set Value Limits 2 0000 2 0000 Press ENTER to register Enter select Exec register Part 6 Engineerin
322. ove to Selected Position w last position of the waveform data Move to First Data p Move to Last Data Call other Cursor Load Cursor Position w Save Cursor Position w 20 12 20 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS 20 11 3 Moving to a Cursor Defined Position within Replay Data To move the displayed cursor to a specified position perform the steps below If two waveform cursors are being displayed this function affects only the currently selected cursor This function can only be used when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T For more information about the Move to Selected Position function see Section 4 8 The EXECUTE Menu The following procedure assumes waveform data is being replayed and that a cursor has already been displayed Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the EXECUTE key to open the EXECUTE Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Move to Selected Position under Cursor Position then press the ENTER key to display its window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Method position then press the ENTER key to Method display its pull down menu Move to Use the arrow keys to select either Position or Time then press the ENTER key to register your Information SS Percent setting Start Point End Point Press Enter to select NOTE p Exec to register The Position parameter is specified as the lapse of time from the data s starting posi tion w
323. p B terminal 4 Group C terminal 5 Group D terminal 1 Mounting removal knob Used for mounting or removing an amp unit 2 Group A terminal Input terminal for logic signals via Channels A1 through A4 3 Group B terminal Input terminal for logic signals via Channels B1 through B4 4 Group C terminal Input terminal for logic signals via Channels C1 through C4 5 Group D terminal Input terminal for logic signals via Channels D1 through D4 Item Description No of channels 16 4 channels terminal x 4 Input voltage range 0 to 25 V max single wire ground input Maximum sampling interval Threshold level TTL 1 4 V CMOS 2 5 V contact point 45 0 V 1 us 2 15 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 2 16 3 PREPARATIONS CHAPTER 3 PREPARATIONS This chapter explains how to prepare your recorder for operation C 3 1 The Working Environment 3 1 1 Choosing an Installation Site 3 1 2 Positioning the Recorder for Use 3 2 Notes on the Liquid Crystal Display Panel 3 3 Installing or Removing an Amp 3 3 1 Installing an Analog Amp 3 3 2 Installing a Logic Amp 3 4 Installing or Removing the SCSI or GP IB Interface Board 3 4 1 Installing the SCSI or GP IB Interface Board 3 5 Connecting the Signal Input Cables 3 5 1 Connection to the V Voltage Amp 3 5 2 Connection to the M Voltage amp Temperature Amp 3 5 3 Connecting the Logic Cable to a Logic A
324. r 1 Of 5000 4500 0 mV rent OFFSET setting for measured values 500 0 500 0 mV IM Use the numeric keypad or jog shuttle dial to 2 0 input the OFFSET setting for measured values Setting Method Offset s tting then press the ENTER key to register your set Meas Value EU Value ting Setting 41 0000 amp Set Value NOTE P Limite 200002 For information about the OFFSET param Press ENTER to register eter see Subsection 4 2 3 The ENGI NEERING UNIT SETTINGS Window For details on how to input numerals see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANU MERIC CHARACTERS Part 4 Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the EU VALUE position then press the ENTER key CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit to display the current OFFSET setting for EU t Of 5000 5000 mV output values 500 0 4500 0 mV V Use the numeric keypad or jog shuttle dial to 2 Off Engineering Unit Setting input the OFFSET setting for EU output val Setting Method Offset s tting ues then press the ENTER key to register your Meas Value EU Value setting Setting 1 0000 Set Value Limits 2 0000 2 0000 Press ENTER to register 11 8 Part 5 11 USING THE SCALING FUNCTIONS The following steps describe how to set the UNIT parameter for an OFFSET operation For the UNIT setting you choose either one of the predetermined settings or
325. rder is suddenly brought into a warm place from a cold place or similar situations drops of water form on the exterior and interior of the recorder Use of the recorder in this status will damage the recorder If condensation occurs leave the recorder to wait until condensation has disappeared without turning on the recorder 3 1 2 Positioning the Recorder for Use Be sure to lay the recorder on its side for use The recorder can also be positioned at an angle by using the tilt stand provided on the recorder s rear panel Basic position Tilted position Do not use the recorder in upright position When placed in upright position the recorder s cooling vents are blocked which may cause damage to the recorder 3 PREPARATIONS 3 2 Notes on the Liquid Crystal Display Panel Because this recorder s display panel employs an LCD Liquid Crystal Display its display status varies with the working environment NOTE y f the Screen Saver function is enabled it will shut off the screen display if you do not perform any key input at the recorder during the specified time interval If this happens press any of the recorder s panel keys to make the screen display reappear For more information about the Screen Saver function see Subsection 4 7 3 The Option Settings Window Condensation may occur on the LCD panel when the recorder is suddenly brought into a warm loca tion from a cold location and other similar
326. reen For the setting procedure see Section 7 7 Setting the Vernier Function Setting Procedure Part 1 AMP Settings Input 1 2 LOWER SPAN UPPER position then press the 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the ENTER key to display its pull down menu CH Scaling Lower SPAN Upper Unit t Off 250 0 250 0 mV v 2 Upper 250 0 4250 0 3 Off Lower 250 0 250 0 Unt 1 LV Enter select Exec register Part 2 AMP Setting Input 1 2 2 Use the arrow keys to move to the UPPER column then press the ENTER key to display gt gt _ _ its submenu CH Scaling Lower SPAN Upper Unit 3 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys with i Off Y the jog shuttle dial to input the UPPER SPAN 2 Off Span Settings value then press the ENTER key to register 3 Off Upper EN 4250 0 your setting Set Value 6500 6 Limits 250 0 250 0 NOTE hy Press Enter to register For details on inputting alphanumerics see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 7 SETTING THE AMP FUNCTIONS Part 3 Use the arrow keys to move to the LOWER column then press the ENTER key to display its submenu CH Scaling Lower SPAN Upper Unit Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys with 1 Off 250 0 250 0 mV v the jog shuttle dial to input the LOWER SPAN
327. ress Enter to register NOTE 0 If the Mode setting is Win In or Win Out also set the Lower Level and Upper Level values For details on inputting numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 10 Press the main control panel s MODE EVENT O PRINTER MODE C 3 c key to display the cursor COPY MONITOR LIST TRIGGER FEED MEM OUT 11 Press the CLOSE key to close the Readout Settings window Serch 12 Press the EXECUTE key to display the EX ECUTE menu Next Event gt Prev Event gt 13 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Next Level Match or Prev Level Match When you press the ENTER key the recorder searches the position that satisfies the trigger condition specified under Data Search in the Readout Settings window then displays that position on the screen NOTE A regular Search operation can be performed by displaying the Execute menu and a simplified Search operation can be performed using the lt and gt arrow keys To perform a simplified Search operation complete Part 4 above and then either use the gt key to move to Next Level Match point or the lt key to move the Prev Level Match point Once an Event Search operation is performed from the Execute menu the target of the simplified Search operation becomes an Event In this case if you wish to perform a simplified Search operation for a target Level return to the Ex
328. ress Manual the ENTER key to register your setting External Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Type position under Start Condition or Stop Time Gate Relative Time Time Setting W Condition then press the ENTER key to dis Function Memory Action Repeat play its pull down menu Lael is Use the arrow keys to select Slope then press ype ope omopination ge Normal ower Level Upper the ENTER key to register your setting KIINEN Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 NOTE Wf For information about the Type parameter see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window Part 3 Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 6 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the CH position then press the ENTER key to dis play its pull down menu Type Slope 7 Usethe arrow keys to select the target channel CH Lower dV Level Upper for the Slope Trigger then press the ENTER 0 0 key to register your setting 0 Sample 128ms 13 11 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Part 4 Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Lower dV Level Upper 0 d Upper MET Lower 0 ENTER select Exec register Part 5 Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Type Slope CH Lower dV Level Upper 1 0 0 v dT J Sample 128ms Set Value B Limits 0 255 Press ENTER to register Part 6 Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Type Slope 1 0 0 W d
329. ress the ENTER key to dis play its pull down menu 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired interval then press the ENTER key to register your set ting Annotation Settings Record 3 3 Print Interval 10cm 14 12 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 1 18 Selecting the No of Characters in Annotation To specify the length of the character string used for annotation perform the steps below For more information about the Length parameter see Subsection 4 5 4 The Annotation Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Annota tion Settings window Print Interval 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Length Length position then press the ENTER key to Title Annotation Set Value display its pull down menu Limits 10 63 3 Usethe numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial to specify a character string length within the Limits indicated below the Set Value position then press the ENTER key to regis ter your setting Annotation Settings Record 3 3 Press Enter to register NOTE W For more information on inputting numeric val ues see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANU MERIC CHARACTERS 14 1 19 Selecting the Method for the Control of Annotation Printing To select the method for controlling annotation printing flying annotation perform the steps below The Flying Annotation parameter can only be set when the m
330. ress the ENTER key to dis play the Auto Save Destination window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor the Data Type position then press the ENTER key display its pull down menu File Name Use the arrow keys to select Binary or Text then PA RA press the ENTER key to register your setting Designate the letter of the destination drive as ir m Em described in Section 21 2 Designating an Folder Text Existing Drive File Name DEFAULT GBD Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Memory Settings Memory 1 4 Auto Save On Data Type comment 3 Folder position then press the ENTER key to Press Enter to select display the window for selecting the destination Exec to register folder For details on how to designate an existing folder or create a new folder as the destination of the Auto Save function see Section 21 8 Using the Auto Save Function When all of the Data Save Destination settings are satisfactory press the EXECUTE key to register your settings 12 5 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 1 3 Saving Data to a Disk To save the measured data to a disk while the recorder is in Direct Save or Memory Save mode perform the following procedure This procedure assumes that the recorder has already been set up for a Direct Save or Memory Save operation as described in Chapter 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME or C
331. rious Settings Related to Display and Recording in RECORDER Mode Display Mode Setting X Y 14 2 1 Changing the Waveform Display Mode of Signal Input X Y 14 2 2 Changing the Output Destination of Signal Input 14 2 3 Printing a List of Current Settings 14 2 4 Changing the Grid Setting 14 2 5 Selecting the Compensation Mode 14 2 6 Selecting the Plot On Off Status for Each XY Number 14 2 7 Changing the Color of Waveform Display 14 2 8 Selecting the X Axis and Y Axis Channels 14 3 Recording and Display in LOGGING Mode 14 3 1 Changing the Logging Interval 14 3 2 Printing a List of the Current Settings 14 3 3 Changing the Number of Displayed Zones 14 3 4 Assigning a Channel to a Display Zone 14 3 5 Changing the Text Color of Each Zone 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 14 1 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 1 Various Settings Related to Display and Recording in RECORDER Mode Display Mode Setting Y T 14 1 1 Changing the Waveform Display Mode of Signal Input to Y T To change the waveform display mode of signal input to Y T perform the steps below The Display Mode parameter can only be set in RECORDER mode For more information about the Display Mode setting see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Setting Procedure Record Settings Record 1 2 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Set tings window Display Mode 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Dis F
332. rrent level of 20 A or more may flow through the cable in some cases use of a DC power cord that has a small diameter or is longer than 1 5 meters may result in overheating which is extremely dangerous When connecting the recorder to an external power supply be sure to use the DC power cord provided Before running the recorder using a DC power supply be sure to ground the protective ground terminal to avoid electrical shock and fire hazards For grounding use a ground wire with a diameter of at least 0 75 mm When using the recorder in an environment where grounding is not possible ensure that the voltage to be measured is no greater than 50 V DC or rms 3 16 3 PREPARATIONS Using an External DC Filter Box to Connect a DC Power Supply Use of an external filter box lets you reduce the electromagnetic noise generated during the operation of the DC power supply 1 Connect the DC power cord to an external DC power supply 12 VDC or 24 VDC Connect the red orange yellow brown and green leads to the terminal of the external DC power supply connect the black gray white navy blue and sky blue leads to the terminal of the external DC power supply and connect the black and white lead to the GND terminal of the external DC power supply There are five leads each for connection to the and terminals plus one lead for connection to the GND terminal so be sure to connect all 11 leads 2 Insert the exter
333. rting Measurement Before After the Trigger Is Activated Stopping Measurement at a Specified Time Interval After the Trigger is Activated Starting Stopping Measurement After the Trigger Is Activated the Specified Number of Times 13 10 Filtering the Trigger 13 1 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS 13 1 Disabling the Trigger Function When you do not wish to use the Trigger function perform the steps below For more information about the Start Condition and the Stop Condition see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window For details about the impact of different combinations of Source settings for the Start Con dition and Stop Condition see Subsection 4 4 3 Possible Combinations of Source Settings Setting Procedure Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Time Gate Relative Time Function Memory Action Repeat Start Condition Source Type Normal Combinatio Internal CH Mode Lower Le Manual External Time Setting W Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Set tings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Source position under Start Condition then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select Off then press the ENTER key to register your setting Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to also set the Source parameter under Stop Condition 13 2 Activating the Trigger by the TRIGGER Key To enable trigger activation by pr
334. ry replacing the power cord with a new one When using a DC power supply Check that the power cord is properly connected Check that the fuse for the DC power supply has not blown When the recorder is turned on measurement recording starts automatically After a while the screen display disappears Key input is not recognized by the recorder The printed results are too faint or too dark The waveform line is too wide Check the Power On Start setting Check the Screen Saver setting Check the Key Lock setting Adjust the print density using the Trace Contrast dial Check the Line Width setting Noise may be interfering with the signal input Set the Filter setting Nothing is printed onto chart paper Check that the chart paper is properly loaded with the surface to be printed facing the proper direction The trigger operation is not activated Check the level of the signal input Check the settings of the trigger condition Check the Time Gate setting The signals being input are not displayed Check that the signal input cables are properly connected Check the MEAS setting Check the Range or Span settings Check the installed amp units and the recorder s channel configu ration The signals being input differ from the waveforms being displayed and recorded Check that the signal input cables are properly connected Check the MEAS setting Check the Filt
335. s Window The Count parameter can only be set in the following case When the Type setting is Normal and The Combination setting is Level OR or Level AND Setting Procedure Part 1 Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Set tings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Trigger Counter position then press the ENTER Trigger Counter 0 Count key to display its pull down menu Pre Trigger emm Ooms Use the arrow keys to select Count then press Stop Condition Internal the ENTER key to register your setting 8 T H 60 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the numeral to the right of the Count parameter the current Count setting then press the ENTER key to display its window Count Fiter o Use the als keypad ts arrow Delay gether with the jog shuttle dial to enter the de Stop C oa 1 sired count then press the ENTER key to reg Limits 1 255 ister your setting Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 8 T H 60 Press Enter to register NOTE For details on inputting numeric values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 6 Continue to specify the Start Condition param eters and Stop Condition parameters accord ing to the instructions in one of the preceding sections from 13 4 to 13 6 13 17 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS 13 10 Filtering the Trigger This se
336. s Y T and The Record Settings window s Function setting is Direct For more information about parameters related to waveform judgement during DIRECT measurement see Subsection 4 6 2 The Judgement Settings Direct Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the JUDGE key to open the Judgement Settings window Function Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Reference Function position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select On then press the ENTER key to register your setting Judgement Settings Direct Judge 1 2 Part 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Reference position then press the ENTER key Mode On to display its pull down menu Reference Use the arrow keys to select the desired refer ence criterion then press the ENTER key to register your setting Good Judgement Settings Direct Judge 1 2 Part 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the CH position then press the ENTER key to dis play its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select the desired chan nel number then press the ENTER key to reg ister your setting Judgement Settings Direct Judge 1 2 Lower Span Upper Unit 250 0 250 0 mV v O I 4 c RAON 15 2 15 SETTING THE WAVEFORM JUDGEMENT FUNCTIONS Part 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Lower Span Upper Unit pos
337. s installed or an external hard disk is connected via the SCSI interface unit It selects whether to format a disk in a disk drive or reform a hard disk When neither an internal or external hard disk is installed the Initialize Mode setting is fixed to Drive Format Available Settings Drive Format Formats the disk in the designated disk drive When this setting is selected additional parameters appear for selecting the drive letter the disk format and format type FDISK Reformats the hard disk by recreating partitions and formatting them When this setting is selected the SCSI ID submenu appears NOTE The MO disk can only be formatted using the Drive Format setting Do not attempt to format it using the FDISK setting 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS Drive This parameter which can only be set when the Initialize Mode setting is Drive Format selects the drive to be formatted Available Settings A The floppy disk drive C through G An internal hard disk H MO drive onward An external memory device connected via the SCSI interface unit Size Type These parameters which can only be set when the Initialize Mode set ting is Drive Format respectively select the disk format or type of format ting method The parameter displayed varies with the current Drive set ting Available Settings When the Drive setting is FDD the Size setting can be set to 2DD format 720 Kbytes or 2HD format 1 44 Mbytes
338. s internal memory or saved to a disk 4 8 1 Tree Structure of the EXECUTE Menu EXECUTE menu accessed by pressing the EXECUTE key EXECUTE I Search Next Level Match Prev Level Match Next Event Prev Event m Action Expansion compression Between Cursors F Fixed Scale User Scale Statistical Calculation Arithmetic Calculation Printer Output Between 1 Printer Output All Data Printer Output Display Data Save to Disk Between Cursors Save Format Drive L File Name Cursor 1 Move to Selected Position Position Time 96 Move to First Data Move to Last Data Call Other Cursor I Load Cursor Position Save Cursor Position Appears only when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T Appears only when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is X Y 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 8 2 The EXECUTE Menu Display This subsection describes the various operations that can be executed from the EXECUTE menu which is shown below NOTE lyy If the Replay Source is Disk do not attempt any disk operations while in Replay mode The disk may be damaged if you do so When the Record Settings Window s Display Mode Setting is Y T Search Next Level Match Prev Level Matc
339. s of Source Settings Setting Procedure 1 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Set Tri i i rigger Settings Trigger 1 2 tings window Time Gate Relative Time Time Setting W 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Function Memory Action Repeat Source position under Start Condition or Stop Start Condition Source Type Normal Combinatio CH Mode Lower Le Condition then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 3 Use the arrow keys to select External then press Manual the ENTER key to register your setting External NOTE For more information about the REMOTE connector s Trigger terminal see Chapter 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR 13 3 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS 13 4 Activating the Trigger by the Signal Input s Voltage Level This section describes the procedures for enabling trigger activation when the input voltage satisfies the speci fied trigger condition of voltage level and slope direction This procedure varies according to whether the trigger condition must be satisfied by a single channel or by all channels For more information about the Start Condition and the Stop Condition see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window For details about the impact of different combinations of Source settings for the Start Con dition and Stop Condition see Subsection 4 4 3 Possible Combinations of Source Settings 13
340. s to indicate that measurement has been ee started O A amp B O gt DIRECTION FEED LOCAL REMOTE C DJ CO 5 SIMPLIFIED RECORDING IN REALTIME Step 11 lt lt Stop measurement gt gt ee To stop measurement press the main control panel s amer STOP key The lamp at the upper right of the STOP SELECT c key goes off to indicate that measurement has been O A amp B IM cursor stopped O DIRECTION STOE a gt lt lt Print a list of the current settings gt gt wove event O PRINTER If you wish to print a list of the current settings press OA SELECT os CO I the main control panel s LIST key OAB MONITOR CURSOR DIRECTION SP oft LOCAL REMOTE 5 O Step 13 lt lt Advance the chart paper gt gt J 9 PRINTER To advance the chart paper without recording con os Cc tinuously press the main control panel s FEED key OA B SELECT MONITOR E E until the chart paper has been advanced the desired 084 us distance then release the FEED key LOCAL REMOTE o 6 FLOW OF SETTING OPERATIONS f CHAPTER FLOW OF SETTING OPERATIONS This chapter describes the general flow of setting operations n
341. s to move the cursor to the Base Line position of the target Zone No then press the ENTER key to display its window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Func tion then press the ENTER key to display its Base Line pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select On then press the ENTER key to register your Function set ting 14 11 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS Part 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Base Line then press the ENTER key to display its window Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to gether with the jog shuttle dial to enter a value then press the ENTER key to register your Base Function On Line setting Base Line Set Value NOTE p 0 0 100 0 Format Settings Record 2 3 Base Line Zone 1 For more information on inputting numeric Enter select Exec register values see Chapter 19 INPUTTING AL PHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 7 Press the EXECUTE key to register your Func tion and Base Line settings for that zone 14 1 17 Changing the Print Interval between Annotations To change the interval for printing annotation on chart paper perform the steps below For more information about the Print Interval parameter see Subsection 4 5 4 The Annotation Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Annotation Settings window 2 Usethe arrow keys to move the cursor to the Print Interval position then p
342. setting Beeper Function On 18 6 Using the Beeper and Adjusting Its Volume The BEEPER function lets you select how the beeper operates For more information about the BEEPER function see Subsection 4 7 3 The OPTION SETTINGS Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Option Settings System 2 4 Press the SYSTEM key to open the OPTION SETTINGS window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the je On Start e BEEPER FUNCTION position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Beeper Function Use the arrow keys to select the desired oper Beeper Volume Off ating mode then press the ENTER key to reg Date Time 1 2 45 56 V ister your setting Error Part 2 Perform Steps 4 and 5 only if you wish to set the beeper s volume 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the BEEPER VOLUME position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Power On Start On 5 Use the arrow keys to select the desired vol Printer Off ume level then press the ENTER key to regis Beeper Function ter vour setting Beeper Volume Option Settings System 2 4 Date Time 1 1 9 12 45 56 W 10 11 12 13 14 18 4 18 USING THE BASIC FUNCTIONS 18 7 Enabling the Key Click Sound The Key Click function enables or disables the generation of a clicking sound whenever a panel key is used For more information about the Key Click function see Subsection 4 7 3 The OPTION
343. sition then press the ENTER key to dis play its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select the desired output destination then press the ENTER key to register your setting 14 2 3 Printing a List of Current Settings To enable the printing of a list of the recorder s currently selected settings on chart paper after measurement is completed perform the steps below The List Print parameter can only be set in RECORDER mode For more information about the List Print parameter see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Setting Procedure Record Settings Record 1 2 List Print Off On Press the RECORD key to open the Record Set tings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the List Print position then press the ENTER key to dis play its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select On then press the ENTER key to register your setting 14 16 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 14 2 4 Changing the Grid Setting To select the grid to be used for recording perform the steps below The Grid parameter can only be set when the measurement mode is RECORDER and the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is X Y For more information about the Grid parameter see Subsection 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Set tings window Grid 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
344. sor to the GRAPHTEC position then press the ENTER key to lt VOLT gt select the GRAPHTEC folder The captured data will now be automatically saved to Make new folder the GRAPHTEC folder Make new file CND 2file Press to change display mode Press EXEC to move folder Press ENTER to select 21 11 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS Sample Setting Using Auto Save with a New Folder In the example below a new folder named GRAPHTEC will be created in the hard disk with the drive letter of C as the destination for saving captured data by the Auto Save function A hard disk can only be selected when a hard disk drive is installed If the existing folders or files cannot all be displayed in a one page pull down menu press the V key to scroll through the available folders or files To display the time of data capture press the gt key Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Auto File Name position then press the ENTER key to display the window for entering the name of the new folder Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial to enter GRAPHTEC as the folder name then press the ENTER key to register your set ting The captured data will now be automatically saved to the GRAPHTEC folder lt VOLT gt lt GRAPHTEC gt Make new folder Folder name GRAPHTE gt Press ENTER to register 21 12 22
345. ss the ENTER key to register your setting Option Settings System 2 4 LCD Screen Adjustment 4 Screen Saver Power On Start 18 5 Starting Measurement Printing When the Power is Turned On When the POWER ON START setting is Enable measurement and printing if so specified starts as soon as the recorder is turned on How the recorder actually operates after it is turned on in Power ON Start status however varies with the recorder s current settings For more information about the POWER ON START function see Subsection 4 7 3 The OPTION SETTINGS Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the OPTION SETTINGS window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Power On Start POWER ON START position then press the Option Settings System 2 4 Beeper Function ENTER key to display its pull down menu Enable Use the arrow keys to select Enable then press the ENTER key to register your setting 18 3 18 USING THE BASIC FUNCTIONS Part 2 Perform Steps 4 and 5 only if you want the POWER ON START function to initiate both mea surement and printing on chart paper when the recorder is turned on 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the PRINTER position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Power On Start Enable 5 Use the arrow keys to select On then press the Option Settings System 2 4 Printer Off ENTER key to register your
346. ssssessseseseeeeeee eene nnne nnne nnne nnns 18 6 18 11 Making a Copy of the Screen nennen nnns enne 18 7 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 19 1 19 1 Using the Numeric Keypad for Alphanumeric m 19 2 19 1 1 Key Assignment of the Numeric Keypad 19 2 19 1 2 Numeric Example Inputting SPAN 19 3 19 1 3 Alphabetic Example Inputting a Title Character String 19 5 19 2 Using the Arrow Keys and Jog Shuttle Dial for Alphanumeric Input 19 6 19 2 1 Numeric Example Inputting SPAN Values sessesseeeeeennneenne 19 6 19 2 2 Alphabetic Example Inputting a Title Character String 19 8 PERFORMING CURSOR OPERATIONS 1111 sese 20 1 20 1 Overview of Cursor Functions 20 2 20 1 1 Types ot Cursor PUNCH OMS nte IE Rc e tt rte eat eredi 20 2 20 2 XeegPLrie EE 20 3 20 2 1 When the Display Mode Setting is Y T en aai 20 3 20 2 2 When the Display Mode Setting is X Y ssssssssseseseeeeeeeneennmeennennne 20 3 20
347. stalled Set the CH setting to OFF for each channel that you do not wish to display COLOR Selects the color for displaying text in a zone Besides 32 existing colors to choose from you can also create an original color In this case a submenu for color editing appears 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 5 4 The ANNOTATION SETTINGS Window This subsection describes the ANNOTATION SETTINGS window an example of which is shown below The parameters of the ANNOTATION SETTINGS window cannot be specified when the measurement mode is X Y or LOGGING Annotation Settings Record 3 3 Print Interval 10cm Length 32 Flying Annotation Title Annotation User TANK OUTLET TEMPERATURE DATA CH Annotation amp User CH CH 1 Channel 1 10cm PRINT INTERVAL Selects the interval for Annotation Printing Available Settings 10 cm to 100 cm in 10 cm units LENGTH Selects the number of characters for use in Annotation Printing This Length setting deter mines the maximum number of characters for the functions and settings below Title Annotation User and System amp User CH Annotation User and System amp User Available Settings 10 to 63 characters in 1 character units FLYING ANNOTATION Selects the On Off status of Flying Annotation When this parameter is On the annotation printing can be controlled from a personal computer Available Settings Off Enables printing
348. t 1 Select the measurement mode Part 2 Settings at the Trigger Settings window Source setting for Start Stop 2 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Settings window Conditions 3 Setthe Function parameter to Record 1 Off Manual External 4 Set the Source parameter for the Start Condition and Stop 2 Internal Condition o b If you set the Source parameter to Internal in Step 3 Set the Mode parameter Set the Lower Level Upper parameters e NOTE Also set other trigger related parameters as required For information about the trigger related functions see Sub section 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window For details on how to set trigger related parameters see Chapter 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Lower Level Upper Recording Settings window Logging Interval setting Destination setting Format Settings window Record Format setting Zone CH settings Part 3 Settings at the Record Settings window 6 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Settings window 7 Setthe Logging Interval parameter 8 Setthe Destination parameter to Printer NOTE Also set other recording related parameters as required For information about the recording related functions see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Start measurement Stop measurement For details on how to set recording related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 8 R
349. t the Function parameter to Memory 8 Set the Source parameter for the Start Condition and Stop Condition 9 Set the Type parameter 10 If you set the Source parameter to Internal in Step 8 also set the trigger conditions When the Type setting is Normal Set the Combination parameter Set the Mode and Lower Level Upper parameters When the Type setting is Slope Set the CH parameter Set the Lower dV Level Upper parameters Set the dT parameter Set the Direction parameter Set the Mode parameter NOTE 0 Also set other trigger related parameters as required For information about trigger related functions see Subsec tion 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window For details on how to set trigger related parameters see Chapter 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS Part 4 Settings at the Record Settings window 11 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Settings window 12 Set the Display Mode parameter to X Y 13 Set the Function parameter to Direct NOTE 0 Also set other recording related parameters as required For information about the recording related functions see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window For details on how to set recording related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS Part 5 Settings at the Format Settings window 15 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Settings window 15 Set the PLOT On Off parameter
350. t without opening the Span Setting submenu the Upper SPAN pull down menu automatically opens as soon as you enter the first character 3 Use the numeric keypad to consecutively input the following sequence gt 1 gt gt 0 gt 0 gt 0 gt 0 Before you begin check that the numeric keypad s NUM lamp is lit If the ALPHA lamp is lit instead press the SEL key to light the NUM lamp 19 3 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS When inputting a numeric value you can not change the decimal point s position or the total number of digits In Step 3 above for example even if you were to input 412 000 instead of 1 0000 2 000 would be the setting actually registered at the recorder Be sure to input a value that is within the Limits indicated below the Set Value pa rameter Press the ENTER key to register your Upper SPAN setting NOTE An error message appears when you input an invalid numeric value If this happens input the value again Part 3 AMP Settings Input 1 2 5 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Lower position and press the ENTER key to dis play its pull down menu Next repeat the pre ceding Parts 3 and 4 to set the Lower SPAN t Of 0 5000 value 2 Off Span Settings 3 Upper 0 5000 40 5000 Lower 1000 0 5000 Unit V V Enter select Exec register 19 4 19 INPUTTING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS 1
351. talled NOTE The same procedure is used for creating a new file whether you wish to save data load data or perform another file related operation f the existing folders or files cannot all be displayed in a one page pull down menu press the V key to scroll through the available folders or files vertically To display the time of data capture press the gt key to scroll the list horizontally Setting Procedure Step 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the File Name parameter then press the ENTER key to Move to upper level folder display its pull down menu Make new folder Make new file CND file Press to change display mode Press EXEC to move folder Press ENTER to select Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Make new file then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu lt Move to upper level folder gt Make new folder Make new file New file name Press ENTER to register Tomnmoou2l 21 9 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS lt Move to upper level folder gt Make new folder Make new file New file name Press ENTER to register 21 10 A B C D E F G H Using the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial input WR1000 as the name of the new file then press the ENTER key to register your file name The file named WR1000 has now been created in the GRAPHTEC folder in the
352. teps below The V1 or V2 parameter can be specified in 1 mm increments Setting Procedure 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Set Record Settings Record 1 3 tings window Display Mode Y T 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Chart Function Direct Speed position then press the ENTER key to dis Chart Speed V1 play its pull down menu V1 Settings 3 Use the arrow keys to select V1 V2 then press V2 5 Speed V1 v2 Settings the ENTER key to register your setting 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to V1 V2 CH ID Speed D P then press the ENTER key to display the Chart Unit mm s Speed V1 V2 Setting window ENTER select EXEC register 5 Use the arrow keys to move to the Decimal Point position then press the ENTER key to display its window 6 Use the arrow keys to select the desired decimal point position then press the ENTER key to regis ter your setting 14 3 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 7 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Speed position then press the ENTER key to display its window 8 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys together with the jog shuttle dial to enter the desired Chart Speed value then press the ENTER key to regis ter your setting 9 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Unit position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 10 Use the arrow keys to select the desired unit
353. ter 14 Press the EXECUTE key to register your set ting 13 USING THE TRIGGER FUNCTIONS 13 4 2 Starting Stopping Measurement When the Trigger Condition of Every Channel Is Met To specify the Level AND trigger or Edge AND trigger perform the steps below For more information about the Level AND and Edge AND parameters see Subsection 4 4 2 The Trigger Settings Window Setting Procedure Part 1 Press the TRIGGER key to open the Trigger Settings window Time Gate Relative Time Time Setting W Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Function Memory Action Repeat Source position under Start Condition or Stop Start Condition Source Condition then press the ENTER key to dis Type Normal Combinati Off play its pull down menu CH Mode Lower Ley Use the arrow keys to select Internal then press Manual the ENTER key to register your setting External Trigger Settings Trigger 1 2 Part 2 is only required if the Function setting is Memory 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Type position under Start Condition or Stop Time Gate Relative Time Time Setting W Condition then press the ENTER key to dis Function Memory Action Repeat play its pull down menu Start Condition Source Internal Use the arrow keys to select Normal then press MMW Combination Edge AND the ENTER key to register your settin Togis ary g Slope Trigger Settings Trigger 1
354. ter cover Recording without firmly closing the printer cover may not only lead not unsatisfactory plotted results but also cause such problems as paper jams 3 PREPARATIONS 7 Check that the chart paper is properly fed Before attempting recording check that the chart paper is properly fed by turning on the WR1000 and pressing the FEED key to advance the chart paper a distance of about 30 cm MODEJEVENT PRINTER Co SELECT o MP LLcunsoL DIRECTION Cu OA OB LOCAL REMOTE e When using the long length Z fold unit set the chart speed no higher than 25 mm s Satisfactory record ing results cannot be guaranteed when the chart speed is set higher than 25 mm s 3 PREPARATIONS 3 8 Attaching the Writing Table This section describes how to attach the writing table To detach the writing table perform the steps below in reverse NOTE Be sure to load the chart paper before attaching the writing table Chart paper cannot be loaded after the writing table has been attached 1 With the writing table positioned at an angle as shown in the figure below insert the writing table s two hooks into the printer cover s handles and then fasten the hooks to the printer cover by slowly opening the writing table to the horizontal position 2 Secure the writing table in place by tightening its setscrew Writing table s setscrew 3 PREPARATIONS 3
355. ter your selection 9 Press the EXECUTE key to insert the defined formula Press the EXECUTE key to insert the defined formula To consecutively insert a numeral channel number function or symbol first use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the right Press the EXECUTE key to register the formula you created 10 11 15 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Lower Calc Span Upper Unit position then press the ENTER key to display the Span Set tings window 16 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Dec pt then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 17 Use the arrow keys to select the desired deci mal point position then press the ENTER key to register your choice 18 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Upper position then press the ENTER key to display its setting window 19 Use the numeric keypad or the arrow keys to gether with the jog shuttle dial to enter the de sired value then press the ENTER key to reg ister your selection 20 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Lower position then repeat Step 19 to set the Lower Calc Span value 21 Press the EXECUTE key to register the speci fied Upper and Lower Calc Span values 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 7 Performing Area Statistical Calculation on a Cursor Defined Range of Captured Data The following procedure lets you perform Area Statistical Calculation on previously captured d
356. th and file name 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS RETURN TO DEFAULT SETTINGS Returns the currently selected settings to their factory default settings The factory default settings are listed in the table below Window Parameters Window Parameters AMP Settings Input DC Format Settings Record Format 200mm x 1 Range 500V Grid 10mm Fine Filter OFF Envelope Off Span 250 0V to 250 0V Priority Display Off Engineering Unit EU Off System Settings Key Lock Off Settings Lower Upper Meas Value Option Settings LCD Screen Adjustment 14 500 0V to 500 0V Screen Saver Off Lower Upper EU Value Power ON Start Disable 500 0V to 500 0V Beeper Function Off Memory Settings Capture Destination Memory Beeper Volume 6 Sampling Interval 10 us Key Click On Program Block Disable Block Size 2kW x 128 Memory Expansion x1 Memory Chain Off Stat Calc Off Capture Block 1 Auto Save Off Customize Settings Long Length Chart Unit Do not use Trigger Settings Time Gate Disable Function Record Action Single Start Condition Source Off Stop Condition Source Off Record Settings Display Mode Y T Function Direct Chart Speed 20mm s V1 Setting 10 0mm s V2 Setting 200mm min CH ID Off Marker Off Scale Print Off List Print Off DISK OPERATION Performs various types of disk operations such as displaying a file directory copy ing or ren
357. th the type of amp in stalled For information about the Sampling Interval parameter see Subsection 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window External 12 2 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Part 3 Only if statistical calculation arithmetic calculation or waveform judgement will be per formed perform the steps in Part 3 either during or after data capture 6 Press the MEMORY key to open the Memory Settings window Capture Destination Memory Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Sampling Interval 1ms 1kHz Program Block position then press the ENTER Program Block key to display its pull down menu Disable Use the arrow keys to select Reserve then press the ENTER key to register your setting Memory Settings Memory 1 4 NOTE py The final Memory Block No will be reserved for storing the calculated result If it contains any data such data will be overwritten Part 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Block Size position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select the desired block Data memory Settings size then press the ENTER key to register your Plock SRE MM setting Upon pressing the ENTER key the Memory Expansion Memory Block table displayed at the center of 4kWx 64 the screen changes to the currently selected 8kWx 32 Block Size setting 16kWx 16 32 kW x 64 kW x NOTE yi 128 kW x For information about the Block Siz
358. that if ignored could cause physical damage to this thermal arraycorder HIGH TEMPERATURE This category provides information that if ignored is likely to cause burns or other injury to the operator due to contact with high temperature ELECTRICAL SHOCK This category provides information that if ignored is likely to expose the operator to electrical shock gt gt gt gt gt Description of Safety Symbols The N symbol indicates information that requires careful attention which includes warnings The point requiring attention is described by an illustration or text within or next to the N symbol The S symbol indicates action that is prohibited Such prohibited action is described by an illustra tion or text within or next to the S symbol The symbol indicates action that must be performed Such imperative action is described by an illustration or text within or next to the symbol Safety Precautions WARNING INTRODUCTION Be sure to securely connect the recorder s power cord After checking that the Power switch is turned off connect the power cord s female plug to the recorder and then connect its male plug into the electrical socket Use of the recorder without the power cord securely plugged into the electrical socket may result in electrical shock due to current leakage Before running the recorder using a DC power supply be sure to ground the protective ground terminal L to a
359. the destination folder for a Save current settings operation at the System Settings window The hard disk can only be specified if the hard disk unit is installed NOTE 0 The same procedure is used for designating an existing folder whether you wish to save data load data or perform another file related operation If the existing folders or files cannot all be displayed in a one page pull down menu press the V key to scroll through the available folders or files vertically To display the time of data capture press the gt key to scroll the list horizontally Setting Procedure Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the File Name parameter then press the ENTER key to dis lay its pull down menu lt GRAPHTEC gt Make new folder Make new file NOTE In the pull down menu each folder name CND pears enclosed in brackets Press to change display mode Press EXEC to move folder Press ENTER to select Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to lt GRAPHTECs then press the ENTER key to regis lt VOLT gt ter your setting The folder named GRAPHTEC has now been selected as the target folder Make new folder Make new file CND Press to change display mode Press EXEC to move folder Press ENTER to select 21 4 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS 21 4 Moving to an Existing Folder This section explains how to move to an existing folder in
360. the trigger whenever this signal goes Low Pulse width at Low level 10 ms or more EXT SAMPLE Determines the interval for sampling data Data is sampled whenever this signal goes Low Pulse width 500 ns or more Repeated cycle 10 us or more An error occurs when the recorder is out of paper or 6 TRIGGER Output Outputs a CMOS type Low pulse signal whenever the trigger condition is activated 99 Output CMOS type Output pulse 10 ms or more 0 5V 7 M C ALARM Outputs an error signal Outputs a CMOS type Low level signal whenever an error occurs at the recorder when the printer cover is open Signal name JUDGE Output Function Outputs a Low level pulse when the waveform judgement condition is met Pulse width 100 ms or more 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR Remarks Output Open collector type loL 200 mA Vou 30 V EXT EVENT Prints an event marker Prints a High level signal while the signal is Low Pulse width Equal to or greater than the print interval Input CMOS type 0 5 V AC Line Fail Outputs an AC Line Fail message Outputs the signal below whenever the recorder switches from the AC power supply to the DC power supply When DC power is being supplied L Output CMOS type 0 5 V Ground level 22 3 22 USING THE REMOTE CONNECTOR 22 2 Assembling the REMOTE Connector The diagram below illustrates how to assemble the REMOTE connector It assumes
361. ther than 256 516 kW x 1 and The Memory Settings window s Program Block setting is Reserve For more information about the functions used in this operation see Subsection 4 3 4 The Calculation Set tings Window Procedure for Setting a Calculation Operation Part 1 Calculation Settings Memory 3 4 Press the MEMORY key to open the Calcula tion Settings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Off Function position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select On then press the ENTER key to register your setting Calculation Settings Memory 3 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Formula Settings position then press the EN CH Function Formula Settings TER key to display the Formula Settings win 2 Press the ENTER key again to display the Insert Delete window SQRT SIN LOG cos EXP TAN ABS ASIN DIF ACOS DDIF INT MEAN DINT Number of Means 0 ENTER select EXEC register 12 22 Part 3 Calculation Settings Memory 3 4 CH Function Formula Settings 1 Off 2 Insert Insert SQRT LOG ABS DIF DDIF P SIN COS TAN ASIN ACOS ATAN MEAN INT DINT Number of Means 0 ENTER select EXEC register 6 10 11 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Insert or Delete position t
362. ting 15 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Generate Judgement Data position then press the ENTER key and perform the steps described by the messages The generated judgement data will be temporarily saved at the final Block No of the recorder s internal memory NOTE hy To save the judgement data to a disk perform Steps 8 and 9 in Part 4 A waveform judgement operation can be per formed without saving judgement data to a disk When judgement data is generated but is not saved to a disk however the judgement data will be erased when executing a calcula tion operation or turning off the recorder Part 9 15 SETTING THE WAVEFORM JUDGEMENT FUNCTIONS Perform these steps only if you wish to save the judgement data to a disk Judgement Settings Memory Judge 2 2 Allowable Voltage Range 1 00 Allowable Time Range 50 Generate Judge Data p gt Judgement Data Save 17 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Judgement Data Save position then press the ENTER key to display the window for designat ing the destination for saving the judgement data 18 Save the judgement data to the designated des tination NOTE hy For details about how to save a file to a disk see Chapter 21 PERFORMING FILE OP ERATIONS 19 The waveform judgement operation will be ex ecuted when data captured in memory is re played NOTE The result of the waveform judgem
363. ting 11 9 11 USING THE SCALING FUNCTIONS Creating a User Defined UNIT Setting 17 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the UNIT setting on the right then press the EN CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit TER key to display a window for creating a user t Of 5000 4500 0 mV defined UNIT setting 500 0 4500 0 mv 18 Use the numeric keypad or jog shuttle dial to 2 Off Engineering Unit Setting input the desired UNIT setting then press the Setting Method Offset s tting ENTER key to register your setting Meas Value _EU Value Setting 1 0000 1 0000 NOTE jy Unit V Select For details about how to input alphanumerics see Chapter 19 INPUTTING ALPHANU MERIC CHARACTERS Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 Span J K L M N PR Q Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the SPAN position then press the ENTER key to CH EU Lower EU Upper Unit display its pull down menu t Of 500 0 4500 0 Use the arrow keys to select whether or not to 500 0 5000 mV jh have the OFFSET settings affect the measure 2 Off ment span then press the ENTER key to reg Setting Method Offset s tting ister your setting Meas Value EU Value Setting 41 0000 1 0000 Engineering Unit Settings Input 2 2 NOTE h Select Unit Length Choose For more information about this SPAN set Span Do notlink not link lect Exec regist ti
364. ting Its Volume 18 7 Enabling the Key Click Sound 18 8 Changing the Date and Time 18 9 Changing the Displayed Language 18 10 Using the Long Length Z Fold Unit 18 11 Making a Copy of the Screen Display 18 1 18 USING THE BASIC FUNCTIONS 18 1 Locking the Panel Keys The KEY LOCK function lets you disable input from the panel keys For more information about the KEY LOCK function see Subsection 4 7 2 The SYSTEM SETTINGS Window Setting Procedure 1 Pressthe SYSTEM key to open the SYSTEM SET System Settings System 1 4 TINGS window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the KEY LOCK position then press the ENTER key to dis play its pull down menu 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired status then press the ENTER key to register your setting Key Lock Settings AMP System System amp AMP 18 2 Returning the Settings to Their Factory Default Settings This function enables you to reset the settings to their factory preset default settings For more information about this function see Subsection 4 7 2 The SYSTEM SETTINGS Window Setting Procedure ET System System 1 4 1 Pressthe SYSTEM key to open the SYSTEM S TINGS window Key Lock Off 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the RE TURN TO DEFAULT SETTINGS position under Settings SETTINGS then press the ENTER or EXECUTE Save current settings W key to display its prompt menu Load settings from Disk W
365. tion 16 7 Reformatting a Hard Disk 3 14 3 PREPARATIONS 3 6 2 Connecting to a DC Power Supply This recorder is certified to display the CE mark when an external DC filter box is connected to the DC adapter unit If the recorder will be run using the DC adapter unit within the EU region always connect the recorder and its DC adapter unit to an external DC filter box for use If you purchased the WR1000 equipped with the DC adapter unit outside of the EU please note that it will not come with an external DC filter box nor be in compliance with the CE standard The following explains how to connect the recorder to a DC power supply depending on whether or not an external DC filter box will be used Connect the DC power supply in accordance with your working environ ment 1 Connecting to a DC Power Supply without Using an External DC Filter Box 2 Using an External DC Filter Box to Connect a DC Power Supply Moreover the DC adapter unit is available in two types the 12 VDC type and 24 VDC type Be sure to use a power supply that conforms to the specifications of the DC adapter unit that you have connected When running on a DC power supply the maximum chart speed becomes 25 mm per second Connecting to a DC Power Supply without Using an External DC Filter Box 1 Connect the DC power cord to an external DC power supply 12 VDC or 24 VDC Connect the red orange yellow brown and green leads to the terminal
366. tion 4 7 2 Setting Procedure System Settings System 1 4 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the SYSTEM SET TINGS window File Delete w 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Disk Initialize W DRIVE LIST position under DISK OPERATION 3 Press the ENTER key to display a list of the a recorder s installed drives Drive Type Connection A FDD Internal C HDD SCSI ID 0 D HDD SCSI ID 0 E HDD SCSI ID 0 16 10 17 SETTING THE INTERFACE FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 17 SETTING THE INTERFACE FUNCTIONS This chapter describes how to set the interface functions 17 1 Selecting the Interface Type 17 2 Selecting the New Line Code 17 3 Setting the RS 232C Interface Conditions 17 3 1 Selecting the Transfer Speed 17 3 2 Selecting the Length of the DATA Byte 17 3 3 Selecting the Number of Stop Bit s 17 3 4 Selecting the Parity Mode 17 3 5 Selecting the Handshaking Flow Control Mode 17 3 6 Selecting the Time Out Interval 17 4 Setting the GP IB Interface Conditions 17 4 1 Selecting the Recorder s Device Address 17 4 2 Selecting the Terminator Code 17 4 3 Selecting the Time Out Interval 17 1 17 SETTING THE INTERFACE FUNCTIONS 17 1 Selecting the Interface Type To select the type of interface to use perform the steps below The Remote I F parameter can only be set when the GP IB interface is installed For more information about the Remote I F
367. tion Settings System 2 4 Remote I F RS 232C RS 232C Settings v Speed Length Parity Timeout ENTER select EXEC register Press the SYSTEM key to open the Option Set tings window Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Change Settings on the right of RS 232C Settings then press the ENTER key to display the RS 232C Set tings submenu Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Length position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to select the desired number of bits per DATA byte then press the ENTER key to register your setting If you are finished changing all of your RS 232C settings press the EXECUTE key to register them 17 3 17 SETTING THE INTERFACE FUNCTIONS 17 3 3 Selecting the Number of Stop Bits The Stop Bit s parameter determines the number of stop bits used during data transfer via the RS 232C interface For more information see Subsection 4 7 3 The Option Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM key to open the Option Set Option Settings System 2 4 tings window 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Change Remote I F RS 232C Settings on the right of RS 232C Settings then RS 232C Settings Y press the ENTER key to display the RS 232C Set Speed tings submenu Length 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Stop Speed Bit s position then press the ENTER key to dis op Bit Length
368. tion about the Color parameter see Subsection 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window Setting Procedure Part 1 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Settings window Format 16 Divisions 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Color position then press the ENTER key to Zone CH Color Zone CH Color display its window 1 CH 1 9 CH9 Color Red Current L Blue 30 Set 1 Green 20 l Format Settings Record 2 3 Enter select Exec register 14 21 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS Part 2 lt lt To simply select a standard color gt gt 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired color then press the EXECUTE key to register your setting lt lt To specify a user defined color gt gt gt When a user defined color is created it replaces one of the standard colors A user defined color can be created using a combination of red green and blue 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the standard color to be replaced then press the Format 16 Divisions ENTER key to display the color definition win dow Zone CH Color Zone CH Color Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to ei can chi 1 9 CH9 W ther red green or blue then press the ENTER key to display its window Hed Curent 7 Use the numeric keyp
369. tions are met The measurement mode is RECORDER The Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T and The Function setting for Area Statistical Calculation is Area Available Settings Normal Sets the area of the cursor defined range of data as the difference be tween the respective areas of the positive and negative domains center ing on the baseline 0 V of the measured data domains OV domains Positive Sets the area of a cursor defined range of data as the total sum of positive domains centering on the baseline 0 V of the measured data domains OV domains Negative Sets the area of a cursor defined range of data as the total sum of negative domains centering on the baseline 0 V of the measured data domains OV domains Absolute Sets the area of a cursor defined range of data as the total sum of both positive and negative domains centering on the baseline 0 V of the mea sured data domains OV domains 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS End Point Processing This parameter selects the method for calculating the area It can only be set when the following conditions are met The measurement mode is RECORDER and The Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is X Y and The Function setting for Area Statistical Calculation is Area Available Settings Open Calculates the area within the space enclosed by extending solid lines
370. to set recording related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS Part 5 Settings at the Format Settings window 14 Press the RECORD key to open the Format Settings window 15 Set the Format parameter 16 Set the Zone CH parameter NOTE 0 Also perform other format related settings as required For information about format related functions see Subsec tion 4 5 3 The Format Settings Window For details on how to set format related parameters see Chapter 14 USING THE RECORDING FUNCTIONS 9 11 9 SAVING DATA IN REALTIME 9 12 Part 6 Start measurement 17 Press the CLOSE key to close the currently opened window 18 Press the PRINTER key if you wish to record onto chart pa per 19 Press the START key 20 Press the TRIGGER key if the Start Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual Part 7 Stop measurement 21 Press the TRIGGER key if the Stop Condition Source setting at the Trigger Settings window is Manual 22 Press the STOP key Part 8 Set the Replay Conditions for the Captured Data 23 Press the MEMORY key to open the Data Replay Settings win dow 24 Set the Replay Source parameter 25 Set the Capture Block or File Name parameter When the Replay Source setting is Memory Set the Capture Block parameter When the Replay Source seiting is Disk Set the File Name parameter 26 Set the Replay CH p
371. tput inside the reference range When at least one or all of the input wave forms are outside of the reference range No Good When all of the input waveforms are inside the reference area When at least one or all of the input wave A pulse is output forms are outside of the reference area Selects the target CH No for conducting waveform judgement JUDGEMENT DATA FILE This parameter can only be set when the Mode setting is Memory It loads a judgement data file that was previously generated and saved GENERATE AREA DATA The values shown in this section are only for display and cannot be changed here This section displays information about the generation of judgement data using data captured in memory and about the reference waveform Reference CH Selects the Channel No of a waveform out of the captured memory data for use as the reference waveform Range This parameter which is only displayed and cannot be changed indicates the Range setting of the channel selected by CH setting EU This parameter which is only displayed and cannot be changed indicates the On Off status of Scaling for the channel selected by the CH setting No of Data This parameter which is only displayed and cannot be changed indicates the number of data points of the channel selected by the Reference CH setting Allowable Voltage Range Generates a reference waveform with a wide voltage axis Allowable Tim
372. tput Ratio Use the arrow keys to select All CH or Selected Data Save V CH s then press the ENTER key to register your setting If you have chosen Selected CH s proceed to Part 2 Part 2 Data Replay Settings Memory 2 4 If the Replay CH Setting is Selected CH s gt gt 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to CH Selection then press the ENTER key to dis play its pull down menu Replay CH Selected CH s v Use the arrow keys to move to the target chan CH Selection nel no then press the ENTER key to display 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 8 its pull down menu Use the arrow keys to se Off Off Off Off Off Off Off lect ON then press the ENTER key to register your setting for that channel Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Next select OFF for all channels that you do not wish to replay by repeating Steps 4 and 5 Press the EXECUTE key to register your set tings for all channels To replay the captured data press the main con trol panel s MEM OUT key Enter select Exec register 12 13 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 2 3 Expanding Compressing the Time Axis for Replaying Captured Data The following procedure lets you expand or compress the time axis displayed during the replay of captured data by setting the Output Ratio parameter This procedure can only be set when the target data has been captured by a Direct Save or Memory Save operation For more inf
373. trol Panel 2 1 5 The Conditions Panel 2 2 The Top Panel 2 3 The Left Panel 2 4 The Right Panel 2 5 The Amp Units 2 5 1 The V Type Amp 2 5 2 The M Type Amp 2 5 3 The Logic Amp 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 2 1 The Front Panel As shown in the figure below the panel keys on the main unit s front panel can be broadly grouped into six groups 1 Display monitor 2 Amp control panel 3 Numeric keypad 4 CHART SPEED section 6 Conditions panel 5 Main control panel 1 Display monitor Displays the function menus and measured data 2 Amp control panel Used for setting the amp conditions 3 Numeric keypad Permits input of alphanumeric characters 4 CHART SPEED section Selects the speed for feeding the chart paper 5 Main control panel Used to perform the recorder s main operations such as starting or stopping measurement 6 Conditions panel Used to select and load a set of measurement conditions 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN UNIT S PARTS 2 1 1 The Display Monitor This subsection describes the monitor display on the main unit s front panel 1 Measurement mode display area RECORDER4 2 Chart speed display area 200mm s O7 MAY 99 _ 15 32 30 3 Date time display area 4 Simplified message display area 5 Display monitor
374. ts as soon as the recorder is turned on 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS BEEPER Selects the beeper s function and when the beeper is enabled its volume Available Settings Off Disables the beeper TRIGGER Sounds the beeper whenever the trigger condition is satisfied ERROR Sounds the beeper whenever an error occurs BEEPER VOLUME Selects the volume level of the Beeper and or Key Click functions Available Settings 14 levels from 1 through 14 KEY CLICK Selects whether or not to generate a clicking sound whenever a panel key on the recorder s front panel is operated Available Settings Off Disables the Key Click sound On Enables the Key Click sound DATE TIME Displays a submenu for setting the current data and time REMOTE I F This parameter which can only be set when the GP IB interface unit is installed selects the type of interface to be used for data transfer between the recorder and a computer The computer interface selected here will be used for data transfer Available Settings RS 232C Enables data transfer via the RS 232C interface GP IB Enables data transfer via the GP IB interface unit NEW LINE CODE Selects the character code s to be used for indicating a new line for the RS 232C or GP IB interface Available Settings CR LF CR LF RS 232C SETTINGS Sets the interface conditions for the RS 232C serial interface To
375. ttings window s Display Mode setting is Y T or X Y They also vary ac cording to whether the measurement mode is RECORDER or LOGGING In RECORDER Mode When the Record Settings Window s Display Mode Setting is Y T Format Settings Record 2 3 Record Format 25 8 Grid 10mm Fine Envelope Off Priority Display On Priority CH CH3 CH Zone 2 1 2 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 8 Zone 8 Base Line Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Off Zone 8 Off Logic Zone Group A Zone 1 Group B Zone 2 Group C Zone10 Group D Zone16 RECORD FORMAT This parameter which can only be set when the Record Settings window s Display Mode setting is Y T selects the format for the display and recording of waveforms Available Settings 200mm x 1 160mm x 1 100mm x 1 100mm x 2 80mm x 2 50mm x 2 50mm x 4 40mm x 4 25mm x 8 20mm x 8 12 5mm x 16 10mm x 16 ZONE Only available with the WR1000 16 model Sample printout lt Standard format gt DIIS 2222252252052052 NOTE 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS When the Record Format setting is Zone you can define the number and width of zones for waveform display and recording also specifying the overlapping of waveforms if so desired Specify the width of a zone as extending from the starting point of the mm position at the bottom of each channel s recording area lt ZONE form
376. unction Y T play Mode position then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu 3 Use the arrow keys to select Y T then press the ENTER key to register your setting 14 1 2 Changing the Output Destination of Signal Input To set the destination for recording signal input to chart paper or the recorder s internal memory perform the steps below For more information about this Function parameter see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Setting Procedure Record Settings Record 1 3 1 aa Key te apetHilie Set Display Mode Y T 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Func Function 19 tion position then press the ENTER key to dis Chart Speed play its pull down menu V1 setting 3 Use the arrow keys to select the desired output Memory destination then press the ENTER key to register your setting 14 1 3 Outputting Captured Data onto Chart Paper To output data that has been captured in the recorder s internal memory or saved to disk perform the steps below For more information about the Output Mode parameter see Subsection 4 5 2 The Record Settings Window Setting Procedure 1 Press the RECORD key to open the Record Set Record Settings Record 1 3 tings window Display Mode Y T 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Out Functor Memory put Mode position then press the ENTER key to Output Mode display its pu
377. ure TC K 200 to 1300 C TC J 200 to 1100 C TC T 200 to 400 C TC R 0 to 1600 C 200 to 800 C TC B 600 to 1700 C Filter Line 1 5 Hz 3 dB at 6 dB oct Low pass 5 10 30 50 500 Hz 5 kHz 3 dB at 12 dB oct Precision Temperature coefficients Voltage 0 25 of F S Temperature TC K J T E 200 to 0 C Other ranges TC R to 200 C 9 5 C 200 to 800 C 6 5 C Other ranges 0 2 of rdg 4 5 C TC B 600 to 700 C Other ranges Zero point 0 01 of F S C Gain 0 02 of F S C 0 5 of rdg 3 C 0 2 of rdg 3 C 9 5 C 0 2 of rdg 5 5 C an Insulation resistance 100 MQ at 500 VDC Isolation voltage 2300 VAC for one minute between an input terminal and the frame Permissible signal source resistance 1 or less Input bias current A D converter 2 nA typical Sampling interval 10 us A D resolution 16 bits Common mode rejection ratio 100 dB typical when the line filter is on 120 dB Signal noise ratio 48 dB typical at 100 uVp p in the 20 mV range with the and terminals shorted Frequency response DC coupling DC to 20 kHz 1 3 dB typical AC coupling 10 Hz to 20 kHz 1 3 dB typical Maximum permissible input voltage Input terminal type Between and terminals 2 V to 500 V ranges 500 VDC DC ACP P 20 mV to 1 V ranges 100
378. use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Move to upper Press EXEC to move folder level folder then press the EXECUTE key Press ENTER to select CND Press to change display mode 21 5 21 PERFORMING FILE OPERATIONS 21 5 Creating a New Folder This section explains how to create a new folder Sample Setting In this example a new folder named GRAPHTEC will be created in the hard disk at drive C as the destination folder for a Save current settings operation at the System Settings window The hard disk can only be specified if the hard disk unit is installed NOTE 0 perform another file related operation The same procedure is used for creating a new folder whether you wish to save data load data or If the existing folders or files cannot all be displayed in a one page pull down menu press the V key to scroll through the available folders or files vertically To display the time of data capture press the gt key to scroll the list horizontally Setting Procedure Make new folder Make new file CND Press lt to change display mode Press EXEC to move folder Press ENTER to select Make new folder New folder name Press ENTER to register T ITOMMVUOWDLY 21 6 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the File Name parameter then press the ENTER key to display its pull down menu NOTE p In the pull down menu each folder name
379. val External Off After measurement is started by input of a REMOTE trigger signal it is stopped by pressing the STOP key Internal After measurement is started by pressing the START key it is stopped when the specified Stop Condition is met Manual After measurement is started by input of a REMOTE trigger signal it is stopped by pressing the TRIGGER key External After measurement is started by input of a REMOTE trigger signal it is also stopped by input of a REMOTE trigger signal Time After measurement is started by input of a REMOTE trigger signal it is stopped after a specified time interval 4 DESCRIPTION OF MENUS 4 5 The Record Menu This section describes the menu and three windows accessed via the RECORD key on the conditions panel 4 5 1 The Record Menu s Tree Structure Parameters accessed by the RECORD key in RECORDER mode RECORD key A RECORD SETTINGS FORMAT SETTINGS iE DISPLAY MODE In RECORDER Y T mode RECORD FORMAT L FUNCTION GRID DIRECT ENVELOPE m CHART SPEED PRIORITY DISPLAY V1 SETTING L PRIORITY CH V2 SETTING COLOR Bere ac Off WIDTH TIMING BASE LINE L INTERVAL LOGIC ZONE EVENT In RECORDER X Y mode SCALE PRINT GRID Off LI COMPENSATION MODE On PLOT L FORMAT Off LIST PRINT On L MEMORY COLOR OUTPUT MODE X AXIS L SCALE PRINT ANNOTATION SETTING
380. ve the SCSI or GP IB interface board perform the installation procedure in reverse Moreover when pulling out the board be sure to grasp the board mounting removal knob with your hand to pull the board out and off NOTE jr A recorder equipped with the SCSI interface board can use the GP IB interface Whenever the re corder is turned on however either the SCSI or GP IB interface board must already be installed A recorder equipped with the GP IB interface board cannot use the SCSI interface Use only the devices recommended by Graphtec as the external device connected via the SCSI inter face Use of other devices may prevent the recorder from meeting its specifications For a list of recom mended devices contact your sales representative or nearest Graphtec vendor For information about the SCSI interface s settings and its connection to an external device see Step 4 onward The following figures depict the installation of the GP IB interface board as an example The installa tion procedure for the SCSI interface board is exactly the same except that you need to change the DIP switch settings after installing the SCSI interface board Z CAUTION Be sure to turn off the recorder before installing or removing the SCSI or GP IB interface board 3 4 1 Installing the SCSI or GP IB Interface Board 1 Remove the M3L4 setscrews that secure the cover covering the SCSI GP IB board slot then remove the COVer 3 PREPARATIONS
381. void electrical shock and fire hazards For grounding use a ground wire with a diameter of at least 0 75 mm When using the recorder in an environment where grounding is not possible ensure that the voltage to be measured is no greater than 50 V DC or rms Before turning on the recorder ensure that the electric socket s supply voltage conforms to the recorder s power rating Use of a different supply voltage may cause damage to the recorder or a fire hazard due to electrical shock or current leakage Securely connect the power cord Make sure that the socket has a good protective ground Use of a different supply voltage prohibited Never disassemble or remodel the recorder Such action may cause a fire hazard due to electric shock or current leakage Contact with a high voltage component inside the recorder may cause electric shock f repair is required contact your sales representative or nearest Graphtec vendor S No disassembly If the recorder generates smoke is too hot emits a strange odor or otherwise functions abnormally turn off its power and unplug its power cord from the elec trical socket Use of the recorder in such status may result in a fire hazard or electrical shock After checking that smoke is no longer being generated contact your sales representative or nearest Graphtec vendor to request repair Never try to perform repair yourself Repair work by in
382. y terminated as soon as averaging has been performed the number of times specified by the Number of Means setting Setting Procedure Part 1 Memory Settings Memory 1 4 KOO apertis Memory Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Stat Calc position then press the ENTER key Parcae to display its pull down menu Number Of Me Use the arrow keys to select On then press the Capture Block mg ENTER key to register your setting Part 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the M Sett M 1 4 ENDS enon Number of Means position then press the EN TER key to display its pull down menu Use the numeric keypad or the jog shuttle dial to input the number of times averaging is to be performed then press the ENTER key to regis Stat Calc On Number Of Means EH Set Value B ter your setting Limits 1 128 Press ENTER to register 12 9 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS Press the START key to initiate measurement 2 Whenever data is saved to the specified ons 4 SELECT cory Memory Block the data in that block and in the 9 M cursor final Block No are averaged and then the result DIRECTION LIST TRIGGER a cy is stored at the final Block No This operation Frege REED pacal is performed the number of times specified by mem the Number of Means setting To display the averaged data set the Data Re play Settings window s Replay
383. your setting Memory Settings Memory 1 4 File Name B N DEFAULT DAT v Number of CH 1 NOTE Event Off Logic For information about the Logic parameter see Subsection 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window 12 8 12 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTIONS 12 1 4 Performing Statistical Calculation on Data Captured in Internal Memory The following procedure lets you perform a Statistical Calculation operation using the Program Block and Stat Calc functions A Statistical Calculation operation calculates the average of the data stored at the specified Memory Block which varies with the Memory Chain and Capture Block settings and the data stored at the Program Block and then saves the calculated result to the Program Block The Program Block is the final Memory Block No where the calculated result will be stored This procedure can only be performed when all of the following conditions are met Data has already been captured in the recorder s internal memory by a Direct Save or Memory Save opera tion The Capture Destination setting is Memory and The Memory Block setting is other than 256 512 kW x 1 For more information about the Stat Calc and Program Block functions see Subsection 4 3 2 The Memory Settings Window NOTE p Before performing a Statistical Calculation operation set the Action setting at the Trigger Settings win dow to Repeat As a result measurement will be automaticall

USER`S MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents